Академический Документы
Профессиональный Документы
Культура Документы
Operator's Manual
B-61804E-2/05
B61804E2/05
Table of Contents
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . s1
I. GENERAL
1. GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
2. CONVERSATIONAL AUTOMATIC PROGRAMMING FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
3. NOTES ON READING THIS MANUAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
33
38
39
39
55
57
60
61
65
80
85
86
87
91
92
TABLE OF CONTENTS
3.5
3.6
B61804E2/05
3.4.4
Tool Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
3.4.5
3.4.6
Passing Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
3.4.7
3.4.8
3.4.9
3.4.10
3.4.11
3.5.2
3.5.3
3.5.4
3.5.5
3.5.6
3.6.2
3.6.3
3.6.4
3.6.5
3.6.6
3.6.7
3.6.8
3.6.9
3.6.10
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.5
4.6
5.2
5.3
5.4
5.5
NC DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
5.6
5.7
5.8
TABLE OF CONTENTS
B61804E2/05
EXPLANATION OF FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SYSTEM PARAMETER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NOTES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
199
203
204
205
210
210
211
212
213
213
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
215
215
215
219
222
223
223
225
225
227
228
229
229
229
230
231
236
237
238
238
239
240
241
241
TABLE OF CONTENTS
B61804E2/05
243
244
248
249
251
255
256
256
269
287
288
289
290
306
308
310
310
313
313
314
316
318
320
322
322
323
325
327
TABLE OF CONTENTS
B61804E2/05
1.11
INTERFERENCE CHECK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.11.1
Interference Check by Tool Shape and Machining Shape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.11.2
Interference Check in Approach and Return relief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.11.3
Grooving when the Tool Width and Groove Width are the Same . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.11.4
Approach and Relief to Inner Diameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.12
INITIAL SCREEN DISPLAY FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.12.1 Screen Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.12.2 Setting Initial Screen Display Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.12.3 Check Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.12.4 Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.12.5 System Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.13
OUTPUTTING NC DATA IN THE FS15T/16T FORMAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.13.1 MTF Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.13.2 Supplementary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.14
FUNCTION FOR PREPARING THE NEXT TOOL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.15
OUTPUT FUNCTION FOR INTERPOLATION RIGID TAPPING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
332
332
332
334
335
336
336
337
341
342
343
344
344
348
349
351
357
363
364
365
367
370
370
370
371
371
372
372
373
373
373
374
375
376
376
377
377
378
380
383
383
383
384
385
TABLE OF CONTENTS
B61804E2/05
KIND OF MACHINING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SPECIFICATION OF CAXIS MACHINING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DESIGNATION OF CAXIS FIGURE DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.3.1
Inserting or Deleting Caxis Figure Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.3.2
Details of Caxis Figure Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.4
MILLING IN MULTIPLE PLANES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.5
CAXIS MACHINING WITH A MACHINING PLANE SPECIFIED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
390
391
392
392
393
407
408
412
412
412
415
416
427
428
OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SPECIFICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.1
Caxis FAPT Animated Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.2
Parameter Screen for Animated Simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
430
431
431
434
MATERIAL DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TOOL DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.2.1
Tool Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.2.2
Input and Output of the Tool Data and Collation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.2.3
Displaying and Setting of Tooling Informations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
436
437
437
438
439
5. MTF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442
5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
5.5
5.6
443
447
458
460
466
470
472
472
472
472
473
TABLE OF CONTENTS
B61804E2/05
FIGURE DEFINITION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MACHINING DEFINITION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SYSTEM PARAMETERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MTF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TOOL PATH DRAWING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
475
476
478
478
479
DRILLING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486
MILLING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487
ROTATING THE MACHINING PLANE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489
513
515
517
518
SETTING MTF PARAMETERS WHEN THE YAXIS FAPT FUNCTION IS SUPPORTED . . . . 554
8. NOTES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 558
PROGRAMMING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.1.1
Material Data Input (Menu No.1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.1.2
Part Figure Input (Menu No.2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.1.3
Home Position and Turret Index Position (Menu No.3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.1.4
Machining Definition (Menu No.4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.1.5
NC Data Preparation (Menu No.5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.1.6
Animation Drawing (Menu No.6) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
c7
563
563
563
564
564
568
569
TABLE OF CONTENTS
B61804E2/05
2.2
PARAMETERS, ETC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.2.1
System Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.2.2
MTF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.2.3
Tool Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.3
WARNINGS AND CAUTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
570
570
571
573
574
590
592
596
598
601
601
602
615
616
TABLE OF CONTENTS
B61804E2/05
OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DEFINITION BY MANUAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.2.1
Tool Data Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.2.2
Cutting Area Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.2.3
Cutting Condition Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.3
AUTOMATIC PROCESSING DECISION FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.3.1
Processing Area Division Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.3.2
Process Setting Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.3.3
Automatic Processing Decision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.3.4
Process Area Division . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
627
628
629
630
630
631
631
633
633
634
TOOL DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TOOLING INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RELATION WITH BACKSIDE MACHINING FAPT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RELATION WITH 4AXIS LATH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
641
641
641
641
649
650
651
652
653
654
655
TABLE OF CONTENTS
B61804E2/05
APPENDIX
A. SETTING DATA, SYSTEM PARAMETER, MTF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 661
A.1
A.2
A.3
A.4
662
668
695
704
704
709
720
725
740
744
744
745
746
746
747
748
752
752
753
755
756
756
761
761
763
764
773
776
776
780
784
784
789
792
793
793
793
797
797
802
803
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
This section describes the safety precautions related to the use of CNC units. It is essential that these precautions
be observed by users to ensure the safe operation of machines equipped with a CNC unit (all descriptions in this
section assume this configuration).
Users must also observe the safety precautions related to the machine, as described in the relevant manual supplied
by the machine tool builder. Before attempting to operate the machine or create a program to control the operation
of the machine, the operator must become fully familiar with the contents of this manual and relevant manual
supplied by the machine tool builder.
s1
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
B61804E2/05
This manual includes safety precautions for protecting the user and preventing damage to the
machine. Precautions are classified into Warning and Caution according to their bearing on safety.
Also, supplementary information is described as a Note. Read the Warning, Caution, and Note
thoroughly before attempting to use the machine.
WARNING
Applied when there is a danger of the user being injured or when there is a damage of both the user
being injured and the equipment being damaged if the approved procedure is not observed.
CAUTION
Applied when there is a danger of the equipment being damaged, if the approved procedure is not
observed.
NOTE
The Note is used to indicate supplementary information other than Warning and Caution.
s2
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
B61804E2/05
GENERAL WARNINGS
WARNING
1. Before operating the machine, thoroughly check the entered data on the screen. Operating the
machine with incorrect data may result in the tool colliding with the workpiece and/or machine,
possibly causing damage to the machine and/or tool itself, or injury to the user.
2. When the tool offset function is used, before activating the machine, check the direction and
value of the offset to ensure that the tool will not collide with the workpiece or machine. Any
collision may cause damage to the tool and/or machine, or injury to the user.
3. Before starting the NC program prepared using the conversational function, thoroughly check
the contents of the NC data to ensure that the tool path and machining processes are set correctly,
and that the tool will not collide with the workpiece or machine (including the chuck and
tailstock). Before starting a production run, perform a dry run to ensure that the tool will not
collide with the workpiece or machine (including the chuck and tailstock). For example, start
the machining program without mounting a workpiece on the machine. Any collision may cause
damage to the tool and/or machine, or injury to the user.
4. Before using the conversational function to prepare a machining program, determine whether
the tool data, material data, setting data, system parameters, and MTF data are set as specified
by the machine tool builder. If these data values are not set appropriately, the cutting conditions
necessary for machining may not be set properly, possibly causing damage to the tool, or injury
to the user.
s3
I. GENERAL
GENERAL
B61804E2/05
1. GENERAL
GENERAL
1. GENERAL
GENERAL
B61804E2/05
B61804E2/05
GENERAL
2. CONVERSATIONAL AUTOMATIC
PROGRAMMING FUNCTION
(1) The NC data thus produced automatically by Symbolic FAPT are not
directly used for machining, but they are once loaded to the machining
memory.
(2) The automatic programming unit is not capable of storing various
information of machine tools and machine control unit.
Note that control information of machine tools can be processed only
in machine control unit.
(3) The machining information can be input to CNC by the following two
methods.
(a) Method of loading automatic programming results into the
machining memory after automatic programming has been made
by using the Symbolic FAPT. This is a standard method, which can
be used without any knowledge on NC tape format.
(b) Method of inputting the machining information into the machining
memory of the machine control unit by MDI operation.
Since this operation is the same as in NC unit for ordinary MDI
input, you are requested to be familiar with NC tape format, etc.
GENERAL
B61804E2/05
Abbreviation
15TFB
15TFB
15TTFB
16TA CAP II
16TB CAP II
16TC CAP II
16iTA CAPII
16TTA CAPII
16TB CAP II
16TC CAP II
16iTA CAP II
16T CAP II
(1) This manual does not cover the functions on the NC side.
(2) The function of an NC machine tool system does not depend only on
the NC, but on the combination of the machine tool, its magnetic
cabinet, servo system, the NC, operators panels, etc. It is too difficult
to describe the function, programming, and operation in various
combinations of them. This manual generally describes them from the
standpoint of the NC. So, for a particular NC machine tool, refer to
the manual issued by the machine tool builder, which should take
precedence over this manual.
(3) Notes refer to detailed and specific items. So, when a note will be
encountered, terms used in it sometimes will not have been explained
it. In such a case, first skip the note, then return to it after having read
the manual in outline for details.
(4) For 16T CAP II, the manual covers only the 5710 system and the
5800 system series and later. The earlier series may not support some
functions described in the manual. See Appendix 2 for the
unsupported functions.
B61804E2/05
1. EXPLANATION FOR
CRT/MDI PANEL
1. EXPLANATION FOR
CRT/MDI PANEL
10
B61804E2/05
B61804E2/05
Text type
1. EXPLANATION FOR
CRT/MDI PANEL
Symbol type
MDI panel for 16TC/16iTA CAP II (10.4inch horizontal type LCD/MDI unit)
11
1. EXPLANATION FOR
CRT/MDI PANEL
Text type
Symbol type
MDI panel for 16TC/16iTA CAP II (10.4inch vertical type LCD/MDI unit)
12
B61804E2/05
B61804E2/05
Text type
1. EXPLANATION FOR
CRT/MDI PANEL
Symbol type
MDI panel for 16TC/16iTA CAP II (14inch horizontal type CRT/MDI unit)
13
1. EXPLANATION FOR
CRT/MDI PANEL
MDI panel for 16iTA CAP II (separate type MDI unit: text type)
MDI panel for 16iTA CAP II (separate type MDI unit: symbol type)
14
B61804E2/05
B61804E2/05
1. EXPLANATION FOR
CRT/MDI PANEL
The mode in which the CRT/MDI unit is used for the creation of CNC data
with the Symbolic FAPT is called FAPT mode. The mode in which the
CRT/MDI is used for operations related to the CNC functions, such as
editing of created data, setting and check of various parameters for CNC
machining and tool offset amounts, and check of travel during CNC
machining, is called CNC mode.
To change the mode of the CRT/MDI unit between FAPT and CNC/PMC,
press the mode selector keys with lamps as shown below.
D For 15TFB
When
MMC/
FAPT
When
PMC/
CNC
FAPT
To display the CNC screen, press one of the other function keys.
15
2. KEYS EFFECTIVE IN
FAPT MODE
B61804E2/05
The diagram at under shows only the keys used in the Symbolic FAPT.
The symbols omitted are not used in FAPT mode.
16
B61804E2/05
2. KEYS EFFECTIVE IN
FAPT MODE
17
2. KEYS EFFECTIVE IN
FAPT MODE
18
B61804E2/05
B61804E2/05
Text type
2. KEYS EFFECTIVE IN
FAPT MODE
Symbol type
MDI panel for 16TC/16iTA CAP II (10.4inch horizontal type LCD/MDI unit)
19
2. KEYS EFFECTIVE IN
FAPT MODE
Text type
Symbol type
MDI panel for 16TC/16iTA CAP II (10.4inch vertical type LCD/MDI unit)
20
B61804E2/05
B61804E2/05
Text type
2. KEYS EFFECTIVE IN
FAPT MODE
Symbol type
MDI panel for 16TC/16iTA CAP II (14inch horizontal type CRT/MDI unit)
21
2. KEYS EFFECTIVE IN
FAPT MODE
MDI panel for 16iTA CAP II (separate type MDI unit: text type)
MDI panel for 16iTA CAP II (separate type MDI unit: symbol type)
22
B61804E2/05
B61804E2/05
2. KEYS EFFECTIVE IN
FAPT MODE
23
2. KEYS EFFECTIVE IN
FAPT MODE
B61804E2/05
24
B61804E2/05
3. SOFT KEY
SOFT KEY
The 12 keys under the CRT are called soft keys. The function of the keys
change according to the screen displayed. The function for each screen
are framed at the bottom of the screen.
25
B61804E2/05
PROGRAMMING AND
OPERATION BY SYMBOLIC FAPT
1. SYMBOLIC FAPT
SYMBOLIC FAPT
29
2. START OF SYMBOLIC
FAPT PROGRAMMING
PROGRAMMING AND
OPERATION BY SYMBOLIC FAPT
B61804E2/05
CAUTION
After turning on the power, do not touch the keyboard until
the initial FAPT screen is displayed. Some keys are
specifically designed for maintenance or other special
operations; if any of these keys is pressed before the initial
screen is displayed, the machine may behave
unexpectedly.
Symbolic FAPT
side initial screen
(16T CAP II).
B61804E2/05
PROGRAMMING AND
OPERATION BY SYMBOLIC FAPT
2. START OF SYMBOLIC
FAPT PROGRAMMING
Press the FAPT execution on the initial screen to allow the FAPT
execution procedures menu to be displayed, By pressing the Software key
Execution, programming is initiated according to the procedures.
Correction can be easily made by directly selecting any menu on
correcting programs. For example, press the Software key 2 for
selecting input of final parts figure. Press the 5 for creating the NC data.
However, it is not possible to execute programming in the reverse order,
namely from larger memory number to smaller one.
Press the End when the above screen is being displayed to return to the
initial screen.
31
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
PROGRAMMING AND
OPERATION BY SYMBOLIC FAPT
B61804E2/05
32
B61804E2/05
PROGRAMMING AND
OPERATION BY SYMBOLIC FAPT
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
3.1
BLANK AND
DRAWING (DRAWING
AND BLANK)
WARNING
1 Select the same material as that of the workpiece to be
machined. If a desired material option is not displayed on
the material menu, cancel the machining of the workpiece.
Failure to select the correct material may result in the
machining being performed under incorrect cutting
conditions, or the tool colliding with the workpiece and/or
machine, possibly causing damage to the machine and/or
tool itself, or injury to the user.
2 Select the blank figure corresponding to that of workpiece
to be machined. Failure to select the correct figure may
result in the tool colliding with the workpiece and/or
machine, possibly causing damage to the machine and/or
tool itself, or injury to the user.
3 Enter the correct blank dimensional data for the workpiece
to be machined. Failure to enter the correct data may result
in the tool colliding with the workpiece and/or machine,
possibly causing damage to the machine and/or tool itself,
or injury to the user.
Soft key 1
Go to the screen for the above processes. The meaning of each question
is as follows:
(a) MATERIAL NO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MN =
This is a question for selecting the material of blank. Input the number
corresponding to the material NO. For example, key in 4 when
selecting aluminum.
33
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
PROGRAMMING AND
OPERATION BY SYMBOLIC FAPT
B61804E2/05
2.
B61804E2/05
PROGRAMMING AND
OPERATION BY SYMBOLIC FAPT
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
35
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
PROGRAMMING AND
OPERATION BY SYMBOLIC FAPT
B61804E2/05
When it is pressed in the case of question for blank format, blank size, or
position of base line:
36
B61804E2/05
PROGRAMMING AND
OPERATION BY SYMBOLIC FAPT
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
37
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
PROGRAMMING AND
OPERATION BY SYMBOLIC FAPT
B61804E2/05
3.2
BLANK AND PART
(PART FIGURE)
WARNING
1 After entering part figure data, check the entered data.
Failure to enter correct data may result in the tool colliding
with the workpiece and/or machine, or forced machining
occurring, possibly causing damage to the workpiece,
machine, and/or tool itself, or injury to the user.
2 For a conversational program for which machining process
data has been prepared, if part figure data is modified, the
cutting area specified in the machining definition may be
changed. Operating the machine based on NC data in
memory, with an incorrect cutting area specified, may result
in the tool colliding with the workpiece and/or machine,
possibly causing damage to the machine and/or tool itself,
or injury to the user.
CAUTION
1 When entering threading data, check the data that is
automatically calculated by pressing the [OUTER
THREAD], [INNER THREAD], or [SQUARE THREAD] soft
key. If this data is incorrect, the workpiece cannot be
machined properly.
2 Check the figure data that is automatically inserted by the
batch input function for chamfering/corner R. If this data is
incorrect, the workpiece cannot be machined properly.
3 Check the figure data that is automatically created by the
pattern figure input function. If this data is incorrect, the
workpiece cannot be machined properly.
4 Check the data that is automatically set by the neck corner
input function. If this data is incorrect, the workpiece cannot
be machined properly.
38
B61804E2/05
3.2.1
Drawing of Program
Coordinate System and
Blank Figure
PROGRAMMING AND
OPERATION BY SYMBOLIC FAPT
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
The coordinate axis and blank figure matching the drawing format
previously selected are drawn on the screen.
3.2.2
Part Figure Input (Input
Method of with Figure)
The part figure can be input by depressing the figure symbol keys
sequentially along the profile of a part. Ten keys for numerical input and
alphabetic keys indicating the chamfering, rounding, threading,
grooving, and necking are employed as figure symbol keys.
39
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
PROGRAMMING AND
OPERATION BY SYMBOLIC FAPT
B61804E2/05
(Example)
Start / End
point point
For a figure illustrated above, input the following keys along the drawing.
The system will ask you necessary dimension, each time these figure
symbol keys are depressed.
(1) Contents of the question and the meaning of symbolic key.
Surface roughness
The system asks you the surface roughness, each time the figure
element symbol like a circle, a straight line, etc. is inputted. The
already designated standard surface roughness is automatically
displayed on the CRT screen at this time. If this value is allowable,
depress INPUT key only.
If you desire to change the surface roughness at that place only, select
the number of symbols 1, 2, 3, or 4.
NOTE
By parameter setting on parameter No.0010, the question
on the surface roughness can be skipped. When this
question is skipped, the standard surface roughness is
employed.
Start point
The system asks you the start point at the first step of figure input only.
SDX . . . . . Diameter value at start point
SZ . . . . . . . Z value at start point
PE . . . . . . . Whether a part exists on the left side or on right side along
a series of a figure profile to be inputted, is selected by
1 or 0.
The questions are made for the first figure element only, when a part
figure is inputted.
40
B61804E2/05
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
PROGRAMMING AND
OPERATION BY SYMBOLIC FAPT
Straight line
INPUT
TANGENT LAST . . . . TL
TANGENT NEXT . . . . TN
ANGLE FROM Z . . . . A
INPUT
The system does not always ask all the above items, depending
upon the input arrow directions, but it ask you necessary numerical
values only, and you have to input only those described on the
drawing.
(d) If data are insufficient, KEY IN AGAIN is displayed.
Circle
or
the circle when the system asks you the above question.
(b) SURFACE ROUGHNESS . . . . . . . . . . SR =
Input the number of
marks indicating the surface roughness
when the system asks you the above question.
(c) END POINT . . . . . . . . DX
Z
TANGENT LAST . . . . TL
TANGENT NEXT . . . . TN
RADIUS . . . . . . . . . . . R
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
PROGRAMMING AND
OPERATION BY SYMBOLIC FAPT
B61804E2/05
INPUT
key
When
When the system asks you SELECT START POINT to identify the
following two possible methods from each other, you have to select
the right side (), left side (), above () or below () by the
, ,
, or
Chamfering
key.
Chamfering is designated by
chamfer.
(a) ELEMENT SYMBOL . . . . . . . . . . . . . ES =
Answer C when the system asks you the above question.
42
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
PROGRAMMING AND
OPERATION BY SYMBOLIC FAPT
B61804E2/05
Rounding
43
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
PROGRAMMING AND
OPERATION BY SYMBOLIC FAPT
B61804E2/05
CAUTION
Keys
,
and
44
or
key.
B61804E2/05
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
PROGRAMMING AND
OPERATION BY SYMBOLIC FAPT
Threading
45
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
PROGRAMMING AND
OPERATION BY SYMBOLIC FAPT
B61804E2/05
CURSOR CURSOR
NEXT
PAGE
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
PROGRAMMING AND
OPERATION BY SYMBOLIC FAPT
B61804E2/05
Grooving
47
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
PROGRAMMING AND
OPERATION BY SYMBOLIC FAPT
B61804E2/05
(e) DIRECTION . . . . . . DN =
(: RIGHT : LEFT : ABOVE : BELOW)
Designate the grooving direction by the arrow such as right (),
left (), above () or below () when the system asks you the above
question.
(f) After inputting the width and depth, the system asks you the figure
at groove corners. Numbers 1 to 4 area allocated to the corners of
each groove in the sequence of figure input.
(Example)
INPUT
proceed to the next CRT screen when the system asks you the
question.
Trapezoid grooving (Automatic process determination function B is
required.)
As with grooving, to select trapezoid grooving, specify G.
(a) ON WHICH ELEMENT . . EE = Element on which a trapezoid
groove is made
(0: Last element, 1: Next element)
48
B61804E2/05
PROGRAMMING AND
OPERATION BY SYMBOLIC FAPT
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
CAUTION
If the line along which the width or depth of the groove is
measured is parallel to the Xaxis ( or ), specify the width
or depth with a radius.
(e) R/C OF CORNER
1ST . . . . KC = CV =
2ND . . . . KC = CV =
3RD . . . . KC = CV =
4TH . . . . KC = CV =
Specify the figures of the groove corners in the order in which they
are defined.
49
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
PROGRAMMING AND
OPERATION BY SYMBOLIC FAPT
B61804E2/05
if
is
if
is
if
is
if
is
In figure definition, the system does not check the validity of the
specified bottom width (W*) and bottom angle (A*) of the groove.
The operator must carefully observe the figure drawn after the figure
is defined.
The positions of bottom widths 1 and 2 and angles 1 and 2 of the
groove depend on the direction of figure definition in the same way as
they do for R/C OF CORNER.
50
B61804E2/05
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
PROGRAMMING AND
OPERATION BY SYMBOLIC FAPT
[Reference]
1) Trapezoid grooving can be defined in the same way as conventional
grooving. (Automatic process determination is also allowed.)
2) If bottom width 1 (W1), bottom width 2 (W2), bottom angle 1 (A1),
and bottom angle 2 (A2) of a groove are specified, the width data has
priority over the angle data. The system ignores the angle data.
3) To specify a trapezoid groove as shown in Fig. 3.2.2, do not define the
bottom width and bottom angle on the side of the groove having a
perpendicular wall.
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
PROGRAMMING AND
OPERATION BY SYMBOLIC FAPT
B61804E2/05
Necking width
Necking depth
Input the necking width and depth for the above questions. The
necking direction is always 45 with reference to Zaxis.
The necking width and depth are as illustrated below.
52
B61804E2/05
PROGRAMMING AND
OPERATION BY SYMBOLIC FAPT
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
Machine figure input before is drawn again on the CRT screen and the
message SELECT SOFT KEY is displayed at the lower side of
screen.
Check to see if there is any mistake in the input of figure by comparing
the drawing figure with that drawn on the screen. Press a software key
depending on the status at that time.
Meaning of software keys
[ESCAPE] . . . . . . . . . . It is used to return to the menu screen.
[BACK PAGE] . . . . . . . It is used to return to the previous screen
(drawing and blank screen).
[CORR.&ERASE] . . . . It is used to delete the machined figure
drawn on the screen and ERASE to modify
the machined figure. The modification
method is described below.
[CORRECTION] . . . . . It is used to modify the machined figure
based on the machined figure drawn on the
screen. The modification method is the
same as CORR. & ERASE.
[NEW] . . . . . . . . . . . . . It is used to delete the machined figure on
the screen and to input the figure again. All
elements input previously are deleted.
[LIST MODE] . . . . . . . It is used to display all data previously
input. Modification can be performed
similarly as in CORRECTION.
[DRAWNG RANGE] . . It is used to perform enlargement and
reduction of drawing. See Chapter 3 13
for the details.
[CHAMFER] . . . . . . . . It is used to insert the chamfer figure into all
of angles of machined figure drawn on the
screen. The details are described in the
following.
[CAXIS MENU] . . . . . It is displayed when the C axis FAPT
function option is available.
[YAXIS MENU] . . . . Displayed when the Yaxis FAPT function
is provided.
[NEXT PAGE] . . . . . . . It is used to move to the next page if there
is no part modified.
[CORNERR] . . . . . . . . It is used to insert the corner R figure into
all of corners of machined figure drawn on
the screen.
53
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
PROGRAMMING AND
OPERATION BY SYMBOLIC FAPT
B61804E2/05
(3) Changing the color of a part figure or blank figure when it is modified
When a part figure or blank figure is modified (or created), the
elements before and after the element on which the cursor is placed are
displayed in different colors. As a result, the operator can easily tell
which element is currently being modified on the drawing.
System parameter 552 specifies the color of elements already
determined and system parameter 586 specifies the color of elements
to be determined.
Parameter No.
Value
Color
Description
552
Red
586
Yellow
Color
Red
Green
Yellow
Blue
Purple
Light
blue
White
Value
NOTE
1 If the GRAPH MODE soft key is pressed after modification
of an original figure has been started by pressing the
CORRECTION soft key, the original figure cannot be
redrawn.
2 If the ELEMENT BACK soft key is pressed in a definition
mode in which the end point of the previous element is
determined by the current element, the element before
these two elements is also drawn in the color of the
elements to be determined.
54
B61804E2/05
PROGRAMMING AND
OPERATION BY SYMBOLIC FAPT
3.2.3
(1)
Symbol
Arithmetic
contents
Addition
Subtraction
178.5
Multiplication
57.5
Division
128
tangent
Examples
15
T
T
sine
S
S
cosine
T
R
arc sine
arc cosine
arc tangent
square root
square root
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
Remarks
27.75 + 4.8
25.25
81.3
/ indicates B.
3.5
23
23
)
The unit of angle is degree.
Arbitrary arithmetic operations are employable
inside parentheses.
15
15
)
The unit of angle is degree.
Arbitrary arithmetic operations are employable
inside parentheses.
35
0.25
0.37
0.37
3, 5
177
177
1.5, 4
3, 25
35
)
The unit of angle is degree.
Arbitrary arithmetic operations are employable
inside parentheses.
0.25
)
The unit of angle is degree.
Arbitrary arithmetic operations are employable
inside parentheses.
55
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
PROGRAMMING AND
OPERATION BY SYMBOLIC FAPT
D Parentheses
and
B61804E2/05
key after an
50.45 I INPUT
Depress soft key when the system asks you the following question.
ELEMENT SYMBOL . . . . . . . . . ES =
ELEMENT FORWRD
. . . . . . . . . . . . Element advances
ELEMENT BACK
. . . . . . . . . . . . Element retreats
ELEMENT DELETE
Flickering
....
Flickering
....
56
B61804E2/05
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
PROGRAMMING AND
OPERATION BY SYMBOLIC FAPT
(Deletion example)
When depressing
DEL
Depress
DEL
with
key
...
... G
Flickering
When depressing
DEL
with
Flickering
(Exchange)
For exchanging figure symbols, (1) delete old one after inserting new one,
or (2) insert new one after deleting old one.
(4)
The system will ask you necessary numerical values after figure
element symbols have been input. If a numerical value was input by
mistake, a correct numerical value can be input again after moving the
question place by depressing [CURSOR ] or [CURSOR ] CURSOR
key.
Select an optional question, and input a correct numerical value again.
[CURSOR ] . . . Element advances
[CURSOR ] . . . Element retreats
NOTE
If a figure element of data was corrected, press the software
key END.
3.2.4
Blank Figure Input of
Special Figure Blank
57
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
PROGRAMMING AND
OPERATION BY SYMBOLIC FAPT
B61804E2/05
(Example 2)
(Example 3)
58
B61804E2/05
PROGRAMMING AND
OPERATION BY SYMBOLIC FAPT
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
(b) Z axis coordinate values of start and end point are same.
(Example)
The element figure created so far is redrawn and the following message
is displayed: Select software key
Press the NEXT PAGE if there are no areas modified and when
proceeding to the next process.
59
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
PROGRAMMING AND
OPERATION BY SYMBOLIC FAPT
3.2.5
The parts figure input system includes the system of entering the
definition data with displaying a defined figure, and the method of
entering the definition data while displaying in the table format. The
former is called Graphic input system (refer to para. 3.2.2 and 3.2.3 II)
and the latter is called Directory input system. The Directory input
system will be described here.
B61804E2/05
(1) In the screen of the graphic input system, press the soft key LIST
MODE.
[LIST MODE] . . . . The figure element input screen of the
directory input system is selected.
60
B61804E2/05
PROGRAMMING AND
OPERATION BY SYMBOLIC FAPT
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
In this screen, all data on the figure data are inquired. Adjust the cursor
to the data to be entered and input the data. Upon completion of
keyingin operation, press NEXT PAGE soft key.
(3) [NEXT PAGE] . . . . Again, the figure element input screen is
selected.
At this time, the modified data is registered on
the list screen.
[END] . . . . If END is pressed when the data input or modification is
completed, the display returns to the screen that the
figure data input is completed.
However, when an error is produced in the parts figure
data, it will not return to that screen 1 but will become
figure element input screen and the Key in Again
message is displayed.
In this case, modify the figure data of this element.
[GRAPH MODE] . . Press GRAPHIC MODE soft key to return to
the graphic input screen from the directory
input screen. At this time the position of the
element shown by the cursor will become the
same position with the elements where the
cursor was blinking in the directory input
system.
Drawing is also carried out up to its position
from the beginning.
3.2.6
Batch Input Functions
for Chamfering and
Corner R
(1) Chamfering
Normally, it is customary practice to chamfer a corner unless
otherwise specified for the machined parts in the drawing. Unlike the
specified chamfer, this chamfering is not described in the drawing, the
chamfering amount is constant and many in most cases.
Consequently, when the machined figure is prepared, it may be
troublesome to enter many chamfering elements. This function inputs
a given amount of chamfer exclusively to all corners to which no
chamfer (element symbol C) is input yet after all machined figures are
completely entered.
After the machined figure for turning is entered, the following screen
is displayed.
61
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
PROGRAMMING AND
OPERATION BY SYMBOLIC FAPT
B61804E2/05
At the same time, the question for the chamfering amount C and
surface roughness SR is displayed.
C = Input the chamfering amount.
SR = Input the number of
marks showing the surface
roughness.
When the control asks, input the chamfering amount and surface
roughness.
After keying in a required numeral, press [EXEC] soft key. Then,
chamfering is applied to the lighting corner, and the initial screen is
selected.
62
B61804E2/05
PROGRAMMING AND
OPERATION BY SYMBOLIC FAPT
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
After entering the required data, press the EXEC soft key. The corner
R data is specified for the lighted corner. Then, the original screen is
displayed again.
63
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
PROGRAMMING AND
OPERATION BY SYMBOLIC FAPT
B61804E2/05
NOTE
1 As a standard for a corner to be chamfered, set the
maximum angle to system parameter No.756. (Setting
range 0 t Angle x 180) For example, if the angle is
set to 100, the cursor lights up as a chamfering corner with
100 or less angle. No cursor lights up for the portion more
than 100 angle.
Example) when setting system parameter No.756 as 100:
NOTE
2 The initial value of Corner R amount can be set to system
parameter No.755. For example, if 0.2 is set to system
parameter No.755, when the control asks the chamfering
amount, the numeral 0.2 is entered as the initial value.
The inquiry for SURFACE ROUGHNESS can be omitted.
(System parameter No.0010) When omitted, Standard
Surface Roughness is adopted for surface roughness.
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
010
64
B61804E2/05
3.2.7
Pattern Figure Input
Function
PROGRAMMING AND
OPERATION BY SYMBOLIC FAPT
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
Example)
. .T. .
. .G. .
65
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
PROGRAMMING AND
OPERATION BY SYMBOLIC FAPT
B61804E2/05
B61804E2/05
PROGRAMMING AND
OPERATION BY SYMBOLIC FAPT
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
67
R/C OF CORNER
K1 = C
V1 = 0.5
K2 =
V2 =
K3 =
V3 =
K4 = C
V4 = 0.5
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
PROGRAMMING AND
OPERATION BY SYMBOLIC FAPT
B61804E2/05
Press EXEC
R/C OF CORNER
K1 = C
V1 = 0.5
K2 =
V2 =
K3 =
V3 =
K4 = C
V4 = 0.5
Press EXEC
68
B61804E2/05
PROGRAMMING AND
OPERATION BY SYMBOLIC FAPT
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
When DN =
NOTE
For pattern figure input, the end point value of the previous
element should already be fixed.
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
PROGRAMMING AND
OPERATION BY SYMBOLIC FAPT
B61804E2/05
B61804E2/05
PROGRAMMING AND
OPERATION BY SYMBOLIC FAPT
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
71
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
PROGRAMMING AND
OPERATION BY SYMBOLIC FAPT
B61804E2/05
METRIC
ESCAPE BACK
PAGE
CURSOR CURSOR
EXEC
Pitch (P)
Constant
(system parameter 174, initial value 0.7578)
INNER THREAD:
Pitch (P)
Constant
(system parameter 125, initial value 0.6495)
NT (MULTIPLE))
System parameters 125 and 174 specify the constants to be used when the
elements of threading are manually defined.
If the automatically specified value is not suitable, change it manually.
To define a trapezoid thread, manually enter the data.
After the value of D1 is entered, the system automatically specifies the
values of WIDTH (WT), DEPTH (DT), and CORNER R (R). The values
are calculated as shown below:
WIDTH (WT):
WT = 3.5 (constant)
Pitch (P)
DEPTH (DT):
DT = 1.2 (constant)
Pitch (P)
NOTE
1 The threading depth (D1) can be automatically determined
by pressing the OUTER THREAD, INNER THREAD, or
SQUARE THREAD soft key only when the values of LD
(LEAD) and NT (MULTIPLE) are specified.
2 If the value of LD (LEAD) or NT (MULTIPLE) is changed, the
D1 (threading depth) and DT (depth) must be calculated
again. Press the OUTER THREAD, INNER THREAD, or
SQUARE THREAD soft key to have the system
automatically specify suitable values.
72
B61804E2/05
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
PROGRAMMING AND
OPERATION BY SYMBOLIC FAPT
4) Neck diameter (PH point DX value) and width, side depth, depth,
corner R (DIN Standards)
Diameter (X axis)
Under 18 mm
Under 0.7087 inch
Depth
(DT)
Corner R
(R)
Width
(WT)
Side depth
(W1)
.25 mm
.6 mm
2.0 mm
.1 mm
.0098 inch .0236 inch .0787 inch .0039 inch
.45 mm
1.0 mm
4.0 mm
.3 mm
.0177 inch .0394 inch .1575 inch .0118 inch
Example
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
PROGRAMMING AND
OPERATION BY SYMBOLIC FAPT
B61804E2/05
When EXEC is pressed the figure based on the data set is drawn.
Input the following data with regard to each question for 2.
NECK TYPE . . . . . . . . . . P = 1
Questions and illustrations explaining neck type 1 are displayed here and
therefore the following data should be input.
Define direction . . . . . . . . DD =0 (0: PV PH, 1: PH PV)
End point PH . . . . . . . . . . EDX = 40.
EZ = 0.
Width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WT = 2.5 (Automatic setting)
Depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DT = 0.35 (Automatic setting)
Corner R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R = 0.6 (Automatic setting)
Surface roughness . . . . . . . SR = 2 (Automatic setting)
When EXEC is pressed the figure based on the data set is drawn.
i) The figure defined at neck corner input is separated and defined
into direction arrow elements and R.
ii) Carry out corrections and deletions one element at a time.
NOTE
1 Definition is possible if the element directly in front of corner
R is an element other than G/N/T, but the end point value
directly in front must be decided. Furthermore, it is not
possible to create it as the first element.
2 The neck is created in the corner of the vertical and
horizontal plane.
It is possible in the taper plane.
3 If define direction DD = 0 is input, the next end point symbol
is displayed as PH. Conversely, if define direction DD = 1
is input, the next end point symbol is displayed as PV.
Furthermore, the neck direction is decided automatically by
the define direction and end point value.
74
B61804E2/05
PROGRAMMING AND
OPERATION BY SYMBOLIC FAPT
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
NOTE
4 As for the end point value, input the absolute values only.
It is not possible to input the incremental value.
5 Input positive neck, depth and side depth values.
6 Input values smaller than the difference between the Z
values of PV point and PH point for neck width. An alarm
(END POINT OR NECK WIDTH IS NOT CORRECT) is
displayed if a bigger value is input.
Note that if a bigger depth or side depth value is input, it is
possible that a figure other than a neck figure will be
created.
75
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
PROGRAMMING AND
OPERATION BY SYMBOLIC FAPT
B61804E2/05
In the case illustrated above, when the soft key PATTRN INPUT is
pressed followed by FIGURE COPY, the following copy area
specification screen appears. Note however that when the PATTRN
INPUT key is pressed, the cursor must be next to the very last element,
as illustrated above.When the cursor has been moved by corrections to
element data etc., press the FIGURE COPY only after having made sure
to move the cursor next to the very last element. If the FIGURE COPY
key is pressed when the cursor is at an element other than the final one,
an error message will be displayed saying CAN NOT USE THIS
FUNCTION and the copy area specification screen will not appear.
76
B61804E2/05
PROGRAMMING AND
OPERATION BY SYMBOLIC FAPT
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
Illustration type = 2
Blank figure BF = 1
Blank dimensions
Diameter D = 100
Length L = 105
Position of reference line ZP = 5
77
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
PROGRAMMING AND
OPERATION BY SYMBOLIC FAPT
B61804E2/05
78
B61804E2/05
PROGRAMMING AND
OPERATION BY SYMBOLIC FAPT
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
One copy will be made from No.3 element to No.8 element based on the
data set.
When the figure that has been copied is to be corrected, change the data
element by element as with previous corrections.
NOTE
1 The final element of the figure must be a direction arrow and
the end point defined, before pressing the FIGURE COPY
key.
Examples
Figure element number . . . . . . . . . 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Figure configuration element . . . . j
79
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
PROGRAMMING AND
OPERATION BY SYMBOLIC FAPT
B61804E2/05
NOTE
2 Input a positive whole number between 1 and 10 in the
repeat number. If any other data is keyed in the message
KEY IN AGAIN will appear.
3 When there is incremental type data in the copy area, it will
change to absolute type data when copied.
4 When the general element number has been exceeded
during execution of figure copy, as many copies as is
possible will be created. An error message indicating that
the number of element is excessive will appear on the
screen.
3.2.8
Function for Defining
the Center of an Arc
According to a Given
Single Coordinate
In part figure definition, the system can define the center of an arc even
if only one of the coordinates (X or Z) is given. This feature eliminates
the need for manual calculation.
(1) Operation
As an example, consider the figure shown in Fig.1 (the drawing format
is FANUC standard 2), which is defined as described below:
1) Specifying the material
MATERIAL NO.:
MN = 1
STANDARD SURFACE ROUGHNESS: NR = 2
BLANK FIGURE:
BF = 1 (Cylinder)
BLANK SIZE, DIAMETER: D = 100
BLANK SIZE, LENGTH:
L = 105
BASE LINE:
ZP = 5
80
B61804E2/05
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
PROGRAMMING AND
OPERATION BY SYMBOLIC FAPT
=
=
=
=
jjj
jjj
jjj
jjj
R
= 26
CDX = jjj
CZ = 18
After the data is entered, the system can calculate the center of the arc.
The system prompts the operator to select a desired center.
On the screen, calculated centers are automatically scaled and
indicated by graphic cursors.
The system temporarily scales the centers so that the operator can
easily select one of the centers. After the operator specifies the desired
center, the original scale is restored.
Selecting a center . . PC = j (: Right, : Left, : Up, : Down)
The desired center is the intersection of auxiliary circle A (center (20,
0) and radius (R) 26) and the straight line of Z = 18. Since the circle
and line intersect at two points (PC1 and PC2), the operator must
specify either of them. (See the figure below.)
81
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
PROGRAMMING AND
OPERATION BY SYMBOLIC FAPT
B61804E2/05
82
B61804E2/05
PROGRAMMING AND
OPERATION BY SYMBOLIC FAPT
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
83
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
PROGRAMMING AND
OPERATION BY SYMBOLIC FAPT
B61804E2/05
(2) Notes
NOTE
1 The system can define the center of an arc according to a
given single coordinate when either of the following
conditions is satisfied:
The end point of the previous element is determined.
The next element is known and the arc contacts the
element.
2 The system can define the center of an arc according to a
given single coordinate only when the coordinate (CDX or
CZ) is specified with an absolute value.
84
B61804E2/05
PROGRAMMING AND
OPERATION BY SYMBOLIC FAPT
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
3.3
MACHINE ZERO
POINT AND TURRET
POSITION
WARNING
After entering machine zero point or turret position data,
check the entered data. Failure to enter correct data may
result in the tool colliding with the workpiece and/or
machine, possibly causing damage to the machine and/or
tool itself, or injury to the user.
When the figure has been defined, the screen asks about the Home
position and Index position.
The meaning of questions is as follows:
HOME POSITION
DXH =
ZH =
Input the coordinate value of home position of NC lathe.
If a data has already been input properly, press the Cursor. Do not
input data and leave it undefined when not starting from the home
position.
INDEX POSITION
DXI =
ZI =
Input the coordinate value of turret revolution center position.
If a data has already been input properly, press the NEXT PAGE.
In the case of 15TTFB, 16TT CAP II, the question for home position
and index position at the No.2 also appears.
WARNING
Input the distance from the programmed coordinate axis for
both home position and index position. Let the sign of Z to
positive whichever direction the Z axis of coordinate axis
programmed faces. The home position is used to indicate
the relationship between the program coordinate system
and machine coordinate system.
When the home position and index position is determined
and it is troublesome to input these data every time, it is
possible to set initial values to the system parameters 206
213. Also, it is possible to skip questions. For details, see
Chapter 8 11. This screen does not appear when skipping
the questions of home position and index position.
85
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
PROGRAMMING AND
OPERATION BY SYMBOLIC FAPT
3.4
MACHINING
DEFINITION
B61804E2/05
Start machining
definition
Yes
New definition?
No
Select a mode
(modify, create, etc.)
Select a process
Is automatic process
determination executed?
Yes
No
Is machining
definition
completed?
Yes
Execute automatic
process determination
End
No
Define a tool, machining start
position, and passing point
Cutting off
No
Specify the cutting
start position
Define cutting
conditions
Yes
No
NOTE
The previous screen can be displayed by pressing the [BACK PAGE] key. When a subprocess
is defined, however, the [BACK PAGE] key is disabled.
86
B61804E2/05
PROGRAMMING AND
OPERATION BY SYMBOLIC FAPT
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
3.4.1
Selection of Kinds of
Machining
WARNING
No check of the validity of a machining sequence is made.
Therefore, even when a machining sequence specified in
the machining definition includes any invalid process steps
(inner surface machining without drilling, or finishing before
roughing, for example), the entire machining sequence is
reflected on the prepared NC data. When defining
machining, check the specified machining sequence.
Failure to specify a valid machining sequence may result in
the tool colliding with the workpiece and/or machine, or
forced machining occurring, possibly causing damage to
the machine and/or tool itself, or injury to the user.
87
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
PROGRAMMING AND
OPERATION BY SYMBOLIC FAPT
B61804E2/05
88
B61804E2/05
PROGRAMMING AND
OPERATION BY SYMBOLIC FAPT
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
[CENTER DRILL] . . .
[DRILLING] . . . . . . . .
[REAMER] . . . . . . . . .
[TAP] . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
[SUB CYCLE] . . . . . . .
89
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
PROGRAMMING AND
OPERATION BY SYMBOLIC FAPT
B61804E2/05
[ROUGH O.D.] . . . .
[SFIN O.D.] . . . . . .
[FIN O.D.] . . . . . . . .
[ROUGH I.D.] . . . . .
[SFIN I.D.] . . . . . . .
[FIN I.D.] . . . . . . . . .
[BAR FEED] . . . . . .
[SUB CYCLE] . . . . .
90
B61804E2/05
PROGRAMMING AND
OPERATION BY SYMBOLIC FAPT
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
3.4.2
Process Change and
Correction
91
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
PROGRAMMING AND
OPERATION BY SYMBOLIC FAPT
B61804E2/05
3.4.3
Output of Only Single
Process
Only one process can be corrected if required after all processes are
prepared, and only NC data of its process can be output.
Press CORR. & OUT when the screen in Fig.3.4.2(a) appears: the
screen as shown in Fig.3.4.2(b) will appear.
Select the process to be output independently as NC data, using Cursor
* or Cursor *, and press NEXT PAGE. After the process is
corrected, the NC data creation screen appears. This screen shows the NC
data of the corrected process.
92
B61804E2/05
PROGRAMMING AND
OPERATION BY SYMBOLIC FAPT
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
3.4.4
Tool Data
WARNING
After entering tool data, check the entered data. Failure to
enter correct data may result in the tool colliding with the
workpiece and/or machine, possibly causing damage to the
machine and/or tool itself, or injury to the user.
If the working process is specified on the process chart screen, the screen
changes and the tool information required for working definition is
prompted.
Soft keys
ESCAPE . . . . . . . . . . . . Displays the menu screen.
BACK PAGE . . . . . . . . Displays the previous page.
TAB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Skips the system inquiry for the tool data
and displays that for the machining start
position.
NEXT TOOL . . . . . . . . Selects the ID of the next tool whose
machining process type (KP) is specified.
(The automatic process determination
function is required.)
TOOL DATA . . . . . . . . Displays the tool data list. The data can be
specified and corrected.
TOOLING INFOR . . . . Displays the tooling information list.
The data can be specified and corrected.
CURSOR , CURSOR . . . . Moves the cursor to a prompt.
CHECK . . . . . . . . . . . . Draws the tool figure. (The animated
simulation function is required.)
P.PNT SET . . . . . . . . . . Displays the section in which a passing
point can be specified.
NEXT PAGE . . . . . . . . Displays the next page.
The system prompts the operator to specify the following tool data:
1 Tool number data
2 Tool figure data
3 Tool setting data
93
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
PROGRAMMING AND
OPERATION BY SYMBOLIC FAPT
B61804E2/05
=J
=JJ
=JJ
=JJ
=JJ
A tool offset number can be specified for each cutting area. To perform
individual tool offset for each of the specified cutting areas, specify the
value for switching the offset numbers in the following system parameter:
No.704: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
For each cutting area, the T code specifying tool
offset is:
= 0: Not output.
= 1: output.
If the parameter is set to a value for outputting the T code specifying tool
offset for each cutting area, this prompt is made when the cutting
condition data is entered. (For details, see Section 3.4.8.)
TOOL OFFSET NO.2: TM2 = Specifies the tool offset number for the
minor cutting edge of a grooving tool.
If a grooving tool is used, a tool offset number can be specified for the
minor cutting edge. To specify the tool offset number for the minor
cutting edge, set the following system parameter (Warning):
No.704: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Before cutting with the minor cutting edge is started in
grooving, the T code of the secondary tool offset is:
= 0: Not output.
= 1: output.
94
B61804E2/05
PROGRAMMING AND
OPERATION BY SYMBOLIC FAPT
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
95
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
PROGRAMMING AND
OPERATION BY SYMBOLIC FAPT
B61804E2/05
NOSE RADIUS . . . . . . . . .
CUTTING EDGE . . . . . . . .
NOSE ANGLE . . . . . . . . . .
VIRTUAL TOOL POS. . . .
RN =
AC =
AN =
XN =
ZN =
Generalpurpose tool
CUTTING EDGE . . . . . AC =
NOSE ANGLE . . . . . . . AN =
VIRTUAL TOOL POS. XN =
ZN =
NOSE RADIUS . . . . . . . . .
CUTTING EDGE . . . . . . . .
NOSE ANGLE . . . . . . . . . .
PROTECTION ANGLE . . .
VIRTUAL TOOL POS. . . .
Reamer
Tap
TOOL DIAMETER . . . . DT =
CUT LENGTH . . . . . . . LT =
PECK DEPTH . . . . . . . LE =
TOOL DIAMETER . . . . . . . DT =
CUT LENGTH . . . . . . . . . . LT =
PECK DEPTH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LE =
PITCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PT =
RN =
AC =
AN =
AP =
XN =
ZN =
Finger
VIRTUAL TOOL POS.
XN =
96
B61804E2/05
PROGRAMMING AND
OPERATION BY SYMBOLIC FAPT
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
NOTE
The system can be set so that it displays the tool figure data
and does not allow modification. To do this, change the
following system parameter:
No.702: 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0
= 0:
= 1:
97
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
PROGRAMMING AND
OPERATION BY SYMBOLIC FAPT
B61804E2/05
NOTE
If the NEXT PAGE soft key is pressed to display the next
screen when a tool with registered tool data is selected, the
set data is registered as the tooling data.
NOTE
1 If the tool holder is not defined, only the tip is displayed.
2 The scale of the tip and holder cannot be changed.
3.4.5
Machining Start
Position
WARNING
After entering machining start point data, check the entered
data. Failure to enter correct data may result in the tool
colliding with the workpiece and/or machine, or forced
machining occurring, possibly causing damage to the
machine and/or tool itself, or injury to the user.
When all tool data is entered, the system prompts the operator to enter the
data of the machining start position.
MACHINING START POSITION:
DXO =
JJJJ.
JJJ
ZO =
JJJJ.
JJJ
B61804E2/05
PROGRAMMING AND
OPERATION BY SYMBOLIC FAPT
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
3.4.6
Passing Point
WARNING
After entering passing point data, check the entered data.
Failure to enter correct data may result in the tool colliding
with the workpiece and/or machine, or forced machining
occurring, possibly causing damage to the machine and/or
tool itself, or injury to the user.
(1) This function designates the passing point of a tool when approaching
to the work from the machining start position, and the passing point
of a tool when returning to the next machining start position after
completion of the machining.
When the rightmost soft key [
] is pressed on the tool data screen, the
following soft keys are displayed:
When the P.PNT SET soft key is pressed, the system prompts the operator
to enter the data of the passing point.
99
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
PROGRAMMING AND
OPERATION BY SYMBOLIC FAPT
B61804E2/05
100
B61804E2/05
PROGRAMMING AND
OPERATION BY SYMBOLIC FAPT
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
3.4.7
Specifying the
Direction and Area of
Cutting
The following soft keys are displayed when the operator is prompted to
specify a dividing direction:
101
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
PROGRAMMING AND
OPERATION BY SYMBOLIC FAPT
B61804E2/05
NOTE
The operator is prompted to enter the cutting direction only
when outer surface machining or inner surface machining
is selected. If cutting off, grooving, threading, Caxis
machining or Yaxis machining is selected, the operator is
prompted to enter different data.
2) Specifying the cutting area
The cutting area can be specified by graphic cursors (J) which are
displayed on the machining profile.
The screen displays the figure of the workpiece to be cut (broken line)
and the machining profile (solid line). The operator is prompted to
enter the dividing direction.
On the screen, specify the machining start point and end point of the
part figure, using the blinking graphic cursors. One cursor indicates
the start point of the cutting area and the other cursor indicates the end
point.
102
B61804E2/05
PROGRAMMING AND
OPERATION BY SYMBOLIC FAPT
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
To select the start or end point, move the cursor along the part figure.
Each time the CURSOR FORWRD or CURSOR BACK key is
pressed, the cursor moves forward or backward along the part figure.
After entering the start and end points, specify a cutting area by
pressing arrow keys corresponding to desired dividing directions in
the blank figure.
Specify the following directions by pressing the corresponding arrow
keys:
DIVIDING DIRECTION . . . . . . . . . . Dividing direction from the start point
DIVIDING DIRECTION . . . . . . . . . . Dividing direction from the end point
103
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
PROGRAMMING AND
OPERATION BY SYMBOLIC FAPT
B61804E2/05
The cutting area can be displayed on this screen so that the operator
can check the area specified by entering the dividing directions. Set
the following system parameters so that the cutting area can be
displayed:
No.670:
No.671:
No.704:
x x 0 0 0 0 0 0
Specifies whether the cutting area is displayed on the
machining definition screen.
Specifies whether the blank figure is filled in on the machining
definition screen.
The figure of the workpiece is still displayed on the screen after the
specified area is cut off. Symbolic FAPT simulates all stages of
machining on the screen. The operator can easily check whether the
area to be cut remains.
The shape of the tool determines the area it can cut. The system
automatically checks the relationship between the tool shape and part
figure and displays the area which the tool cannot cut. Specify another
tool to cut the uncut area.
104
B61804E2/05
PROGRAMMING AND
OPERATION BY SYMBOLIC FAPT
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
105
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
PROGRAMMING AND
OPERATION BY SYMBOLIC FAPT
B61804E2/05
If the cursor is moved to specify the previous figure element as the start
point, the tool path becomes as shown in Fig. 3.4.7 (b).
106
B61804E2/05
PROGRAMMING AND
OPERATION BY SYMBOLIC FAPT
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
107
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
PROGRAMMING AND
OPERATION BY SYMBOLIC FAPT
B61804E2/05
(3) Threading
108
B61804E2/05
3.4.8
Function for
Automatically Setting
Area Division Points
PROGRAMMING AND
OPERATION BY SYMBOLIC FAPT
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
(1) Overview
Using the optional automatic process determination function enables
the positions of area division cursors to be automatically set according
to the cutting direction. The area division cursors are used to specify
cutting areas for outer machining, inner machining, and grooving.
This automatic setting function can reduce a considerable number of
operations for moving the area division cursors, thus allowing more
efficient definition of cutting areas.
The automatic setting of the area division cursors is based on the area
division method used by the automatic process determination
function. For details, see Section 4.4, Area Division in Part XI,
AUTOMATIC PROCESS DETERMINATION FUNCTION.
The area division cursors are graphic cursors that move along a
machining profile to specify a cutting area.
(2) Execution conditions
The area division cursors are automatically set under the following
conditions.
1) When any of the following machining processes is newly defined,
the area division cursors are automatically set on the cutting area
definition screen.
a) Outer roughing
b) Outer semifinish machining
c) Outer finishing
d) Inner roughing
e) Inner semifinish machining
f) Inner finishing
g) Grooving (including roughing and finishing)
For grooving, if no G elements are included in the parts figure, the
area division cursors are initialized to the start and end points.
2) Once the cutting direction (CD) is changed on the cutting area
definition screen, the area division cursors are automatically reset.
(3) Warning and Notes
WARNING
For some machining profiles, the automatic setting function
may not position the area division cursors correctly. If this
occurs, use the [CURSOR FORWARD] or [CURSOR
BACK] soft key to modify the area division cursor positions.
NOTE
1 For outer or inner machining, if an inverse process tool is
set, the area division cursors are not set automatically.
2 The automatic setting of the area division cursors is applied
to the entire machining profile.
3 To use this automatic setting function, the optional
automatic process determination function must be used.
109
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
PROGRAMMING AND
OPERATION BY SYMBOLIC FAPT
B61804E2/05
3.4.9
Cutting Conditions
WARNING
The cutting conditions are automatically set according to the
selected machining type. Check the set conditions. If the
conditions are incorrect, the tool may collide with the
workpiece and/or machine, or forced machining may occur,
possibly causing damage to the machine and/or tool itself,
or injury to the user.
Input the data of CUTTING CONDITION.
(Example : ROUGHING OF OUTER FIGURE)
INPUT
* Outputting the T code specifying the tool offset for each cutting area
The T code of the tool offset number, output for each process, can be
output for each of the specified cutting areas.
110
B61804E2/05
PROGRAMMING AND
OPERATION BY SYMBOLIC FAPT
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
Specify the value for switching the offset numbers in the following
system parameter:
No.704: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
For each cutting area, the T code specifying tool
offset is:
= 0: Not output.
= 1: Output.
If the parameter is set to a value for outputting the T code specifying the
tool offset for each cutting area, the following prompt is displayed:
TOOL OFFSET NO. . . . . . . . TM = Tool offset number for each
cutting area
The cutting conditions and meanings of the system questions are
described below according to machining data.
(1) Center drilling
TOOL OFFSET NO. . . TM= Tool offset number (tool offset
number for each cutting area)
CLEARANCE . . . . . . . C = Clearance quantity (mm)
(Default value is system parameter
No.180)
DEPTH OF CUT . . . . . D = Depth of cut (mm)
SPINDLE SPEED . . . . N = Spindle speed (rpm)
FEED RATE . . . . . . . . . F = Feedrate (mm/rev)
111
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
PROGRAMMING AND
OPERATION BY SYMBOLIC FAPT
B61804E2/05
(2) Drilling
Cutting conditions for drilling comprise type 1, 2 and 3 according to
the movement of a drill.
CUTTING CONDITIONS 1
TOOL OFFSET NO. . . TM= Tool offset number (Tool offset
number for each cutting area)
CLEARANCE. . . . . . . . C = Clearance (mm or inch)
(Default value is system parameter
No.181)
CUT POINT. . . . . . . . . Z = Position of cut end point
(mm or inch)
(When bit 7 of system parameter
No.702 is 1)
or
DEPTH OF CUT. . . . . . D = Depth of cut (mm or inch)
(When bit 7 of system parameter
No.702 is 0)
SPINDLE ROTATION . N = Spindle rotation speed (rpm)
FEED RATE . . . . . . . . . F1 = Feed rate (mm/rev or inch/rev)
CUTTING CONDITIONS 2
TOOL OFFSET NO. . . TM= Tool offset number (tool offset
number for each cutting area)
CLEARANCE . . . . . . . C = Clearance (mm or inch)
CUT POINT . . . . . . . . . Z = Position of cut end point
(mm or inch)
(When bit 7 of system parameter
No.702 is 1)
or
DEPTH OF CUT . . . . . D = Depth of cut (mm or inch)
(When bit 7 of system parameter
No.702 is 0)
DEPTH OF CUT . . . . . D1 = Primary drilling depth (mm or inch)
(Default value is system parameter
No.121)
RETURN AMOUNT . . U = Amount of return (mm or inch)
SPINDLE ROTATION . N = Spindle rotation speed (rpm)
FEED RATE . . . . . . . . . F1 = Feed rate (mm/rev or inch/rev)
112
B61804E2/05
PROGRAMMING AND
OPERATION BY SYMBOLIC FAPT
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
CUTTING CONDITIONS 3
TOOL OFFSET NO. . . TM= Tool offset number (tool offset
number for each cutting area)
CLEARANCE . . . . . . . C = Clearance (mm or inch)
CLEARANCE . . . . . . . C1 = Secondary drilling dearance
CUT POINT . . . . . . . . . Z = Position of cut end point
(mm or inch)
(When bit 7 of system parameter
No.702 is 1)
or
DEPTH OF CUT . . . . . D = Depth of cut (mm or inch)
(When bit 7 of system parameter
No.702 is 0)
DEPTH OF CUT . . . . . D1 = Primary drilling depth (mm or inch)
(Default value is system parameter
No.121)
DEPTH OF CUT . . . . . D2 = Secondary drilling depth
(mm or inch)
(Default value is system parameter
No.122)
RETURN AMOUNT . . U = Amount of return (mm or inch)
SPINDLE ROTATION . N = Spindle rotation speed (rpm)
FEED RATE . . . . . . . . . F1 = Feed rate (mm/rev or inch/rev)
FEED RATE . . . . . . . . . F2 = Feed rate for second pass
(mm/rev or inch/rev)
113
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
PROGRAMMING AND
OPERATION BY SYMBOLIC FAPT
B61804E2/05
WARNING
D1 and D2 in Machining method 2 and Machining method
3
As shown in figure 7 and figure 8, D1 and D2 in
machining method 2 and machining method 3 are input as
positive values.
Associated parameter
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
702
114
#1
#0
B61804E2/05
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
PROGRAMMING AND
OPERATION BY SYMBOLIC FAPT
(3) Reaming
TOOL OFFSET NO. . . TM= Tool offset number (tool offset
number for each cutting area)
CLEARANCE . . . . . . . C = Amount of clearance
(mm or inches)
(Default value is system parameter
181 [same as drilling])
CUTTING POINT . . . . Z = Cutting endpoint coordinate
(Warning)
SPINDLE SPEED . . . . N = Spindle speed (rpm)
FEED RATE . . . . . . . . . F = Feed rate (mm/rev)
Workpiece face
(4) Tapping
TOOL OFFSET NO. . . TM= Tool offset number (tool offset
number for each cutting area)
RPM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N = Speed of rotation (rpm)
CLEARANCE . . . . . . . C1 = Amount of clearance
(mm or inches)
(Default value is system parameter
196)
CUTTING POINT . . . . Z = Cutting endpoint coordinate
(Warning)
Workpiece face
Threading part
115
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
PROGRAMMING AND
OPERATION BY SYMBOLIC FAPT
B61804E2/05
WARNING
A value is assigned to Z in accordance with the system of
coordinates on this screen. Where the Z axis is plotted as
shown in the figure on the right the value of Z will always be
negative.
Whatever the drawing format the right hand end of the Z axis
is always positive on the Machining definition screen of
menu No.4.
Specifications of the machining start points and
intermediate points are all made in accordance with this
system of coordinates. The cutting points are also therefore
specified in accordance with the same coordinate system.
B61804E2/05
PROGRAMMING AND
OPERATION BY SYMBOLIC FAPT
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
Even if the operator is not prompted to specify the override, the data can
be overridden by the value set in system parameter No.711.
No.711:
117
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
PROGRAMMING AND
OPERATION BY SYMBOLIC FAPT
B61804E2/05
118
B61804E2/05
PROGRAMMING AND
OPERATION BY SYMBOLIC FAPT
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
No.702: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
The second clearance specified for inner surface
machining becomes:
= 0: Invalid.
= 1: Valid.
119
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
PROGRAMMING AND
OPERATION BY SYMBOLIC FAPT
B61804E2/05
B61804E2/05
PROGRAMMING AND
OPERATION BY SYMBOLIC FAPT
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
PROGRAMMING AND
OPERATION BY SYMBOLIC FAPT
B61804E2/05
B61804E2/05
PROGRAMMING AND
OPERATION BY SYMBOLIC FAPT
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
123
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
PROGRAMMING AND
OPERATION BY SYMBOLIC FAPT
B61804E2/05
NOTE
The operator is not prompted to enter the data of pecking
if finishing of a groove or necking is selected.
In roughing and finishing, the first cut is made from the virtual tool tip
side of the tool.
The position of the virtual tool tip is determined by AC and AN of the tool
data.
If AC is set to 90 and AN is set to 90 for a tool for outer surface
machining, the virtual tool tip is on the left side of the tool. Therefore,
the first cut is made from the left side.
124
B61804E2/05
PROGRAMMING AND
OPERATION BY SYMBOLIC FAPT
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
If AC is set to 90 and AN is set to 90, the virtual tool tip is on the right
side of the tool.
A specified cutting area must not contain two or more grooves or cuts.
Divide the cutting area so that a single cutting area contains only one
groove or cut.
(12) Threading
CUTTING METHOD . TP = 1 : Singleedge thread cutting with
constant cutting amount
2 : Bothedge zigzag thread cutting
with constant cutting amount
3 : Singleedge thread cutting with
constant cutting depth
4 : Bothedge zigzag thread cutting
with constant cutting depth
CLEARANCE . . . . . . . CT = Clearance quantity (mm or inch)
(Default value is system parameter
No.190)
CS = Clearance quantity (mm or inch)
(Default value is system parameter
No.191)
CE = Clearance quantity (mm or inch)
(Default value is system parameter
No.192)
DEPTH OF CUT . . . . . D = Depth of cut (mm or inch)
DL = Final depth of cut (mm or inch)
(Default value is system parameter
No.119)
CUTTING SPEED . . . . V = Cutting speed (m/min or feet/min)
125
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
PROGRAMMING AND
OPERATION BY SYMBOLIC FAPT
B61804E2/05
WARNING
The prompt to ask the maximum spindle speed is selected
by system parameter No.702 bit 0.
0: No prompt.
(The maximum spindle speed is set by system parameter
No.128.)
1: The prompt for the maximum spindle speed is displayed
on each stage of machining process.
(Ignore the value of system parameter No.128.)
However, the prompt is not displayed at the process
where the constant tangential speed control is not used
set in system parameter Nos.107 to 115.
The value set in system parameter No.128 is output at
these processes.
If the same tool is used for more than one process, the
prompt is not displayed.
B61804E2/05
PROGRAMMING AND
OPERATION BY SYMBOLIC FAPT
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
127
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
PROGRAMMING AND
OPERATION BY SYMBOLIC FAPT
B61804E2/05
128
B61804E2/05
PROGRAMMING AND
OPERATION BY SYMBOLIC FAPT
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
1) Pullout mode 1
CLEARANCE . . . . CAZ=Approach clearance (mm)
(The initial value is set in system
parameter 153.)
GRIP POS. . . . . . . . WG = Workpiece gripping position (mm)
(The initial value is set in system
parameter 154.)
ESCAPE VALUE . . CEZ= Distance the tool is retracted (mm)
(The initial value is set in system
parameter 155.)
FEED RATE . . . . . . F1 = Feedrate (in gripping) (mm/min)
F2 = Feedrate (in pulling and positioning)
(mm/min)
F3 = Feedrate (in retraction) (mm/min)
2) Pullout mode 2
CLEARANCE . . . . CAX=Approach clearance (mm)
(The initial value is set in system
parameter 152.)
GRIP POS. . . . . . . . WG = Workpiece gripping position (mm)
FEED RATE . . . . . . F1 = Feedrate (in gripping) (mm/min)
F2 = Feedrate (in pulling and positioning)
(mm/min)
F3 = Feedrate (in retraction) (mm/min)
129
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
PROGRAMMING AND
OPERATION BY SYMBOLIC FAPT
B61804E2/05
3) Slidestop mode 1
CLEARANCE . . . . CAZ=Approach clearance (mm or inch)
ESCAPE VALUE . . CEZ= Distance the tool is retracted
(mm or inch)
RPM . . . . . . . . . . . . S1 = Spindle speed (rpm)
(The initial value is set in system
parameter 156.)
FEED RATE . . . . . . F2 = Feedrate (for sliding) (mm/min)
130
B61804E2/05
PROGRAMMING AND
OPERATION BY SYMBOLIC FAPT
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
4) Slidestop mode 2
RPM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S1 = Spindle speed (rpm)
131
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
PROGRAMMING AND
OPERATION BY SYMBOLIC FAPT
3.4.10
The tool data and tooling information can be set and all the tooling
information can be deleted on the machining process list (shown in
machining definition) or the tool data setting screen of a process.
B61804E2/05
To set the tool data and tooling information on the machining process list,
press the rightmost soft key [ ]. The following soft keys are then
displayed.
If either of the following soft keys is pressed, the corresponding data list
screen is displayed:
TOOL DATA
: The tool data list is displayed.
TOLING INFOR. : The tooling information list is displayed.
[Tool data setting screen]
If either of the following soft keys is pressed, the corresponding data list
screen is displayed:
TOOL DATA
: The tool data list is displayed.
TOLING INFOR. : The tooling information list is displayed.
132
B61804E2/05
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
PROGRAMMING AND
OPERATION BY SYMBOLIC FAPT
TOOL
DATA
TOLING
INFOR.
When the TOOL DATA soft key is pressed, the tool data list is
displayed. On the list screen, the tool data can be set, modified, or
deleted.
NOTE
When the tool DATA soft key is pressed on the machining
process list screen, the tool list screen shows the data of
turning tools. To set the data of a milling machining tool,
press the MILLING TOOL soft key.
When the TOOL DATA soft key is pressed on the tool data
setting screen of a process, the data of tools of the current
process is displayed.
If the current process is turning, the list of turning tools is
displayed. If the current process is Caxis machining or
Yaxis machining, the list of milling machining tools is
displayed.
133
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
PROGRAMMING AND
OPERATION BY SYMBOLIC FAPT
B61804E2/05
TOOL
DATA
TOLING
INFOR.
134
B61804E2/05
PROGRAMMING AND
OPERATION BY SYMBOLIC FAPT
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
NOTE
The TURRET 1 DEL. and TURRET 2 DEL. soft keys are
displayed only for the TT model.
If the ALL DELETE, TURRET 1 DEL., or TURRET 2 DEL. soft key is
pressed, the operator is prompted to specify whether to delete the data.
To delete the data, enter 1 INPUT. To not delete the data, enter 0 INPUT.
The soft keys have the following functions:
ALL DELETE: Deletes all tooling information cataloged in main
memory.
TURRET 1 DEL.: Deletes all TL1 tooling information cataloged in
main memory. (Only for the TT model)
TURRET 2 DEL.: Deletes all TL2 tooling information cataloged in
main memory. (Only for the TT model)
Displays the next group of soft keys.
[ ]:
135
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
PROGRAMMING AND
OPERATION BY SYMBOLIC FAPT
3.4.11
B61804E2/05
No.704: x x 0 0 0 0 0 0
0: The blank figure is not painted.
1: The blank figure is painted.
0: The cutting area is not drawn.
1: The cutting area is drawn.
No.670: Color in which the blank figure is filled in (0 to 7)
No.671: Color of the line which draws the cutting area (0 to 7)
NOTE
The system parameters are valid only for turning.
(1) Drawing a cutting area (line drawing)
When bit 7 of system parameter 704 is set to 1, the cutting area is drawn
on the cutting area definition screen and cutting condition setting
screen, as shown below:
136
B61804E2/05
PROGRAMMING AND
OPERATION BY SYMBOLIC FAPT
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
137
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
PROGRAMMING AND
OPERATION BY SYMBOLIC FAPT
B61804E2/05
3.5
NC DATA
PREPARATION
3.5.1
Preparations of NC
Data and Registrations
of Machining Memory
WARNING
Even when the tool path and machining processes
specified in NC data are verified by machining simulation or
tool path check, if the data relating to the actual tool offset
and workpiece shift is incorrect, the tool may collide with the
workpiece and/or machine, possibly causing damage to the
machine and/or tool itself, or injury to the user. Before
starting a production run, perform a dry run to ensure that
the tool will not collide with the workpiece or machine. For
example, specify a low feedrate, then start the NC program
without mounting a workpiece on the machine.
Select 5
Horizontal lathe
Vertical lathe
138
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
PROGRAMMING AND
OPERATION BY SYMBOLIC FAPT
B61804E2/05
ESCAPE PROC.
LIST
REGIS NC
TER
DATA
PROC. SINGLE
STOP STEP
TOOL
PATH
ESCAPE PROC.
LIST
REGIS NC
TER
DATA
PROC. SINGLE
STOP STEP
DRAWNG START
RANGE
The above soft keys are displayed, and the following message prompts
you to input a program No. and comment.
PROGRAM No. . . . . . . . . Input 0 = program No.
COMMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . Input CM = comment.
Comments are specified in alphanumerics or symbols of 16 characters or
less.
If 17 or more characters are input, only the first 16 will be valid. All keys
other than round brackets, inverted commas and commas (,) can be
used.
Example)
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
708
139
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
PROGRAMMING AND
OPERATION BY SYMBOLIC FAPT
B61804E2/05
Output comment
Center drilling
CENTER DRIL.
Drilling
DRIL.
OD roughing
ROUGH. OF OUT.
ID roughing
ROUGH. OF IN.
OD semiroughing
SFIN. OF OUT.
ID semiroughing
SFIN. OF IN.
OD finishing
FIN. OF OUT.
ID finishing
FIN. OF IN.
Grooving/necking
GROV. OR NECK.
Threading
THREAD.
Groove roughing
ROUGH. OF GROOVE
Groove finishing
FIN. OF GROOVE
Reamer
REAMER
Tap
TAP
Machining type
Output comment
CCENTER DRILL.
C axis drilling
CDRILLING
C axis tapping
CTAPPING
C axis grooving
CGROOVING
Face milling
CFACE MILLING
Side milling
CSIDE MILLING
YCENTER DRILL.
Y axis drilling
YDRILLING
Y axis tapping
YTAPPING
Y axis pattern
YPATTERN
Y axis contouring
YCONTOUR
Sub cycle
SUB CYCLE
Cut off
CUT OFF
Bar feed
BAR FEED
NOTE
It is not possible to output the process name comment when
NC format is outputted in main/sub format.
140
B61804E2/05
PROGRAMMING AND
OPERATION BY SYMBOLIC FAPT
Program
No.
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
INPUT
[ANIMATION] or [ANIMATION]
This key determines whether or not to perform background animated
simulation while NC data are being generated.
Each time this key is touched, the setting alternates between
[ANIMATION] and [ANIMATION].
Blank figures and part figures are drawn in the [ANIMATION] state.
Blank figures are drawn in colored backgrounds. Machining is
simulated during NC data preparation.
Animated simulation performed in this state is called
[BACKGROUND ANIMATION] and is distinguished from animated
simulation specified on Menu No.6.
(Animated simulation Specified on Menu No.6 is called
[FOREGROUND ANIMATION].)
Part figures alone are drawn in the [ANIMATION] state.
Tool paths are displayed during NC data preparation.
[TOOL PATH] or [TOOL PATH]
This key appears only in the [ANIMATION] state.
Each time this key is pressed, the setting alternates between
[TOOL PATH] and [TOOL PATH].
In the [TOOL PATH] state, the path of the virtual tool position is
always displayed in purple.
No path is displayed in the [TOOL PATH] state.
[SINGLE STEP] or [SINGLE STEP]
Each time this key is pressed, the setting alternates between
[SINGLE STEP] and [SINGLE STEP].
NC data is output continuously in the [SINGLE STEP] state. (Refer
to Chapter VIII 1.4 NC Data Output by Single Step.)
[PROC. STOP] or [PROC. STOP]
Each time this key is pressed, the setting alternates between
[PROC. STOP] and [PROC. STOP].
In the [PROC. STOP] state, NC data output is suspended
temporarily at the specified position of each process.
The half position is set by system parameters No.49 to No.57 and
No.310 to No.314. (Refer to Chapter VIII 1.4 Single Step Output.)
[NC DATA] or [NC DATA]
Each time this key is pressed, the setting alternates between
[NC DATA] and [NC DATA].
NC data is displayed in the [NC DATA] state.
No NC data is displayed in the [NC DATA] state.
141
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
PROGRAMMING AND
OPERATION BY SYMBOLIC FAPT
B61804E2/05
[START]
Press this key to check the family program prepared anew.
In the [ANIMATION] state, you can simulate machining while
generating NC data preparation in the sequence of specification on the
process list.
Tool figures appear on the display, and you can visually check how
blank figures are cut.
Simulation by animation is not performed in the [ANIMATION] state.
NC data is generated in the sequence of specification on the process
list, and tool paths are displayed on the screen.
[REGISTER]
Press this key to register NC data in the machining memory while
checking the family program prepared anew.
In the [ANIMATION] state, you can simulate NC data while
generating the data in the sequence of specification on the process list.
Tool figures appear on the display, and you can visually check how
blank figures are cut.
In the [ANIMATION] state, NC data is prepared in the sequence of
specification on the process list, and tool paths are displayed on the
screen.
[DRAWNG RANGE]
Press this key to enlarge or scale down figures.
[PROC. LIST]
Press this key to display a list of machining periods and general
machining periods of each process.
[ESCAPE]
Press this key to return to Main Menu.
3.5.2
Precautions to be
Taken with Background
Animated Simulation
B61804E2/05
3.5.3
Display of Machining
Time
PROGRAMMING AND
OPERATION BY SYMBOLIC FAPT
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
These machining time are the theoretical values figured out when NC data
was automatically created. The machining time is of course changed if
feed rate override is effected in actual machining.
NOTE
When over 20 processes are defined, a bar graph is not
displayed.
3.5.4
Process Editing
Function (Only with
2path Control)
WARNING
After process editing, check the editing results. If edits are
made incorrectly, the tool may collide with the workpiece
and/or machine, or forced machining may occur, possibly
causing damage to the workpiece, machine and/or tool
itself, or injury to the user.
(1) Summary
In the initial screen of Menu 5, NC DATA PREPARATION, the
operation sequence defined in Menu 4, MACHINING DEFINITION
is displayed for each turret. Further it is possible to edit the S Code and
operation sequence on this screen.
In editing the S code, a surface speed defined with MACHINING
DEFINITION can be reindicated with an other value.
143
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
PROGRAMMING AND
OPERATION BY SYMBOLIC FAPT
B61804E2/05
Kind of Machining
Turret No.
Drilling
Grooving (External)
Grooving (Internal)
Threading (External)
Threading (Internal)
144
B61804E2/05
PROGRAMMING AND
OPERATION BY SYMBOLIC FAPT
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
Thus, cutting operations for each turret are displayed. For the section on
spindle speed, N means spindle speed, V means cutting speed. For
simultaneous operation; No.2 and 3, ROUGHING OF OUTER
FIGURE and ROUGHING OF INNER FIGURE, operation No.8 and
9, THREADING and DOWN (or set the cursor to No.3 and depress
HEAD 2 UP), and then set the cursor to No.8 and depress the soft key,
HEAD 1 DOWN (or set the cursor to No.9 and depress HEAD 2 UP)
continuously. For changing the cutting speed of operation No.6,
GROOVING, 125 m/min for instance, set the cursor to No.6 and input
125 through keys for the question, V (N) =. When performing such
operations, the operation procedure is displayed as follows.
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
PROGRAMMING AND
OPERATION BY SYMBOLIC FAPT
B61804E2/05
HEAD 1
HEAD 2
ROUGHING OF
OUTER FIGURE.
G96V145M03 (1)
ROUGHING OF
INNER FIGURE.
SPEED
G96V150M03 (2)
FINISHING OF
OUTER FIGURE.
G96V200M03 (1)
GROOVING
G96V100M03 (1)
GROOVING
G96V120M03 (2)
HEAD 1
ROUGHING OF
OUTER FIGURE.
HEAD 2
ROUGHING OF
INNER FIGURE.
SPEED
G97V145M03 (1)
2
3
FINISHING OF
OUTER FIGURE.
GROOVING
146
G97V200M03 (1)
GROOVING
G97V120M03 (2)
B61804E2/05
PROGRAMMING AND
OPERATION BY SYMBOLIC FAPT
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
PROGRAMMING AND
OPERATION BY SYMBOLIC FAPT
B61804E2/05
Turret 2 NC data
OXXXX ;
O**** ;
148
M100 ;
M05 ;
M30 ;
%
B61804E2/05
PROGRAMMING AND
OPERATION BY SYMBOLIC FAPT
3.5.5
(1) Overview
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
Turret 2
O0001;
O0002;
NC data of
outer surface
roughing
M100;
M100;
NC data of
inner surface
roughing
M101;
M05;
M30;
%
M101;
M05;
M30;
%
The program for turret 2 does not contain the block corresponding to outer
surface roughing of turret 1.
The program for turret 1 does not contain the block corresponding to inner
surface roughing of turret 2.
A machine may require that the programs of the two turrets share NC data
(such as M01) as shown below.
Turret 1
Turret 2
O0001;
O0002;
NC data of
outer surface
roughing
M01;
M01;
M100;
M100;
NC data of
inner surface
roughing
M01;
M01;
M101;
M05;
M30;
%
M101;
M05;
M30;
%
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
PROGRAMMING AND
OPERATION BY SYMBOLIC FAPT
B61804E2/05
Outer surface
roughing
. . . . . . . . . Turret 1 only
Inner surface
roughing
Process 2
Process 3
Turret 2
Outer surface
finishing
Inner surface
finishing
. . . . . . . . . Turret 2 only
. . . . . . . . . Simultaneous
operation of
turrets 1 and 2
150
B61804E2/05
PROGRAMMING AND
OPERATION BY SYMBOLIC FAPT
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
NC data output
After the end of each process (MTF2011, MTF2013), the special block
(MTF2045) is output.
O0001 ;
N1 G50 X_ Z_ ;
G0 X_ Z_ ;
(ROUGH OF OUT);
N2 G50 X_ Z_ ;
Txx00 ;
M1 ;
O0002 ;
. . . MTF2011
. . . MTF2045 . . . .
M100 ;
M100 ;
N2 G50 X_ Z_ ;
G0 X_ Z_ ;
(ROUGH OF INNER) ;
N3 G50 X_ Z_ ;
N3 ;
M1 ;
MTF2011 . . .
. . . MTF2045 . . . .
. . . MTF2013 . . .
. . . MTF2013 . . . .
X_ Z_ ;
M102 ;
M5 ;
M30 ;
%
151
Txx00 ;
M1 ;
M101 ;
(FIN OF INNER);
N4 G50 X_ Z_ ;
M101 ;
(FIN OF INNER) ;
N4 G50 X_ Z_ ;
Txx00 ;
M1 ;
M1 ;
Txx00 ;
M1 ;
X_ Z_ ;
M102 ;
M5 ;
M30 ;
%
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
PROGRAMMING AND
OPERATION BY SYMBOLIC FAPT
B61804E2/05
NC data output
Since 0000 is specified in MTF2045, no special block are output.
O0001 ;
N1 G50 X_ Z_ ;
G0 X_ Z_ ;
(ROUGH OF OUT) ;
N2 G50 X_ Z_ ;
Txx00 ;
M100 ;
O0002 ;
. . . MTF2011
M100 ;
N1 G50 X_ Z_ ;
G0 X_ Z_ ;
(ROUGH OF INNER) ;
N3 G50 X_ Z_ ;
MTF2011 . . . . Txx00 ;
M101 ;
(FIN OF INNER) ;
N3 G50 X_ Z_ ;
M101 ;
(FIN OF INNER);
N4 G50 X_ Z_ ;
Txx00 ;
. . . MTF2013 . . . . Txx00 ;
X_ Z_ ;
M102 ;
M5 ;
M30 ;
%
X_ Z_ ;
M102 ;
M5 ;
M30 ;
%
152
B61804E2/05
PROGRAMMING AND
OPERATION BY SYMBOLIC FAPT
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
NOTE
The function to output the MTF2045 block is provided only
for a lathe having two turrets. When MTF1050 is set to 1 (a
lathe having only one turret is used), the block is not output.
3.5.6
Outputting the NC Data
of a Multiple Thread
Cutting Cycle
1. Overview
If the NC data for threading are created on a 15TFB or 16T CAP II,
the threading path is generally created with G92. Depending on the
setting of MTF, the NC data for G76 (multiple thread cutting cycle)
can also be created.
153
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
PROGRAMMING AND
OPERATION BY SYMBOLIC FAPT
B61804E2/05
If the multiple thread cutting cycle is used, the 16T CAP II displays a prompt relating to the depth of cut (DL). The 15TFB displays no prompts about DL.
Soft keys
[ESCAPE]: Returns to the FAPT menu screen.
[BACK PAGE]: Returns to the previous page.
[CURSOR ] or [CURSOR ]: Moves the cursor up or down through the
prompts.
[DRAWING RANGE]: Enlarges or reduces the drawing.
[NEXT PAGE]: Displays the next page.
Threading methods
Threading method 1: Cutting using one cutting edge and a constant
cutting amount
Threading method 2: Alternate cutting using two cutting edges and
a constant cutting amount
Threading method 3: Cutting using one cutting edge and a constant
depth of cut
Threading method 4: Alternate cutting using two cutting edges and
a constant depth of cut
If the multiple thread cutting cycle (G76) is used with the 16T
CAP II, the prompt relating to the threading method is not displayed.
[Conventional NC data]
.
.
(THREAD.)
N002G50X100.Z100.;
G0T0101;
G97S0474M3;
Z2.71;
X64.;
G92X59.45Z22.F2.;
G0Z2.645;
G92X54.222Z22.;
G0Z2.594;
.
.
154
B61804E2/05
PROGRAMMING AND
OPERATION BY SYMBOLIC FAPT
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
155
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
PROGRAMMING AND
OPERATION BY SYMBOLIC FAPT
B61804E2/05
2. Setting
(1) Setting the MTF parameter
The MTF1060 parameter determines whether the conventional
threading cycle (G92) or multiple thread cutting cycle (G76) is
used.
No.
Format
Initial value
1060
0, 1
Specify
(eight bits)
10000000
Description
7
Bit
Bit 0
0:
1:
Bit 1
0:
1:
Bit 2
0:
1:
Bit 6
0:
1:
Bit 7
0:
1:
5
0
4
0
3
0
Format
Initial value
Description
1392
Character
II
1393
Character
KK
1394
Character
DD
1395
Character
AA
1396
Character
PP
1397
Character
RR
156
B61804E2/05
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
PROGRAMMING AND
OPERATION BY SYMBOLIC FAPT
Format
Initial value
Description
1392
Character
RR
1393
Character
PP
1394
Character
1395
Character
PP
Address specifying
(Pmmrraa)
1396
Character
PP
1397
Character
RR
the
tool
angle
(4) Setting MTF parameters with numbers ranging from 2000 to 2999
(Function table, 15TFB)
No.
Description
Remarks
Detail 2060 = 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000,
2061= 4B02, 1101,
G76
X
Multiple thread
cutting cycle
(5) Setting MTF parameters with numbers ranging from 2000 to 2999
(Function table, 16T CAP II)
No.
Description
Remarks
Detail 2060 = 4B02, 0E03, E401, 0004, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000,
2061= 4B02, 1101,
G76
X
157
Multiple thread
cutting cycle
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
PROGRAMMING AND
OPERATION BY SYMBOLIC FAPT
B61804E2/05
Function
Format
Initial
value
230
Integer
231
Integer
158
Description
Remarks
B61804E2/05
PROGRAMMING AND
OPERATION BY SYMBOLIC FAPT
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
15TFB
16T CAP II
(Threading method 1)
Cutting using one cutting edge and a
constant cutting amount
(Threading method 2)
Alternate cutting using two cutting edges
and a constant cutting amount
(Threading method 4)
Alternate cutting using two cutting edges
and a constant depth of cut
(Threading method 1)
Cutting using one cutting edge and a
constant cutting amount
(Threading method 2)
Alternate cutting using two cutting edges
and a constant cutting amount
(Threading method 3)
Cutting using one cutting edge and a
constant depth of cut
(Threading method 4)
Alternate cutting using two cutting edges
and a constant depth of cut
G92
G32 (Threading method 3)
Cutting using one cutting edge and a
constant depth of cut
G76
159
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
PROGRAMMING AND
OPERATION BY SYMBOLIC FAPT
B61804E2/05
NOTE
1 To enable execution of the multiple thread cutting cycle
(G76), the complex turning cycle function of the NC must be
supported.
2 Face threading cannot be executed with the multiple thread
cutting cycle (G76). For face threading, G32 is output as
before, even if the multiple thread cutting cycle is selected.
160
B61804E2/05
PROGRAMMING AND
OPERATION BY SYMBOLIC FAPT
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
3.6
CHECKING NC DATA
(ANIMATED
SIMULATION
FUNCTION)
WARNING
Even when the tool path and machining processes
specified in NC data are verified by the NC data check
function, if the data relating to the actual tool offset and
workpiece shift is incorrect, the tool may collide with the
workpiece and/or machine, possibly causing damage to the
machine and/or tool itself, or injury to the user. Before
starting a production run, perform a dry run to ensure that
the tool will not collide with the workpiece or machine. For
example, specify a low feedrate, then start the NC program
without mounting a workpiece on the machine.
In 16TC CAP II and 16iTA CAP II, the animated simulation function
has been improved.
When using the above CAP II models, see Part XIII, ANIMATED
SIMULATION FUNCTION II.
The function which allows a practical cutting simulation to take place by
displaying the blank, chuck, tailstock and tool configuration is called an
Animated Simulation Function.
The manner in which a blank is being cut can be monitored by
1) selecting the screen on which animated simulation is done and
2) executing cycle operation under the machine lock condition and each
time a T code is specified, the tool drawing changes.
3.6.1
Operating Instructions
(1) Prepare NC data by using the symbolic FAPT function, and enter it
into the NC memory.
(2) Set the coordinate system so that work coordinates of the tool may
meet when a program is started. Alternatively move the tool manually
or automatically until it is in the correct position.
(3) Select Menu 6, CHECKING OF NC DATA and depress the soft key
CHECK START.
(4) Execute the NC program in Machine Lock Mode. The tool drawing
moves according to the given commands and the manner in which the
blank is cut can be monitored.
161
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
PROGRAMMING AND
OPERATION BY SYMBOLIC FAPT
B61804E2/05
3.6.2
Flow of Animation
Screen
6 INPUT
Animation screen
Setting of parameter
Setting of parameter
for
animated simulation
CHUCK
Standard chuck data
setting screen
Number input
TAILSTOCK
Standard tailstock
data setting screen
TOOL HOLDER
Tool holder
number list
Number input
Special tailstock
data setting screen
DATA SET
D Press the software key END on each screen to return to the previous
screen.
D Press the Menu screen software key to return to the main menu
screen from any screen.
3.6.3
Starting an Animated
Simulation
B61804E2/05
PROGRAMMING AND
OPERATION BY SYMBOLIC FAPT
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
NOTE
When the value of system parameter 750 is 1, the blank
drawing will be scaled to a magnification so that it will cover
nearly all of the display. If this scale needs to be changed,
it can be changed to various sizes of the drawing.
For data of the blank drawing, use data of L and D input with the key of
Menu 1, BLANK & PART (DRAWING & BLANK).
The following procedure is used for the animated simulation:
(1) Prepare conditions on the machine side
1) Set the coordinate system so that the work coordinates of the tool
may meet its current coordinates at the start of the program or move
the tool to the starting point of a program.
2) Execute the heading of the NC program.
3) Set to Machine Lock Mode.
(2) Press the CHECK START key among the soft keys. START will
then be indicated in the lower right section of the screen.
(3) Put the machine in NC operation
When a T Code is given, the tool drawing is represented and the
situation of the blank being cut can be visually observed.
In the case of clash between tool and chuck, or tool and tailstock the
interference check functions as an alarm, and then the situation is
displayed on the screen. For 2path lathe the interference alarm is
generated in the case of clash between tool and tool.
163
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
PROGRAMMING AND
OPERATION BY SYMBOLIC FAPT
B61804E2/05
NOTE
The interference check is performed only within the screen.
Meaning of SOFT KEY
[CHECK START] . . . . . Depress with the start of the animated
drawing function.
[ORIGINAL] . . . . . . . . Exit to a blank drawing before cutting.
[ACA] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . To use the function for automatically
avoiding collisions (option supported only
by 15TTFB), press the [ACA] soft key to
highlight it. Once the [CHECK START]
soft key is pressed. the [ACA] soft key is
disabled.
[TOOL PATH] . . . . . . . When TOOL PATH is displayed in reverse
video, the tool path is displayed.
[PARAMETER] . . . . . . Depress when setting parameters on
animated drawings.
[DRAWNG RANGE] . . Depress to enlarge or reduce shape.
[END] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exit to a Main Menu screen.
When bit 0 or 1 of system parameter 19 is set on, the operation of a vertical
lathe is simulated on the screen.
164
B61804E2/05
PROGRAMMING AND
OPERATION BY SYMBOLIC FAPT
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
When the vertical lathe is selected, turret 1 is shown to the right of the
workpiece.
3.6.4
Press [PARAMETER]
Setting of Parameters
for Animated
Simulation
165
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
PROGRAMMING AND
OPERATION BY SYMBOLIC FAPT
B61804E2/05
166
B61804E2/05
PROGRAMMING AND
OPERATION BY SYMBOLIC FAPT
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
[MENU SCREEN] . . . .
[CHUCK] . . . . . . . . . . .
[TAILSTOCK] . . . . . . .
[TOOL HOLDER] . . . .
3.6.5
[CHUCK]
Setting of Chuck
Figure
There are two types of chuck figures, namely standard figure and special
figure.
Up to 16 standard figures and up to 5 special figures can be registered.
The numbers 116 and 2125 are assigned to the standard figure and
special figure, respectively.
(1) Setting of standard figure
Set the data L, W, L1, and W1 by referring to the illustration diagram
on the screen.
When the cursor is at the TYPE position, either OUT or IN is
displayed.
Press either software key to select type.
[MENU SCREEN] . . . . Return to the main menu screen.
[UNDEFINE] . . . . . . . . Let the data where a cursor exists to an
undefined one.
[NO. ] . . . . . . . . . . . . . The cursor moves to the start of next line.
167
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
PROGRAMMING AND
OPERATION BY SYMBOLIC FAPT
B61804E2/05
Designate the special chuck figure with 16 points. With P1 as the starting
point, connect the values set to P2, P3 in sequence, using a line for
drawing. When the control asks End Point P =, input the final point of
the figure data. The point data after the end point number is not regarded
as the figure forming data.
[CHECK] . . . Draws a pattern, based on the input figure data.
[ERASE] . . . . Erases the drawn pattern.
3.6.6
Setting of Tailstock
Figure
There are two types of tailstocks as in chuck, namely standard and special
figures. Up to 2 special figures and up to 5 special figures can be
registered.
The numbers 12 and 1115 are assigned to the standard figure and
special figure, respectively.
168
B61804E2/05
PROGRAMMING AND
OPERATION BY SYMBOLIC FAPT
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
3.6.7
Setting of Tool Holder
Figure
The tool holder number directry screen appears. Up to 32 tool holders can
be set.
[MENU SCREEN] . . . . Return to the main menu screen.
[SET DATA] . . . . . . . . . This is a software key for setting figure data.
Move the cursor to the number to be set and
then press this key.
[CURSOR ] [CURSOR ] . . Press this key to select the number to
be set.
[END] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Return to the previous screen (parameter
screen for animated simulation).
169
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
PROGRAMMING AND
OPERATION BY SYMBOLIC FAPT
B61804E2/05
[SET DATA]
The tool profile is divided into the tip section and holder section. Input
the holder profile data onto this screen. The setting procedure is
performed with the point indication the same as for chuck and tailstock.
Up to a maximum points of 16 points and used.
(Example) Data in order to draw the holder profile as shown in the
following figure is:
P1
X=0
Z=0
P2
P3
P4
P5
X = 10.
Z = 5.
X = 200.
Z = 5.
X = 200.
Z = 200.
X = 30.
Z = 200.
P6
P7
X = 30
Z = 30
X = 10.
Z = 50.
END POINT P = 7
Press [CHECK]
170
P8 to P16
No relation
B61804E2/05
3.6.8
Enlargement and
Reduction in the
Animated Screen
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
PROGRAMMING AND
OPERATION BY SYMBOLIC FAPT
The enlargement and the reduction of the screen can be specified in the
animated screen of the sixth menu (Check of NC data) by the cursor.
(1) Operation
1) When the sixth menu is selected, it becomes the animated screen.
Push the soft key DRAWING RANGE in this screen.
2) In the screen, the cursor appears and the following questions is
asked.
The drawing range is specified
MAX (100/100)
MAXX =
MIN (100/100)
3) Move the cursor by pressing the soft key [CURSOR ] or
[CURSOR ] and press
value directly and press
INPUT
INPUT
DEL
and
INPUT
keys in
171
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
PROGRAMMING AND
OPERATION BY SYMBOLIC FAPT
B61804E2/05
3.6.9
Related System
Parameters
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
701
Numbers, 751 through 754 are the parameters which indicate the size of
the tool tip when drawn on. (L: parameter value)
751 Parameter for Drill Tools
753
172
B61804E2/05
754
3.6.10
Input/Output of
Graphic Data
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
PROGRAMMING AND
OPERATION BY SYMBOLIC FAPT
INPUT
(Example 3)
INPUT
INPUT
P
P
No. P
P
P
P
P
173
D
D1
D2
D3
L
L1
L2
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
3. EXECUTION OF
SYMBOLIC FAPT
PROGRAMMING AND
OPERATION BY SYMBOLIC FAPT
B61804E2/05
End point
1:
2: Tailstock
3: Holder
(3) Error message
(a) I/O NOT READY
This message is displayed when an input or output device is not
ready for operation.
(b) TV ERROR INCLUDING
When a block, in which the number of characters is an add, is used,
this message is displayed.
(c) ILLEGAL FORMAT DATA DETECTED
When a block other than a format described in (2), is used or when
a block other than that to be expected is used, this message is
displayed.
NOTE
1 When the chuck data is input, data is notreplaced. But,
chuck data now being registered is initialized and input data
is newly registered.
2 Data are not output at points larger than end data in the I/O
of special chuck, special tail stock and holder data.
Even if a block number exceeding the maximum point data
is entered, the data is neglected without processing it as an
alarm.
174
B61804E2/05
PROGRAMMING AND
OPERATION BY SYMBOLIC FAPT
175
4.1
SETTING OF SUB
CYCLE
PROGRAMMING AND
OPERATION BY SYMBOLIC FAPT
B61804E2/05
Family program
screen
INPUT
Sub cycle
name input
Data input
Depress [END]
176
B61804E2/05
PROGRAMMING AND
OPERATION BY SYMBOLIC FAPT
The display shifts to the SUB CYCLE SETTING screen when the
following is input.
No. = 5
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
177
PROGRAMMING AND
OPERATION BY SYMBOLIC FAPT
B61804E2/05
(Soft keys)
[CURSOR ] [CURSOR ] . . These keys are used to select the
menu number.
[END] . . . . This key is depressed when the sub cycle file has been
created. The display returns to the family program
screen.
(3) Sub cycle detail setting pattern
The display shifts to the following screen when the sub cycle name is
set.
Set the calling G code, the program number, the address and the
comment of the required argument on this screen.
The G code must always be set. KEYIN AGAIN is displayed if it
is tried to return to the menu screen without defining G code.
The program number should be left undefined if the correspondence
between the calling G code and the called program number is set by
a parameter on the NC side.
Up to 10 arguments are settable. Also the comment is settable in up
to 6 characters. The arguments can be programmed by any addresses
excluding G, L, N, O, and P. For I, J, and K only, they must be
programmed in alphabetical order.
(Soft keys)
[CURSOR ] [CURSOR ] . . These keys are used to select the
question to be set. Such a method of
feeding as to leave the address
undefined and to define the comment
only is impossible.
[END] . . . . This key is depressed when all the settings are over. The
display returns to the preceding sub cycle menu screen.
178
PROGRAMMING AND
OPERATION BY SYMBOLIC FAPT
B61804E2/05
4.2
INPUT/OUTPUT OF
SUB CYCLE FILE
Calling from
to sub-memory
INPUT
6, C
or
6
INPUT
7, C
or
7
INPUT
1, @File name
INPUT
1, @File name
INPUT
INPUT
or
1, R, @File name
INPUT
Output
6, P
Input
7, P
INPUT
179
INPUT
PROGRAMMING AND
OPERATION BY SYMBOLIC FAPT
B61804E2/05
Output
Input
6, B
7, B
INPUT
or
6
1, I
1
INPUT
or
7
INPUT
1, I
INPUT
INPUT
1, A
INPUT
1, @n
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
1, @n
INPUT
1, N
INPUT
180
B61804E2/05
PROGRAMMING AND
OPERATION BY SYMBOLIC FAPT
4.3
DEFINITION OF SUB
CYCLE PROCESS IN
DEFINITION OF
MACHINING
WARNING
No check of the validity of a machining sequence is made.
Therefore, even when a machining sequence specified in
the machining definition includes any invalid process steps,
the entire machining sequence is reflected on the prepared
NC data. When defining machining, check the specified
machining sequence. Failure to specify a valid machining
sequence may result in the tool colliding with the workpiece
and/or machine, or forced machining occurring, possibly
causing damage to the machine and/or tool itself, or injury
to the user.
Kind of machining
screen
Menu number
INPUT
Key-in at
each question
181
PROGRAMMING AND
OPERATION BY SYMBOLIC FAPT
B61804E2/05
The list of the sub cycle names that have been set is displayed.
The display shifts to the sub cycle data screen if the following is
input in response to the question NO. = _ :
Menu number
INPUT
To correct the sub cycle process that has already been defined,
depress the soft key NEXT PAGE, since the menu number is
displayed in the NO. = column, and the display will shift to the sub
cycle data pattern.
(Soft keys)
[PAGE EJECT] . . . . This key is depressed to see the menu which could
not be displayed in one screen.
[NEXT PAGE] . . . . . This key is depressed to go to the sub cycle data
screen while the menu number has already been
set.
[ESCAPE] . . . . . . . . This key is depressed to return to the first menu
screen.
182
B61804E2/05
PROGRAMMING AND
OPERATION BY SYMBOLIC FAPT
The repetition count and the other questions are asked on this screen.
The inputtable values are within the ranges of 0 to 9999 for the
repetition count, of 9999. to 9999. for the arguments and of 1 to 2 for
Turret No.
If the data is left undefined here, the NC data of that address is not
output.
(Soft keys)
[CURSOR ] [CURSOR ] . . These keys are depressed to select the
question to be set.
[NEXT PAGE] . . This key is depressed when the data setting is all
over. The display returns to the MACHINING
DEFINITION (kind of machining) screen.
[ESCAPE] . . . . . The display returns to the first menu pattern.
183
PROGRAMMING AND
OPERATION BY SYMBOLIC FAPT
B61804E2/05
4.4
PROCESS EDITING
OF SUB CYCLE
(2PATH LATHE)
WARNING
After process editing, check the editing results. If edits are
made incorrectly, the tool may collide with the workpiece
and/or machine, or forced machining may occur, possibly
causing damage to the machine and/or tool itself, or injury
to the user.
The auxiliary machining process is also edited as well as other machining
process. However, when an auxiliary machining is selected by S CODE
SELECT, no data is displayed under spindle speed column.
Actually control of the S code depends on the auxiliary machining macro
prepared by MTB.
184
B61804E2/05
4.5
OUTPUT OF NC DATA
PROGRAMMING AND
OPERATION BY SYMBOLIC FAPT
185
PROGRAMMING AND
OPERATION BY SYMBOLIC FAPT
B61804E2/05
(Example 3)
If the same sub cycle as in Example 1 is defined in the following order
of processes:
Process 01
Sub cycle
Process 02
Roughing of outer figure
the following NC data is output:
%
O0001;
N0003 G65 P1000 L2 A25.65 B12.5 C8.23;
N0002 G50 X0. Z180. S2000;
G00 T0101;
.
Roughing of outer figure
.
.
T0100;
M01;
X200. Z380.;
M05;
M30;
%
(Example 4)
The modal call should be made in the following order:
1) Define the sub cycle in the definition of machining, and select
pattern number 2 (G66ROUGH).
2) Then define the sub cycle in the next process, and select pattern
number 3 (G67). The repetition count is asked in the sub cycle data
screen. Depress the soft key NEXT PAGE by leaving the asked
repetition count undefined.
3) Insert movement statements by outputting menu 5 NC DATA
PREPARATION in a single step.
%
O0001;
N0001 G66 P2000 A__ B__ ;
Z100.;
X100.;
.
Insert movement statements
.
.
Z200.;
G67;
M05;
M03;
%
186
B61804E2/05
PROGRAMMING AND
OPERATION BY SYMBOLIC FAPT
4.6
CAUTIONS AND
NOTES
CAUTION
1 This function involves the creation of a macro call message.
It is a precondition, therefore, that the macro body has
previously been created on the NC side.
2 If the sub cycle process is to be corrected in the definition
of machining, a sub cycle file which is completely identical
to that during new creation must be existing in the main
memory.
3 The family program does not include the sub cycle file which
has been set. To correct the sub cycle process by inputting
a family program including the sub cycle into the process,
therefore, a sub cycle file which is completely identical to
that during new creation must also be input.
NOTE
1 The tool locus is not drawn during the NC data preparation.
2 M01 is not output when the sub cycle ends even if 1 is set
to MTF NO.1136 (to output M01 when the process ends).
3 The sub cycle does not stop in the single step of the
process.
4 It is impossible to create NC data for the 4axis lathe or NC
data in the main and sub format if the process includes a sub
cycle.
187
B61804E2/05
WARNING
No check of the validity of a machining sequence is made.
Therefore, even when a machining sequence specified in
the machining definition includes any invalid process steps,
the entire machining sequence is reflected on the prepared
NC data. When defining machining, check the specified
machining sequence. Failure to specify a valid machining
sequence may result in the tool colliding with the workpiece
and/or machine, or forced machining occurring, possibly
causing damage to the machine and/or tool itself, or injury
to the user.
Machining conducted in one process by the tools of both head 1 and head
2 is called balance cut. The balance cut FAPT function automatically
generates NC data for balance cut. There are the following two types of
balancecut machining.
Type A: This type aims at machining thin and long works with a high
precision. The two tools move in perfect synchronization with
each other.
Type B: This type aims at machining works more efficiently. After the
tool on head 1 cuts the work, the tool on head 2 cuts it deeper,
following the movement of the tool on head 1.
188
B61804E2/05
PROGRAMMING AND
5. BALANCE CUT FAPT FUNCTION
OPERATION BY SYMBOLIC FAPT
(2PATH LATHE ONLY)
189
B61804E2/05
5.1
BALANCE CUTTING
PROCESS
System parameter
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
707
190
B61804E2/05
5.2
SPECIFICATION
METHOD
PROGRAMMING AND
5. BALANCE CUT FAPT FUNCTION
OPERATION BY SYMBOLIC FAPT
(2PATH LATHE ONLY)
191
B61804E2/05
CAUTION
1 Set the same tool tip radius (RN) for both tools. The system
does not check the data other than the radius of the tool tip.
It is recommended to use tools having an identical tip figure.
If tools having different tip figures are used, the workpiece
may vibrated during actual machining and the tool tip may
interfere with the workpiece.
2 A negative value cannot be specified as the delay (DA). The
operator is prompted to specify the delay only when outer
surface roughing is selected. The system accepts 0 or a
positive integer. If 0 is specified, type A is selected. If a
positive integer is specified, type B is selected.
3 The turret numbers (TL) of the two tools must be different.
Specify turret 1 (TL = 1) for the first tool and turret 2 (TL =
2) for the second tool.
4 Select tools having an identical direction of spindle rotation
(SD).
Unless the above instructions are observed, the system gives a warning
and prohibits display of the next screen.
(2) On the machining process list screen which is the first screen of Menu
No.4 (MACHINING DEFINITION), the balance cutting process is
represented by (B) following the T code.
PROC. 01 ROUGH. OF CUT. T0909 (B) X200. Z200.
When the process is not a balance cutting process, (1) or (2) is
displayed after the T code. (1) means cutting by head 1 while (2)
means cutting by head 2.
(3) In the balance cutting process, points whose X coordinate value is 0
must not be specified as the start or end point of the cutting area.
192
B61804E2/05
5.3
USING THE
AUTOMATIC
PROCESS
DETERMINATION
FUNCTION
5.4
PROCESS EDITING
SCREEN
PROGRAMMING AND
5. BALANCE CUT FAPT FUNCTION
OPERATION BY SYMBOLIC FAPT
(2PATH LATHE ONLY)
KIND OF MACHINING
ROUGH. OF CUT.
FIN. OF CUT.
GROOVING
THREADING
HEAD NO.
1, 2 (BALANCE CUT TYPE B)
1, 2 (BALANCE CUT TYPE A)
1
2
At this time, the following data appears on the process editing screen.
NO.
1
2
3
4
(HEAD 1)
(HEAD 2)
SPINDLE SPEED
ROUGH. OF CUT. BALANCE CUT G97 V120 M03 (1)
FIN. OF CUT.
BALANCE CUT G96 V115 M03 (1)
GROOVING
G96 V90 M03 (1)
THREADING
G96 V130 M03 (2)
The soft keys for moving up and down the process (HEAD 1 UP, etc.)
are not valid in the balance cutting process.
193
5.5
NC DATA
194
B61804E2/05
B61804E2/05
PROGRAMMING AND
5. BALANCE CUT FAPT FUNCTION
OPERATION BY SYMBOLIC FAPT
(2PATH LATHE ONLY)
NOTE
1 When type B is selected, the M code set at MTF1040
(override cancel ON) is output.
2 When type B is selected, the M code set at MTF1041
(override cancel OFF) is output.
3 When type B is selected, the initial value of a waiting M code
is set using system parameter No. 735.
4 The delay time of the tool on head 2 is calculated based
upon the delay amount (DA) and the surface speed.
5 Balance cut (type A) start G code.
6 Balance cut (type A) end G code.
195
5.6
RELATED
PARAMETERS
5.7
CONSTANT
SURFACE SPEED
CONTROL FOR
BALANCE CUT B
B61804E2/05
Whether to exercise constant surface speed control for the balance cut B
function depends on the setting made for system parameter No. 707.
When constant surface speed control is exercised, a waiting M code is
output at the cut point; in addition, a turret waiting M code is output at the
position to which the tool is retracted, by the return escape amount, from
the end point of the cutting path.
196
B61804E2/05
PROGRAMMING AND
5. BALANCE CUT FAPT FUNCTION
OPERATION BY SYMBOLIC FAPT
(2PATH LATHE ONLY)
5.8
CAUTION AND
NOTES
CAUTION
When the delay amount (DA) is too large, machining of the
second tool may not complete while the first tool is moving
to the next machining position (indicated by the dotted line
in the figure below). In this case, a new S code is output for
the next machining of the first tool.
This may affect the machining of the second tool.
New S code output
Path of the first tool
Path of the second tool
NOTE
1 When there are two or more pocket areas, balance cutting
is not performed from the second pocket.
Balance cutting is performed by head 1 and 2 tools in the
first pocket.
In the second pocket and after, only the tool on head 1 is
used for machining.
Balance cut of type B is
not performed.
197
PROGRAMMING AND
OPERATION BY SYMBOLIC FAPT
B61804E2/05
The auto collision avoidance function makes use of the interference check
according to animated simulation function.
The auto collision avoidance function is a function to automatically alter
the program which can evade that interference if the turrets interfere each
other in the simulation according to the animation drawing.
Basically, this function automatically edits the NC program which is
programmed at FAPT side to evade the interference of the turrets. Refer
to the next explanation at the time of the use actually because it happens
that it is not possible to edit correctly in some case.
198
B61804E2/05
6.1
EXPLANATION OF
FUNCTIONS
PROGRAMMING AND
OPERATION BY SYMBOLIC FAPT
(1) General
This function can edit the program to prevent the interference around
the same position by inserting the waiting M code automatically to the
executing program when the two turrets interfere with each other.
Algorithms of the insertion of the waiting M code is as follows.
(a) The operator decides which of the turret is prior when the
interference occurs. (A turret of either one side can be always made
to take priority according to the setting of the system parameter.)
(b) The program which the turret has priority inserts the waiting M
code next to the executing block (which executes when the
interference occurs). The program which the turret has no priority
inserts the waiting M code before the executing block.
(c) When the executing block is the waiting M code at the side of the
posterior program, it is invalid to insert the waiting M code before
the executing block as two waiting M codes continue.
(d) Two waiting M codes continue as a result of the insertion of the
waiting M code, the first waiting M code is deleted to simplify the
program. After deletion, the waiting M code of the same number
is searched and deleted in another turret program.
However, the actual machining does not have quite the effect if the
waiting M code is not deleted and continue.
(2) Example
The following programs are thought.
Program for the turret 1
Program for the turret 2
.
.
.
.
N100 X_ _ _ Z_ _ _ ;
N200 X_ _ _ Z_ _ _ ;
N101 X_ _ _ Z_ _ _ ;
N201 X_ _ _ Z_ _ _ ;
N102 X_ _ _ Z_ _ _ ;
N202 X_ _ _ Z_ _ _ ;
N103 X_ _ _ Z_ _ _ ;
N203 X_ _ _ Z_ _ _ ;
.
.
.
.
199
PROGRAMMING AND
OPERATION BY SYMBOLIC FAPT
B61804E2/05
Fig. 6.1 (b)
(a) When the turret 1 executes the N102 block, the turret 2 executes the
N202 block, suppose that the interference occurs. At this time, the
animation drawing screen becomes as Fig.6.1(b). When the turret
1 is prior to the turret2 (the priority is specified at FAPT side
screen), the waiting M code is automatically inserted next to the
N102 block and before the N202 block. The program is edited as
follows. In the following example, the initial value of the waiting
M code is set to M500.
Program for the turret 1
Program for the turret 2
.
.
.
.
N101 X_ _ _ Z_ _ _ ;
N201 X_ _ _ Z_ _ _ ;
N102 X_ _ _ Z_ _ _ ;
M 500 ; Insertion
M 500 ; Insertion
N202 X_ _ _ Z_ _ _ ;
N103 X_ _ _ Z_ _ _ ;
N203 X_ _ _ Z_ _ _ ;
.
.
(b) Opposite to (a), when the turret 2 is prior to 1, the waiting M code
is automatically inserted before the N102 block and next to the
N202 block.
Program for the turret 1
Program for the turret 2
.
.
.
.
N101 X_ _ _ Z_ _ _ ;
N201 X_ _ _ Z_ _ _ ;
M 500 ; Insertion
N202 X_ _ _ Z_ _ _ ;
N102 X_ _ _ Z_ _ _ ;
M 500 ; Insertion
N103 X_ _ _ Z_ _ _ ;
N203 X_ _ _ Z_ _ _ ;
.
.
The interference occurs at once as this, M code is automatically
inserted. However, NC operation cannot be continued. At the time
of when M code is inserted, the program is rewound automatically
and executes from the lead again.
200
B61804E2/05
PROGRAMMING AND
OPERATION BY SYMBOLIC FAPT
Fig. 6.1 (c)
PROGRAMMING AND
OPERATION BY SYMBOLIC FAPT
B61804E2/05
202
B61804E2/05
6.2
OPERATION
PROGRAMMING AND
OPERATION BY SYMBOLIC FAPT
(1) Confirm the setting of the parameter of the auto collision avoidance
function correctly.
(2) Make or read the program to be checked.
(3) Set the memory mode.
(This function is not used by the manual mode, by the automatic mode
except the memory mode. Set the memory mode without fail.)
(4) Suit the operating condition to the real processing as possible.
However, make machine lock signal turning.
(5) Display the screen of animated simulation press the software key
(ACA ON/OFF) and make the state of Turning of ACA.
(6) Press the soft key CHECK START.
(7) Simulation of the real processing is started by turn on/turn off of the
cycle start signal.
(8) If the interference of the tools occurs, it works by the setting of the
system parameter in the following.
1 When No.710 is 0, the question of the priority turret is displayed
in the screen. Input 1 or 2.
2 When the No.710 is 1 or 2, the turret which is set is treated as the
priority turret.
(9) The waiting M code is inserted automatically to a desired position if
the priority turret is decided.
(10) In the case that the system parameter No.704#2 is 0, the beginning of
the program is executed again.
In the case that the system parameter No.704#2 is 1, the program is
rewound and performed.
203
PROGRAMMING AND
OPERATION BY SYMBOLIC FAPT
6.3
SYSTEM
PARAMETER
B61804E2/05
204
B61804E2/05
PROGRAMMING AND
OPERATION BY SYMBOLIC FAPT
6.4
NOTES
NOTE
1 During executing undermentioned NC program, this
function does not work correctly.
(1)Continuous thread cutting
(2)Multiple repetitive cannot cycle
(3)Balanced cutting
(4)Highspeed machining
(5)Macro statement
(6)Subprogram
If the interference occurs when (1) (4) is being executed,
the waiting M code is inserted near of that block
unconditionally.
If it occurs when (5), (6) is being executed, it becomes the
error as described at item 6.1 (3) (b).
2 At the time of the occurrence of the interference, the
resetting signal is output from NC side.
3 After CHECK START of the soft key is pressed, the soft
key of ACA ON/OFF is invalid. Press the software key of
ACA ON/OFF after ORIGINAL if alter the state from
ACA ON to ACA OFF after CHECK START is pressed
or are oppsite state of that.
4 If any interference already occurs at the time of the press of
CHECK START of the soft key, this function is invalid.
5 If animation drawing was discontinued by pressing
ORIGINAL of the soft key etc. in FAPT screen after the
cycle start, this function is ended at atheat time. However,
the memory operation is continued.
6 If the interference except tool 1 and tool 2 occurs, this
function is ended at that time. However, the memory
operation is continued.
7 When the operator specifies the priority turret, specify the
same side turret in the program which the interference
occurs around the same place. If not, there is the possibility
that the program is not edited correctly.
8 The program of the same program number can not be
executed by both turrets. The interference of the tools with
each other occurs if executed, but the waiting M code is not
inserted.
205
B61804E2/05
MEMORY COMPOSITION
209
1. MEMORY COMPOSITION
1. MEMORY COMPOSITION
B61804E2/05
1.1
MAIN MEMORY AND
SUBMEMORY
The external input/output device means the Handy File, for instance.
The term input/output (registering, calling) of files is used with
reference to the main memory. Namely, input of *** (registering)
means the input from submemories or external I/O device to the main
memory. Output of *** (calling) means the output from the main
memory to the submemory or the external I/O device.
Data cannot be directly be transferred among an submemory or an
external I/O Device. For example, to enter data of the external I/O device
to the submemory, data must pass through the main memory. Work of this
type can be done as follows:
(1) Input (call data of the external I/O device to the system memory.
(2) Output (Register) the data from the system memory to the file area.
1.1.1
Submemory
1) System area
2) File area
In the system area, system parameters, machine tool files (MTF) setting
data, tool data and animation drawing data resident. The file area can be
used freely by the user to store some files, such as family program,
material file, tooling file, and sub cycle file.
Since the contents of the submemory are retained even when the power
is off, they can be input (called) to the main memory immediately after
the power is turned on.
210
B61804E2/05
1. MEMORY COMPOSITION
1.1.2
Main Memory
Multiple family programs, material files, and sub cycle files can be
written and stored in the file area.
If specific file names are set in the following system parameters, they are
loaded from the file area to main memory automatically when the power
is turned on:
System parameter No.16: Material data file name
System parameter No.17: Tooling information file name
System parameter No.770: Sub cycle file name
211
1. MEMORY COMPOSITION
1.2
B61804E2/05
The family program, material data, and tooling information and sub cycle
file can be stored with file names in the submemory. The name of the file
stored can be displayed on the CRT or a file can be deleted by the operation
described below.
DISPLAY OF
SUBMEMORY FILE
NAME AND FILE
DELETION
Initial screen
Press [FAMILY
PROGRAM] key.
** FAMILY PROGRAM **
Menu screen
** PARAMETER&DATASET **
Menu screen
File to be deleted?
NO
YES
Search number
by [CURSOR ]
or [CURSOR ]
DEL
several times.
INPUT
YES (delete)
Delete that file really?
INPUT
212
INPUT
B61804E2/05
1.3
ADDITIONAL
PARAMETER OF
SUBMEMORY
1.4
NO. OF FILES
REGISTERABLE IN
SUBMEMORY
1. MEMORY COMPOSITION
213
2. INPUT/OUTPUT AND
COLLATION OF DATA
B61804E2/05
CAUTION
Before operating the machine, thoroughly check the
entered commands on the screen. Operating the machine
using an invalid command may result in a loss of data.
214
B61804E2/05
2. INPUT/OUTPUT AND
COLLATION OF DATA
2.1
INPUT/OUTPUT WITH
SUBMEMORY
2.1.1
System Parameter,
MTF, Setting Data
2.1.2
Family Program,
Material Data, Tooling
Information Sub Cycle
File
INPUT
215
2. INPUT/OUTPUT AND
COLLATION OF DATA
B61804E2/05
INPUT
or 4, C
(Photo A)
INPUT
INPUT
. (Photo B)
INPUT
1, R, @ File name
INPUT
INPUT
1, @ File name
216
INPUT
B61804E2/05
2. INPUT/OUTPUT AND
COLLATION OF DATA
NOTE
1 Submemory or memory cassettes are used for storage of
the family program, material file and tooling file, sub cycle
file. Use of the submemory or the memory cassette can be
designated with system parameter No.0015.
System parametre
0015
7
0
6
0
5
0
3
0
2
0
1
0
Output device
0: External I/O device
1: File area
Input device
0: External
I/O device
1: File area
INPUT
and 0
INPUT
with the searched file name or when not performing it for this
question, respectively.
217
2. INPUT/OUTPUT AND
COLLATION OF DATA
B61804E2/05
218
B61804E2/05
2. INPUT/OUTPUT AND
COLLATION OF DATA
NOTE
1 When a figure is defined, the warning message WARNING
CHECK INPUT DATA may be displayed. If this message
appears turn off the power, then turn on the power again
while holding down the I key.
This warning message is generated when approximately 50
elements are entered successively in incremental mode.
2 When a software edition has been upgraded, turn on the
power while holding down the I key.
3 When the power is turned on, the system reads family data,
then loads specific files automatically.
This means that the automatically loaded data takes
precedence over the other data.
4 When the power is turned on, the system reads family data,
then system parameters.
If the program contents differ from the system parameter
settings, care must be taken. For example, if the initial
values for the drawing format and part direction specified in
the program are different from the values of the
corresponding system parameter Nos.200 and 240,
respectively, the original system parameter values are used
immediately after the power is turned on.
5 Immediately after the power is turned on, the priority of the
common data varies depending on bit 0 of system
parameter No.708.
2.1.3
File Protection
EF WRITING. KEY IN OK OR NO
EF = OK <, REP>, @FILE NAME
EF =
(1: OK 0: NO R: REP)
219
2. INPUT/OUTPUT AND
COLLATION OF DATA
B61804E2/05
B61804E2/05
2. INPUT/OUTPUT AND
COLLATION OF DATA
To cancel the deletion of the file, just enter (INPUT). Then, the
previous submemory file directory screen is redisplayed.
If an incorrect password is entered, the deletion is canceled, and the
previous submemory file directory screen is redisplayed.
If the correct password is entered, the file is deleted.
5. Replacing a protected file
(1) When replacement is specified, the following message apperas:
REPLACE OK? [file name searched for] (1: OK 0: NO)
REP = _
Enter 1 (INPUT). Then, the file is replaced with the data in main
memory.
(2) If the file to be replaced is protected, the following message
appears:
THIS FILE IS PROTECTED
IF YOU WANT TO REPLACE THIS FILE, KEY IN PASSWORD
PLEASE
PW = _
Enter the threedigit number set in system parameter No.739 (123
in the example 1.).
To cancel the replacement, just enter (INPUT). Then, the previous
submemory input/output screen is redisplayed.
If an incorrect password is entered, the replacement is canceled,
and the previous submemory input/output screen is redisplayed.
If the correct password is entered, the file is replaced.
NOTE
1 If the auxiliary operation, SUBMEMORY INITIALIZATION,
is executed, all files including protected files are deleted.
2 If no password is defined (system parameter No.739) or if
the password does not consist of three digits, protected files
cannot be deleted.
221
2. INPUT/OUTPUT AND
COLLATION OF DATA
2.1.4
Function For
Automatically
Registering
Parameters and Data in
Submemory
B61804E2/05
System parameters, MTF data, and setting data read from an external
storage device can be registered in submemory, without having to press
the [REGST.] soft key on each setting screen.
For example, in case that calling a system parameter from the FANUC
Floppy Cassette adapter.
(1) 3, B, S
(INPUT)
222
B61804E2/05
2. INPUT/OUTPUT AND
COLLATION OF DATA
2.2
COLLATION AND
INPUT/OUTPUT WITH
FLOPPY CASSETTE
2.2.1
System Parameter,
MTF, Tool Data, Setting
Data, Drawing Data
INPUT
For example, when inputting (calling) system parameter from the floppy
cassette or the Handy File, key in,
No. = 3, B
INPUT
When outputting MTF to the floppy cassette or the handy file, key in,
No. = 6, B
INPUT
223
2. INPUT/OUTPUT AND
COLLATION OF DATA
1, I
INPUT
B61804E2/05
INPUT
or 1, A
INPUT
1, @ n
INPUT
(a) 1, I
(b) 1
INPUT
INPUT
or 1, A
INPUT
(c) 1, @ n
INPUT
INPUT
B61804E2/05
NL
1, @ n
1, N
2. INPUT/OUTPUT AND
COLLATION OF DATA
NL
NL
2.2.2
Family Program,
Material Data, Tooling
Information, Sub Cycle
File
2.2.3
Handling of Floppy
Cassette and Adapter
INPUT
More than one file can be stored on one cassette volume, and a single
file can extend over more than one cassette, as shown in the above
figure.
225
2. INPUT/OUTPUT AND
COLLATION OF DATA
B61804E2/05
226
2. INPUT/OUTPUT AND
COLLATION OF DATA
B61804E2/05
2.3
10
11
Baud rate
50
100
110
150
200
300
600
1200
2400
4800
9600
DC code is used.
DC code is used.
No DC code is used.
No DC code is used.
NOTE
1 In FANUC units, DC code is always used. In other than
FANUC units, DC code cannot be used.
2 When inputting and outputting various data, using I/O
devices other than a FANUC unit, key in , P INPUT.
Example:
When outputting a family program:
When the system asks No. = 0 on the family program I/O screen, key
in as follows:
NO. = 1. P
INPUT
When the baud rate and stop bit setting are not adequate, the baud rate,
stop bit value and the use of DC code are set automatically to the
following values. The preset value on the CRT display screen remains
unchanged.
Baud rate= 4800 bauds
Stop bit = 2 bits
DC code = Used
NOTE
1 The NC control side is also provided with an Interface No.
and a parameter for setting the baud rate and stop bit, but
since NC control and FAPT control are of independent
processing, it is not necessary to set these values to the
same level in particular. However, when using the same
interface number part for both NC data I/O and FAPT data
I/O, using the same equipment, set the same value for baud
rate and stop bit.
2 NC data I/O and FAPT data I/O cannot be executed at the
same time.
227
2. INPUT/OUTPUT AND
COLLATION OF DATA
2.4
REGISTRATION OF
FILE NAME ONTO
FLOPPY CASSETTE,
HANDY FILE
(OPTION)
B61804E2/05
(1) Method
1) When outputting data onto a floppy cassette it is normal to respond
to the question NO = by inputting a numeral followed by B.
When naming a file, however, F should be entered in place of
B.
(Example)
In order to output a system parameter with a file name key in:
NO = 2, F
2) Responses to the following questions remain unchanged:
SET BC, AND KEY IN OK OR NO.
BC = OK <, INT OR ADD OR @ FILE NO.>
BC = (1:OK, 0:NO, I:INT, A:ADD)
3) Now specify file name
STANDARD FILE NAME: FAPTSYS.PARAM.
KEY IN THE FILE NAME.
PRESS INPUT KEY ONLY, IF YOU ACCEPT STANDARD
FILE NAME
FILE NAME = _
The following files names will first be displayed automatically
depending on the data to be output:
a) System parameter . . . . . FAPTSYS.PARAM.
b) MTF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FAPTMTF
c) Setting data . . . . . . . . . . FAPTSETTING
d) Tool data . . . . . . . . . . . . FAPTTOOL
e) Graphic data . . . . . . . . . FAPTGRAPHIC
f) Family program . . . . . . FAPTFAMILY
g) Material data . . . . . . . . FAPTMATERIAL
h) Sub cycle file . . . . . . . . FAPTSUB.CYCLE
i) Tooling information . . . FAPTTOOLING
If the standard file name is acceptable then press the INPUT key.
If you wish to register an alternative file name then specify your
preferred name up to a maximum of 17 characters. @ cannot be
used in a file name.
(2) Method of displaying file names
Refer to OPERATORS MANUAL for CNC 15T or 16T.
(3) File input
When reading in a file which has been output in this way the correct
response to the question BC = is to key in a numeral and then B
as before.
(4) Limitations
1) Two files with the same name cannot be registered on the same
cassette.
2) When specifying a file name:
a) If 18 or more characters are keyed in, only the first 17 characters
of the name specified will be registered as the file name.
b) If @ is used for part or all of a file name then the error message
key in again will be displayed on the monitor screen.
Since File name = has not yet disappeared from the screen it
is still possible to specify and register a correct file name.
228
2. INPUT/OUTPUT AND
COLLATION OF DATA
B61804E2/05
2.5
Tooling information and material data can be punched out from the
external equipment in a specific format using ISO/EIA code. In addition,
data which is created on the computer beforehand can be read.
This function cannot be used for 5700 series of 16T CAPII.
FILE DATA
INPUT/OUTPUT
FUNCTION
NOTE
With the 16T CAP II, EIA code cannot be input/output.
2.5.1
(1) The file data input/output function is enabled only when bit 4 of
system parameter No.708 is on.
Parameter
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
708
Bit 4 0 : Tooling information and material data are input/output in binary form
(conventional specification).
1: Tooling information and material data are input/output using the ISO
or EIA code (new specification).
(2) Whether the ISO code or EIA code is used depends on the setting in
system parameter No.1.
NOTE
In the 16T CAP II, the ISO code is always set for
input/output.
2.5.2
Screen
The conventional screen display for input/outout has not been changed.
If bit 4 of system parameter No.708 is 1, however, a comment is added
as follows:
Initial screen
DATA
SET
For example, to punch material data on the external equipment, enter the
following in response to NO =:
NO = 4, B (For the floppy cassette or handy file), or
NO = 4, P (for PPR or input/output equipment manufactured by
someone other than FANUC)
229
2. INPUT/OUTPUT AND
COLLATION OF DATA
2.5.3
Input/Output Data
Format
B61804E2/05
(same as above)
230
B61804E2/05
2. INPUT/OUTPUT AND
COLLATION OF DATA
2.5.4
File Name Registration
in the Floppy Cassette
or Handy File
231
B61804E2/05
1. MATERIAL DATA
MATERIAL DATA
WARNING
Material data, described below, varies with the machine.
For details, refer to the manual provided by the machine tool
builder. If material data values are not set appropriately for
the actual machine being used, correct NC data cannot be
prepared. Machining with incorrect NC data may cause
damage to the tool and/or machine, or injury to the user may
result.
235
1. MATERIAL DATA
1.1
When the power supply was input, 17 kinds of materials and machining
conditions, which are being preset in the system, are loaded together, so
that the machining conditions are automatically determined by specifying
materials.
However, it may be desiredto store additional machining conditions
according to the circumstances of works, machines, and machining
methods.
In such a case, the entire data on all 17 kinds of materials and machining
conditions can be named collectively and registered into an external file.
This file is called material file.
Since this material file can store many files, various machining conditions
data can be called simply by specifying the name of required material file.
Preparation of material files results in the accumulation of know how
data.
MATERIAL DATA
AND MATERIAL FILE
236
B61804E2/05
B61804E2/05
1.2
1. MATERIAL DATA
Cutting
speed
Feed rate
Cutting
depth
F1 F2 F3 F4
CENTER DRILLING
DRILLING
REAMING
TAPPING
ROUGH FACING
ROUGHING OF OUTER FIGURE
ROUGHING OF INNER FIGURE
SEMIFINISHING FACING
SEMIFINISHING OF OUTER FIGURE
SEMIFINISHING OF INNER FIGURE
FINISHING FACING
FINISHING OF OUTER FIGURE
FINISHING OF INNER FIGURE
GROOVING FACING
GROOVING OF OUTER FIGURE
GROOVING OF INNER FIGURE
THREADING FACING
THREADING OF OUTER FIGURE
THREADING OF INNER FIGURE
D
D
(2 kinds)
Division
CUT OFF
Division
Cutting
speed
FR (Diameter
direction)
FT (Axis
direction)
Center drill
Drill
Tap
(*) Set the feed amount per one blade in case of end mill.
3) Cutting condition with the carbide tool in milling machining.
It is the same as (2).
CAUTION
The increment system of the cutting speed is m/min or
feet/min.
The increment system of the feed rate is mm/rev or inch/rev.
The increment system of the infeed amount is mm or inch.
237
1. MATERIAL DATA
B61804E2/05
1.3
OPERATION
METHOD
1.3.1
Method of Registration
Initial screen
DATA
SET
=0= PARAMETER & DATA SET =0=
Menu screen
3 INPUT
SAMPLE OF MATERIAL
S45C
SCM
FC
AL
SUS
Directory of registered
material name
or CURSOR
End
NEXT PAGE
End
(3) Cutting condition page with high speed tool for Caxis
machining
BACK PAGE
End
NEXT PAGE
NEXT PAGE
NOTE
Material name shall be within 10 characters. If a material name is already registered at the
position shown by the cursor, the material name newly input is inserted to the cursor position.
Then the material name at the cursor position or subsequent shifts lower one by one.
238
B61804E2/05
1.3.2
Modification method of the material data is almost the same as the method
of the registration. It is possible to do by the next procedure.
Method of Modification
1. MATERIAL DATA
The page can be selected from (1), (2), (3), (4) to (1) of the next material
when NEXT PAGE is pushed. The page can be selected for (4), (3), (2),
(1) to (4) of the pressed, the same page of the next material can be selected.
When the LAST MATERIAL is pressed, the same page of the previous
material is selected.
239
1. MATERIAL DATA
1.3.3
The deletion method of the material data is almost the same as registration
and modification. Only input DEL INPUT in place of entering new
name or pressing DATA SET.
Method of Deletion
240
B61804E2/05
B61804E2/05
1. MATERIAL DATA
1.4
INPUT/OUTPUT OF
MATERIAL DATA
1.5
NOTES ON
MATERIAL FILES
(1) When the power is turned off after data is modified, the data is erased.
So before turning off the power, be sure to register the data in
submemory.
(2) To perform automatic loading of a material file, set the name of the file
in system parameter No.16.
241
242
B61804E2/05
B61804E2/05
2.1
Tool data corresponds to the tool ledger. All the information about tools
is registered in it. Only 1 tool data is held in the submemory (involatile
memory).
As the tool data, it is possible to store tool configuration data and setting
data for copying to the tooling information and each tool is assigned the
tool management number (ID). Up to 200 turning tools and up to 100
milling tools are registerable.
Tooling information specifies at which position of the turret and in
which manner to set the tool according to the working process to be
executed. Registration of the tool from tool data to tooling information
is called tooling. The tooling information is held as part of the family
program.
At the beginning of the tooling information is the tool selection number
(TN) implying the turret position. And the tool management number
(ID), setting data, etc. are stored. It is possible to register tools of the same
tool management number (ID) at the positions of more than 1 tool
selection numbers (TN).
In the Symbolic FAPT execution, the working program is created based
on the setting data registered in the tooling information.
TOOL DATA,
TOOLING
INFORMATION
B61804E2/05
2.2
TOOL DATA DISPLAY
AND SETTING
WARNING
The tool data, described below, varies with the machine.
For details, refer to the manual provided by the machine tool
builder. If tool data values are not set appropriately for the
actual machine being used, correct NC data cannot be
prepared. Machining with incorrect NC data may result in
the tool colliding with the workpiece, or forced machining
occurring, possibly causing damage to the machine and/or
tool itself, or injury to the user.
1) Press the DATA SET soft key on the initial screen. The parameter
and data setting menu screen will be displayed.
2) NO = will be prompted, so key in 1, INPUT, and the system data
setting menu screen will be displayed.
3) NO = will be prompted, so key in 9, INPUT, and the tool data
list screen will be displayed.
On the tool data list screen, the tool management number and the tool type
are shown per list number.
Meaning of Soft Keys
MILLING TOOL . . . . . . The milling tool list screen is displayed.
SEARCH NO . . . . . . . . . Used to search for a list number.
In response to the prompt NO = in the
lower part of the screen, input the value of
the list number of the tool to be searched for
and then press SEARCH NO, and the
cursor will move to that number.
DATA SET . . . . . . . . . . . The tool data detail setting screen is
displayed.
CURSOR . . . . . . . . . . . The cursor indicating the list number
CURSOR
moves up/down.
END . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Press to end the setting. The system data
setting screen is returned to.
Press the SET DATA soft key. Then, the tool data detail setting screen
appears.
244
B61804E2/05
On the tool data detail setting screen, tool configuration data and setting
data prompts are displayed.
Also an automatic process decision function data (KP) prompt is
displayed.
The tool figure is not displayed for 5700 series of 16T CAP II.
(1) Turning tools
245
B61804E2/05
Animationdrawing function
prompt
CAUTION
The setting angle (AS) follows the system parameter No.200
drawing format.
INPUT
B61804E2/05
247
2.3
INPUT/OUTPUT AND
COLLATION OF TOOL
DATA
B61804E2/05
As mentioned in the previous section, the tool data can be set and
corrected via the MDI & CRT keys. They can also be input/output or
collated with the floppy cassette or FA card.
(Operation)
Initial screen
DATA
SET
... PARAMETER & DATA SET
Menu screen
INPUT
Output
10, B
INPUT
13.
14.
15.
16.
0.
END
Input
11, B
INPUT
or
10, F
INPUT
248
Collation
12, B
INPUT
B61804E2/05
2.3.1
Tool Data Input/Output
Format
(Turning tools)
NDDDP__ ; tool management number
NDDDP__ ; tool type
NDDDP__ ; tool tip radius/pitch
NDDDP__ ; cutter angle
NDDDP__ ; tool tip angle
NDDDP__ ; tool tip width or drill diameter/tool diameter
NDDDP__ ; virtual tool tip position (Zaxis)/biting length
NDDDP__ ; virtual tool tip position (Xaxis)/cutter length
NDDDP__ ; setting angle
NDDDP__ ; setting position (Zaxis)
NDDDP__ ; setting position (Xaxis)
NDDDP__ ; cutter protective angle
NDDDP ;
NDDDP ;
NDDDP__ ; working process type 1
NDDDP__ ; working process type 1
NDDDP__ ; working process type 1
NDDDP__ ; tool information
NDDDP__ ; holder number
(ID)
(TP)
(RN/PT)
(AC)
(AN)
(WN/DD/DT)
(ZN/LE)
(XN/LT)
(AS)
(ZS)
(XS)
(AP)
(KP1)
(KP2)
(KP3)
(FLAG)
(HL)
#6
#5
#4
249
#3
#2
#1
#0
B61804E2/05
(Turning tools)
NDDDP__ ; tool management number
NDDDP__ ; tool type
NDDDP__ ; cutting diameter
NDDDP__ ; cutter length
NDDDP__ ; tool tip angle
NDDDP__ ; tool diameter
NDDDP__ ; biting length
NDDDP__ ; pitch
NDDDP__ ; setting position (Yaxis)
NDDDP__ ; setting position (Zaxis)
NDDDP__ ; setting position (Xaxis)
NDDDP__ ; number of tools
NDDDP__ ; tool material
NDDDP__ ;
NDDDP__ ;
NDDDP__ ;
NDDDP__ ;
NDDDP__ ;
NDDDP__ ;
NDDDP__ ;
NDDDP__ ; holder number
NDDDP__ ; tool information 2
(ID)
(TP)
(DS)
(LT)
(AT)
(DT)
(LE)
(PT)
(YS)
(ZS)
(XS)
(NT)
(MT)
(HL)
(FLAG2)
#6
#5
#4
250
#3
#2
#1
#0
B61804E2/05
2.4
TOOLING
INFORMATION
DISPLAY AND
SETTING
WARNING
After setting tooling information, check the data relating to
the actual tool number, tool offset number, and tool figure.
Failure to set correct tooling information may result in the
tool colliding with the workpiece and/or machine, or forced
machining occurring, possibly causing damage to the
machine and/or tool itself, or injury to the user.
1) Press the DATA SET soft key on the initial screen. The parameter
and data setting menu screen will be displayed.
2) NO = will be prompted, so key in 6, INPUT, and the tooling
information list screen will be displayed.
On the tooling information list screen, such typical setting data as the tool
management number (ID), the tool type (TP), the setting angle (AS) (the
setting direction (CP) if the milling tool), the setting position (XS, ZS),
the tool rotating direction (SD/TR), the holder number (HL), etc. is
displayed per tool selection number (TN) and it is possible to change data.
If the tool management number (ID) is input in response to ID =, the tool
registered in the tool data is tooled. Setting data is copied from the tool
data. As the tool offset number (TM), the same number as the tool
selection number (TN) is automatically set.
If the input tool management number (ID) is not registered in the tool data,
n message This ID is not registered in tool data. is displayed.
It is also possible to set/correct other data by moving the cursor.
Meaning of Soft Keys
DATA SET . . . . . . . . . . . Used to display the detailed data setting
screen for the tool indicated by the cursor.
DELETE . . . . . . . . . . . . Used to delete the tool management number
(ID) indicated by the cursor from the
tooling information.
PAGE PAGE . . . . . Displays the next page or previous page.
TN NUMBER X . . . . . . The cursor moves the tool management
TN NUMBER Y
number (ID) up/down.
251
B61804E2/05
If the tool management number (ID) is input, the tool registered in the tool
data is tooled and tool configuration data and setting data are set.
The tool figure as shown below is not displayed for 5700 series of 16T
CAP II.
(1) Turning Tools
(Center drill)
Tool type
Tool tip angle
Drill diameter
252
B61804E2/05
(Drill)
Tool type
Tool tip angle
Drill diameter
(Reamer)
Tool type
Tool diameter
Cutter length
Biting length
(Tap)
Tool type
Tool diameter
Cutter length
Biting length
Pitch
(Groove/Neck)
Tool type
Tool tip radius
Cutter angle
Tool tip angle
Tool tip width
Virtual tool tip position
(Thread)
Tool type
Cutter angle
Tool tip angle
Virtual tool tip position
(General)
Tool type
Tool tip radius
Cutter angle
Tool tip angle
Cutter protective angle
Virtual tool tip position
(Finger)
Tool type
Virtual tool tip position
253
TP; drill
AN;
DD;
TP; reamer
DT;
LT;
LE;
TP; tap
DT;
LT;
LE;
PT;
TP; grooving/necking
RN;
AC;
AN;
WN;
XN;
ZN;
TP; thread
AC;
AN;
XN;
ZN;
TP; general
RN;
AC;
AN;
AP;
XN;
ZN;
TP; finger
XN;
B61804E2/05
NOTE
The holder number (HL) prompt is displayed if the optional
animationdrawing function is available.
Tool figure of reamer tool, tap tool
254
B61804E2/05
2.5
INITIALIZATION OF
TOOLING
INFORMATION
When the [
] soft key at the right on the tooling information list screen
is pressed, the following soft keys are displayed:
When the ALL DELETE soft key is pressed, the system prompts the
user to confirm whether the data is to be deleted.
255
B61804E2/05
2.6
TOOL FIGURE DATA
AND SETTING
METHOD
2.6.1
General Lathe Setting
Method
256
B61804E2/05
257
258
B61804E2/05
B61804E2/05
259
260
B61804E2/05
B61804E2/05
CAUTION
For the button tool, as shown in the example below, specify
a sufficiently smaller nose angle.
CAUTION
The display is made up to the second place past the decimal
point.
261
B61804E2/05
262
B61804E2/05
263
264
B61804E2/05
B61804E2/05
265
266
B61804E2/05
B61804E2/05
CAUTION
For the figure of a button tool, specify its tool nose angle,
sufficiently small as shown in the following examples.
CAUTION
Display is done down to two places of decimals.
267
B61804E2/05
268
B61804E2/05
2.6.2
269
270
B61804E2/05
B61804E2/05
271
272
B61804E2/05
B61804E2/05
273
274
B61804E2/05
B61804E2/05
CAUTION
For the figure of a button tool, specify its tool nose angle,
sufficiently small as shown in the following examples.
275
CAUTION
Display is done down to two places of decimals.
276
B61804E2/05
B61804E2/05
277
B61804E2/05
278
B61804E2/05
Facing
Facing
279
OD threading
OD threading (reverse)
280
B61804E2/05
B61804E2/05
ID cutting
ID grooving
281
ID threading
ID threading (reverse)
282
B61804E2/05
B61804E2/05
ID facing (reverse)
Grooving
283
Threading
B61804E2/05
Threading (reverse)
CAUTION
For the figure of a button tool, specify its tool nose angle
sufficiently small as show in the following examples.
CAUTION
Display is done down to two places of decimals.
284
B61804E2/05
285
3. SETTING DATA,
SYSTEM PARAMETER, MTF
B61804E2/05
WARNING
System parameters, setting data, and the MTF data,
described below, vary with the machine. For details, refer
to the manual provided by the machine tool builder. If these
data values are not set appropriately for the actual machine
being used, correct NC data cannot be prepared.
Machining with incorrect NC data may result in the tool
colliding with the workpiece, or forced machining occurring,
possibly causing damage to the machine and/or tool itself,
or injury to the user.
286
3. SETTING DATA,
SYSTEM PARAMETER, MTF
B61804E2/05
3.1
(1) Press the DATA SET soft key on the initial screen. The screen of
parameter and data setting will appear.
(2) To the question, NO. = , key in,
DISPLAY AND
SETTING
NO. = 2
INPUT
INPUT
in this screen.
(3) The screen will change, and another NO. = will be questioned, so
key in,
NO. = 1
INPUT
(System parameter)
NO. = 5
INPUT
(MTF)
or
and the screen with a list of system parameter or MTF will appear.
(Function of the soft keys)
[CURSOR ] [CURSOR ] . . The cursor proceeds or retreats.
[SEARCH NO.] . . . . Used to select the setting number.
Key in the searching number and press this soft
key without pressing INPUT, to the question, and
the cursor moves to the number of the input
number.
If INPUT is pressed then, the data will be replaced.
[END] . . . . . . . . . . . Pressed when all setting has ended.
[SAVE END] . . . . . . Press SAVE END to save the data in the
submemory.
287
3. SETTING DATA,
SYSTEM PARAMETER, MTF
3.2
OUTPUT/INPUT AND
COLLATION
288
B61804E2/05
B61804E2/05
3. SETTING DATA,
SYSTEM PARAMETER, MTF
3.3
FORMAT OF
PARAMETER TAPE
(1) Punch %, LF for the ISO code or ER, CR for the EIA code at the
beginning of the tape.
(2) After the End of Block code (LF for ISO code, CR for EIA code),
designate address N followed by a data number within 4 digits.
(3) Punch the data to be set following address P. The data must, of course,
correspond to the parameter number punched with address N.
When many pieces of data are set for machine tool file parameter,
divide the data by ,.
Example: N2000 P0300, 0104, ...
(4) Punch the End of Block code.
Repeat (b), (c) and (d) as required. The head of one block must be the
data number following address N.
(5) Finally, punch LF, % for the ISO code or CR, ER, for the EIA code.
When this code is read, data input from the tape is finished.
Parameters undesignated on the tape do not change even when the
parameter setting tape is read.
289
3. SETTING DATA,
SYSTEM PARAMETER, MTF
3.4
ERROR DISPLAY
MESSAGE
B61804E2/05
NOTE
When a data format error or the collate error occurs, the
system stops as shown above. Press the software key
END to interrupt processing, and the software key
CONTINUE to continue processing.
When a data format error occurs, the corresponding block
is ignored.
(3) TV error
After reading a tape completely, the following error is displayed if
there is TV error on that tape.
TV ERROR INCLUDING
290
B61804E2/05
AUXILIARY JOBS
Press the AUXILIARY soft key in the initial screen, and the following
special process is performed.
(1) Submemory initialization
(2) Conversion of unit systems
(3) Changing the number of registered tools
113
1. SUBMEMORY INITIALIZATION
AUXILIARY JOBS
B61804E2/05
SUBMEMORY INITIALIZATION
114
B61804E2/05
AUXILIARY JOBS
WARNING
When the system of units is changed, the system
parameters and MTF data may also be changed. If these
data values are not set appropriately for the actual machine
being used, correct NC data cannot be prepared.
Machining with incorrect NC data may result in the tool
colliding with the workpiece, or forced machining occurring,
possibly causing damage to the machine and/or tool itself,
or injury to the user.
In Symbolic FAPT, the input data unit is coincide with the output NC tape
unit. If a blank dimension or a parts figure was input in the mm unit, for
example, all other data should be input in the mm unit. Also, an NC tape
is output in the mm unit.
However, if a drawing is written in the inch unit and employed in a mm
system machine tool, you can prepare an inch unit NC tape by the
Symbolic FAPT function and operate the machine tool by the inch/metric
conversion function of the NC machine tool.
When the metric system is converted to the inch system or the opposite
conversion is done, answer to request of REQUEST = as follows.
REQUEST = UNIT _T _M INPUT
The command in can be omitted.
1) REQUEST = UNIT INPUT
When entering like the abovementioned, the unit system of
system parameter and MTF changes.
(As the present
specification).
For details, see (e) in (2) Notes on conversion of unit.
2) REQUEST = UNIT_T INPUT
When entering like the abovementioned, as the system supposes
that the unit system of the current tooling information is different
from the current unit system, it is converted to the current unit
system.
3) REQUEST = UNIT_M INPUT
When entering like the abovementioned, as the system supposes
that the unit system of the current material data is different from the
current unit system, it is converted to the current unit system.
4) REQUEST = UNIT_T_M INPUT
When entering like the abovementioned, tooling information and
material data are converted.
115
AUXILIARY JOBS
B61804E2/05
Drill diameter
Fixing position
DD
XS
ZS
(mm) (inch)
(mm) (inch)
(mm) (inch)
RN
XN
ZN
WN
XS
ZS
(mm)
(mm)
(mm)
(mm)
(mm)
(mm)
(inch)
(inch)
(inch)
(inch)
(inch)
(inch)
DT
DS
LT
LE
PT
XS
ZS
(mm)
(mm)
(mm)
(mm)
(mm)
(mm)
(mm)
(inch)
(inch)
(inch)
(inch)
(inch)
(inch)
(inch)
Nose radius
Imaginary tool nose position
3.
4.
Center drill
2.
Drill
3.
4.
Semifinish
116
(m/min) (feet/min)
(mm/rev) (inch/rev)
(mm/rev) (inch/rev)
(mm/rev) (inch/rev)
(mm)
(inch)
B61804E2/05
AUXILIARY JOBS
(m/min) (feet/min)
(mm/rev) (inch/rev)
(mm/rev) (inch/rev)
(mm/rev) (inch/rev)
(mm/rev) (inch/rev)
5.
Finish
Cutting speed
Feed amount 1
Feed amount 2
Feed amount 3
Feed amount 4
6.
Grooving
7.
Threading
Center drill
Cutting speed
Feed amount FT
(m/min) (feet/min)
(mm/rev) (inch/rev)
2.
Drill
Cutting speed
Feed amount FT
(m/min) (feet/min)
(mm/rev) (inch/rev)
3.
4.
Tap
End mill
Cutting speed
Cutting speed
Feed amount FR
Feed amount FT
(m/min) (feet/min)
(m/min) (feet/min)
(mm/rev) (inch/rev)
(mm/rev) (inch/rev)
AUXILIARY JOBS
B61804E2/05
(e) To convert the input units of the system parameters and MTF
parameters, select the special data for metric input or inch input in
submemory.
118
B61804E2/05
AUXILIARY JOBS
119
AUXILIARY JOBS
B61804E2/05
120
B61804E2/05
AUXILIARY JOBS
When the Caxis option or Yaxis option is provided, the ratio of the
registered number of turning tools to milling tools can be changed.
(1) Changing the number of tools
In response to REQUEST =, enter TFING INPUT.
Then, enter the ratio of turning tools to Caxis tools. The current ratio
is displayed. To leave it unchanged, enter 0. In response to
EXECUTION =, enter a value from 0 to 4. (If only INPUT is
entered, the system does not accept it.)
INITIALIZE TOOL DATA
CURRENT TOOL MAP: 1 (200100)
EXECUTION = (1:200100 2:150150 3:100200 4:50250 0:NO)
If 0 is entered, the current setting is left unchanged.
If 1 is entered, 200 turning tools and 100 milling tools are registered (2:1).
If 2 is entered, 150 turning tools and 150 milling tools are registered (1:1).
If 3 is entered, 100 turning tools and 200 milling tools are registered (1:2).
If 4 is entered, 50 turning tools and 250 milling tools are registered (1:5).
The number of turning tools and the number of milling tools in both
main memory and submemory are initialized to the standard data of
the new ratio.
In each case above the total number of registered tools is 300.
(2) Tool data compatibility
Tool data tape punched out before the tool ratio is changed can be read
after the tool ratio is changed. In this case, however, the data for the
turning tools and milling tools is read starting at the beginning of the
respective data. So, note that some data in ignored.
Example :
When tool data is output, data for any tool is not ignored, as usual.
121
B61804E2/05
1. VARIOUS FUNCTIONS OF
Symbolic FAPT
19
1. VARIOUS FUNCTIONS OF
Symbolic FAPT
1.1
When the same data like standard surface roughness, for example, is input
in the FAPT execution process, you can preset these data and execute
FAPT, while skipping these preset pages during practical execution stage
of FAPT.
SKIP FUNCTION OF
PAGE AND
QUESTION
Vacant
(Caution 1)
B61804E2/05
Vacant
20
B61804E2/05
1. VARIOUS FUNCTIONS OF
Symbolic FAPT
CAUTION
1 This bit corresponds to the question for selecting materials,
but you cannot select the material in advance.
By setting 1 to this bit, you can skip this page while keeping
the material undefined.
2 When skipping the question of machining start position,
skipping is performed at every specified page of machining
start position.
Since the machining start point is determined by the turret
turning position and the tool mounting position, all data
about the turning position of turret and tool mounting
position must be set for skipping the page.
3 If the value of MTF parameter No.1055 (setting of turret
type) is set to 1 (Xaxis reversible lathe), the page of the
machining start point is not skipped, because the system
asks you whether you want to reverse the Xaxis sign on the
page of the machining start point in addition to the
machining start point, and you have to answer the question.
NOTE
This bit is effective if the Yaxis function is supported.
(3) Designation of skip (system parameter number 10)
It is required to input Surface roughness every time the figure
element symbol ( etc.) is input in inputting the machining figure.
This question can be skipped partly or entirely.
Description of system parameter number 10
0
0
Entire surface roughness
Vacant
Vacant
Vacant
21
1. VARIOUS FUNCTIONS OF
Symbolic FAPT
1.2
The incremental designation becomes effective for part figure data input
such as the end point of a figure element and the center of a circular arc.
The start point of the figure element must be defined in any case.
(1) Straight line
When the end point of a straight line having a definite start point is
input by the incremental value, you have only to input an increment
without any need of taking its sign into consideration, since the system
judges the arrow direction.
INCREMENTAL
DESIGNATION
B61804E2/05
(Example)
Assume that a lower rightward arrow was inserted at point A in the above
figure.
End point B is located in the minus () direction with reference to the start
point in both X and Z directions. Also, the radius value is input to X.
NOTE
It is rather troublesome to input an X value by the
incremental value in a case as shown in the above figure.
In such a case, the Z value only can be input by the
incremental value.
(2) Circular arc
The incremental value can be specified for inputting the end point and
center of the circular arc.
Unlike in a straight line, the end point direction as viewed from the
start point changes according to the length of circular arc, and its
direction cannot be determined automatically.
Accordingly, a signed numerical value must be input.
The sign is taken into consideration in the defined coordinate system.
(Example)
(Example)
Center
22
CDX
CZ
= 13I
= 17I
B61804E2/05
1. VARIOUS FUNCTIONS OF
Symbolic FAPT
23
1. VARIOUS FUNCTIONS OF
Symbolic FAPT
1.3
EXPANSION AND
CONTRACTION OF
GRAPHIC DISPLAY
1.3.1
Designation Method
B61804E2/05
The shadowed area in the left figure specified by the cursor is displayed
to meet the graphic display area (frame bounded by an dotted line in the
right figure specified on the CRT).
To restore original size, press the soft key [ORIGINAL] at the request for
expansion or contraction.
(1) Operation method
The operating method will be described, referring to the input of parts
figure (menu No.2).
(a) Depress [DRAWNG RANGE] key in the following graphic display
appearing when the entry of parts figure was completed.
24
B61804E2/05
1. VARIOUS FUNCTIONS OF
Symbolic FAPT
(b) The question appearing at the lower part of CRT is replaced with
the following expansion/contraction question.
DESIGNATE THE DRAWING RANGE
MAXX =
MAX (123.45/67.89)
MIN (0.0/0.0)
The cursor flickers at the coordinate position indicated by MAX on
the CRT concurrently with the above question.
By depressing the [CURSOR FORWRD] or [CURSOR BACK]
key, this cursor shifts in the Xaxis direction.
[CURSOR FORWRD] . . . Upward
[CURSOR BACK] . . . . . . Downward
Depress
INPUT
INPUT
key.
(d) The question at the lower part of the CRT is replaced with MINX
=, and the cursor flickers at the coordinate position indicated by
MIN. (The cursor corresponding to MAX disappears.) Determine
the Xaxis position by shifting the cursor in the same manner as in
step (b).
(e) The question is replaced with MINZ =. Determine the Zaxis
position by the same operation as in (c).
(f) The question is reset to MAXX = in (b), and the cursor flickers
at the coordinate position indicated by MAX. Shift the cursor, if
correction of the cursor position is necessary.
(g) When the [EXEC] key is depressed, the question returns to the
original NO =, and an expanded or contracted graphic display
appears in the graphic display area specified by the cursor
positions. The [EXEC] key is effective for all questions in (b) to
(e).
25
1. VARIOUS FUNCTIONS OF
Symbolic FAPT
B61804E2/05
26
B61804E2/05
1.4
NC DATA OUTPUT BY
SINGLE STEP
1. VARIOUS FUNCTIONS OF
Symbolic FAPT
1.4.1
Single Step of Block
INPUT
line as viewed from the bottom of CRT screen is output, and the
Symbolic FAPT returns to the execution to be ready for the next block.
(2) NC data can be output from the keyboard by optional blocks under this
condition. When the INPUT key only is depressed finally, the display
data in the second line as viewed from the bottom of CRT screen is
output.
(3) When
DEL
and
INPUT
deleted.
(4) Input
SP
SP,
INPUT
1. VARIOUS FUNCTIONS OF
Symbolic FAPT
1.4.2
B61804E2/05
An optional data can be entered from the keyboard in the same manner
as in the single step of block. The [PROC. ON] and [SINGLE ON] are
different from each other as specified below.
[PROC. ON] . . . Single step in each process.
System parameter setting is required.
[SINGLE ON] . . Single step in each NC data block.
This key is always effective.
The operation after stop is identical in respective cases.
Parameter setting method
Set the stop position in each process to system parameter No.0049 to
No.0057, No.0310 to No.0314, and No.0410 to No.0414.
0
Process start
Just before approach
Just before return relief
B61804E2/05
1. VARIOUS FUNCTIONS OF
Symbolic FAPT
Process
0049
0050
0051
Drill process
0052
0053
0054
0055
Grooving process
0056
Threading process
0057
310
311
312
313
314
410
411
412
413
414
29
1. VARIOUS FUNCTIONS OF
Symbolic FAPT
B61804E2/05
1.5
REOUTPUT OF NC
DATA BY EACH
PROCESS
WARNING
Before starting machining based on the prepared NC data,
thoroughly check the contents of the NC data. Machining
with incorrect NC data may result in the tool colliding with the
workpiece and/or machine, or forced machining occurring,
possibly causing damage to the machine and/or tool itself,
or injury to the user.
This function is provided to correct one process only (if required) and
output to NC data of the process only after preparing all processes.
(1) Specification method
(a) Selection of functions
Select menu No.4 MACHINING DEFINITION and the
following message will be displayed on the soft key.
NEW
CORRECTION
CORRECTION & OUTPUT
This function is selected by pressing correction and output.
(b) Selection of process
All processes already defined are displayed in the page next to the
specification of [correction and output]. Select a desired process
by cursor key, and depress [NEXT PAGE] or [INPUT] key.
(2) Processing
The system sequentially asks questions about the specified process
preparation processing by the above specification. The process
preparation is completed after corresponding correction as required.
After this process preparation, processing automatically proceeds to
prepare NC data normally.
30
B61804E2/05
1. VARIOUS FUNCTIONS OF
Symbolic FAPT
(3) Warnings
WARNING
1 If NC requires a program number (by MTF setting,
No.1080), the program number in the output process is
displayed by the program number + corresponding process
number value. If a change of this number is desired, specify
a new number.
However, this number is not stored. It is, therefore,
necessary for correcting and outputting the same process
again to input a new number each time. If this function is
employed when NC data have not been prepared at all in
all processes, the program number always remains
undefined. Specify program No. each time in such a case.
2 Data in the preparation process being with the turret turning
position, and returns to the turning position.
3 If the subprogram format is used together, the subprogram
part only is output.
4 When using this function, must define the machining start
point.
31
1. VARIOUS FUNCTIONS OF
Symbolic FAPT
B61804E2/05
1.6
OUTPUT IN MAIN
PROGRAM AND
SUBPROGRAM
FORMAT
WARNING
Before starting machining based on the prepared NC data,
thoroughly check the contents of the NC data. Machining
with incorrect NC data may result in the tool colliding with the
workpiece and/or machine, or forced machining occurring,
possibly causing damage to the machine and/or tool itself,
or injury to the user.
Output data from Symbolic FAPT can be output in main program and
subprogram formats by setting 2 to MTF No.1080.
(1) Output format
A main program is output first, and then, a subprogram called by the
main program is output. Subprograms are formed every input process,
and the main program sequentially calls these subprograms. Program
numbers with address 0 at the start of subprograms are sequentially
output one by one from main program number (operator input).
(Examples)
%
O0123
N0001M98P0124
M98P0125
M98P0126
M30
Main program
O0124
N0002G50X200000Z200000S20000
.
.
.
.
M01
M05
/M99
M30
O0125
N0003G50X200000Z200000S2000
.
.
.
.
M30
O0126
N0004G50X200000Z200000S2000
.
.
.
.
T0100
M01
M05
/M99
M30
%
32
B61804E2/05
1. VARIOUS FUNCTIONS OF
Symbolic FAPT
2104: 0705
Sub
program
call
0004
;
0004
0505
0004
Program
end M30 ;
0603
0004
Program ;
number
0004
0805
Sub
;
program
return
M code
0803
P code
0204
0505 0004 0100
Block
M30
1*20:
end
;
feed
with/
(optional
skip)
0004
;
0104
0004
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
2000
Program number is not output (Program start).
0104
0004
0000
0000
0000
2001
M05, final T code, M30, and feed output are discontinued, and %* only is output (at the end of program).
2002
to
2008
2009
to
2015
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0004
0000
0000
0000
0000
33
1. VARIOUS FUNCTIONS OF
Symbolic FAPT
B61804E2/05
1.7
S CODE OUTPUT
WARNING
When a system parameter value or an MTF parameter
value is modified, check the prepared NC data. Machining
with incorrect NC data may result in the tool colliding with the
workpiece and/or machine, or forced machining occurring,
possibly causing damage to the machine and/or tool itself,
or injury to the user.
(1) Setting of parameters
It is required to set the following parameters for outputting the S code.
1) MTF
Parameter
number
1085
Description
Processing method for constant surface speed control
1 or 0: NC unit without constant surface speed control function
1 or 3: NC unit with constant surface speed control function
See the following System parameters for the difference between
1 and 3.
1102
1110
to
1113
1114
to
1121
1122
2) System parameters
Parameter
number
Description
Bit 0 = 0: Constant surface speed control function is not used
1: Constant surface speed control function is used
0107
to
0115
0128
34
B61804E2/05
1. VARIOUS FUNCTIONS OF
Symbolic FAPT
S =[Smin + Smax]/2
=
= KV
= 2Xmax
= KV
= 2Xmin
35
/2
1. VARIOUS FUNCTIONS OF
Symbolic FAPT
B61804E2/05
1.8
SIMULTANEOUS 1
AXIS MOVEMENT IN
APPROACH AND
RETURN RELIEF
WARNING
When a system parameter value or an MTF parameter
value is modified, check the prepared NC data. Machining
with incorrect NC data may result in the tool colliding with the
workpiece and/or machine, or forced machining occurring,
possibly causing damage to the machine and/or tool itself,
or injury to the user.
The tool can be moved simultaneously 1 axis in approach and return relief
by parameter setting for machine tool file (MTF). (In general, it is
simultaneous 2 axis movement.) And, the moving sequence can be set
when the simultaneous 1 axis movement in approach and return relief is
specified.
1.8.1
Setting of Parameters
Description
Moving sequence of simultaneous one axis
(Effective when the simultaneous one axis is specified by system
parameters No.0107 to 0115.)
0: Xaxis always moves first during approach.
Zaxis always moves first during return relief
1: Inner diameter, and face
Approach . . . . . . . . Zaxis Xaxis
Return relief . . . . . . Xaxis Zaxis
Outer diameter
Approach . . . . . . . . Xaxis Zaxis
Return relief . . . . . . Zaxis Xaxis
2: Reverse sequence as compared with set value 1
(standard setting)
3: Zaxis always moves first during approach.
36
B61804E2/05
1.8.2
NC Data Format
1. VARIOUS FUNCTIONS OF
Symbolic FAPT
Relief
Meaning
0: MTF 2000s numbers are not referred
to when no movement is made for
approach or return relief.
1: MTF 2000s numbers are referred to
even if no movement is done.
37
Standard
value
0
1. VARIOUS FUNCTIONS OF
Symbolic FAPT
B61804E2/05
Example:
If the axes are decomposed in the order of X axis and Z axis in one axis
at a time control when the X axis only moves for return relief, the X
axis does not move in the 2nd motion, but it moves in the 1st motion
only.
When MTF 1002 = 0
Tool
changing
point
MTF 2033
When MTF 1002 = 1
Tool
changing
point
MTF 2034
MTF 2033
MTF
parameter
No.
Setting value
4102
DD01
CC01
0004
G28
U0
W0
EOB
4102
DD01
CC01
0004
G28
U0
W0
EOB
2033
2034
When the axes were decomposed in the order of X axis and Z axis in one
axis at a time, the G code and setting values are output as follows.
G28 U0;
G28 W0;
When the axes are decomposed in the order of Z axis and X axis in one
axis at a time, the G code and setting values are output as follows.
G28 W0;
G28 U0;
38
B61804E2/05
1. VARIOUS FUNCTIONS OF
Symbolic FAPT
1.9
UTILIZATION OF
DIRECT INPUT OF
TOOL OFFSET
VALUE
WARNING
When a system parameter value or an MTF parameter
value is modified, check the prepared NC data. Machining
with incorrect NC data may result in the tool colliding with the
workpiece and/or machine, or forced machining occurring,
possibly causing damage to the machine and/or tool itself,
or injury to the user.
The NC data, which are fitted for operation utilizing the direct input of
tool offset value, can be output.
In this case, the coordinates of home position must be set. If this is not
set, the block for positioning to the index position will not be output.
(1) NC Tape format
The following NC data for direct input of tool offset value is available,
if 00000101 is set to MTF 1060 and settings of MTF 2000s is changed.
However, if reference point return is not required, the data correction for
MTF 2000 and 2001 is not necessary.
O1234
G28U0
}Reference point return
G28W0
G50S2000
Coordinate system setting is not output.
G00T0100
}Turret
G00X200Z200T010M08
}Approach, Tool offset start, Coolant on
.
.
.
.
G00X200Z200T0100M09 }Return, relief, Tool offset cancel,
Coolant off
G28U0W0
}Reference point return
M30
39
1. VARIOUS FUNCTIONS OF
Symbolic FAPT
B61804E2/05
Set value
2000
0104, 0004, 0603, 0004, 4102, 1107, 0004, 4107, 0107, 0004
(EOR EOB O EOB G28 U0 EOB G28 W0 EOB is output at
reader part of NC data.)
2001
0205, 0004, 4102, 1107, 0107, 0004, 0505, 0004, 0104, 0004
(M05 EOB G28 U0 W0 EOB M30 EOB EOR EOB is output at the
trailer part of NC data.)
2016
2018
5202, 5002, 1101, 0001, 0103, 0305, 0004, 0000, 0000, 0000
(G90 G00 X Z T0101 M08 EOB is output at the time of
Approach.)
2019
5202, 5002, 1101, 0001, 0003, 0405, 0004, 0000, 0000, 0000
(G90 G00 X Z T0100 M09 EOB is output at return relief.)
(3) Warnings
WARNING
1 For MTF No.2000 and 2001, maximum 10 parameters only
can be set, respectively. In case of a setting sample in (2),
neither feed at the start and end of a program not T code
(MTF No.1106) at the end of the program is output, although
these feed and code are output in standard setting.
2 If the setting is changed as the following example, the
approach and return relief should be specified
simultaneous two axes. And the system parameter
No.0107 to 0115 should be set so as to output tool offset
cancel.
System parameter
#7
#6
#5
0107 to 0115
#4
0
#3
0
#2
1
#1
#0
40
B61804E2/05
1. VARIOUS FUNCTIONS OF
Symbolic FAPT
1.10
APPLICATION FOR
NC CHASER LATHE
WARNING
When a system parameter value or an MTF parameter
value is modified, check the prepared NC data. Machining
with incorrect NC data may result in the tool colliding with the
workpiece and/or machine, or forced machining occurring,
possibly causing damage to the machine and/or tool itself,
or injury to the user.
The functions for preparing NC tape for chaser lathe are provided. The
major functions are as follows.
1) It is no longer necessary to define the tool by reversing it, if the tool
is at the rear side.
2) The tool can be replaced by drawing the Z axis only to the specified
position. The above functions will be detailed below.
(1) Setting of parameters
Set the following MTF parameters
No.1051 (Turret position) . . . . . . . Set whether the standard tool is
positioned on this side or on the
counter side.
No.1055 (Turret type) = 1
No.1084 (Moving sequence of simultaneous one axis)
. . . . . . . Set the moving sequence of return
relief and approach.
No.1105 (Number of digits of T code and offset number)
. . . . . . . Set 0 if T code is not divided into
tool number and offset number.
Others, the MTF and system parameter is set according to the needs.
(2) Specifications of index position
The X value is not specified, but the Z axis only is specified at the index
position. The tool can be retracted only in Z axis at tool change, by
this specification.
(3) Setting of tool data
The specification method of data differs according to whether 1 or 2
is specified or 3 or 4 is specified as the drawing format. This concept
is the same as in ordinary turret lathes.
(i) When 1 or 2 is specified;
The drawing format is the same as in the case that the opposite side
is specified as +X. This will be explained, referring to the outer
diameter cutting, as an example.
41
1. VARIOUS FUNCTIONS OF
Symbolic FAPT
B61804E2/05
Assuming that cutting edge angle (AC), tool nose angle (AN), mounting
angle (AS), and reference point are determined out of tool data as shown
in the above figure, the mounting position (XS, ZS) is as shown in the
following table.
(Example)
AC
AN
AS
XS
ZS
T01
85
80
180
T02
85
80
180
(ii)When 3 or 4 is specified;
42
B61804E2/05
1. VARIOUS FUNCTIONS OF
Symbolic FAPT
AN
AS
XS
ZS
T01
85
80
180
T02
85
80
180
43
1. VARIOUS FUNCTIONS OF
Symbolic FAPT
B61804E2/05
INPUT
INPUT
WARNING
1 Be careful with the setting of the spindle rotating directions
of system parameters No.0107 to 0115.
7
not used
4
0/1
3
0/1
2
0/1
1
0/1
0
0/1
MTF No.1051
setting
1: Yes
44
B61804E2/05
1. VARIOUS FUNCTIONS OF
Symbolic FAPT
NOTE
1 If, on the tool data setting screen for machining definition,
the answer to the prompt asking whether to invert the
Xaxis is set to 1 (yes), a machining area is not
automatically set, even when the automatic process
determination option is enabled. The cutting direction and
dividing direction should be defined manually.
2 The automatic process determination function cannot be
used to define a process in which the Xaxis is to be
inverted. (Using the automatic process determination
function generates those processes in which the Xaxis is
not to be inverted.)
3 On menu 5, the [ANIMATION] soft key does not appear.
When an NC data is prepared, only those machining
operations indicated by line drawing are shown.
4 In 16TC CAP II and 16iTA CAP II, gradation display is
disabled for animated simulation on menu 6.
5 In the following cases, the prompt asking whether to invert
the Xaxis does not appear on the tool data setting screen
for machining definition.
(1)When C or Yaxis machining is specified
(2)When the back machining function is set
(3)When the workpiece inversion function is set
45
1. VARIOUS FUNCTIONS OF
Symbolic FAPT
1.11
INTERFERENCE
CHECK
B61804E2/05
1.11.1
Interference Check by
Tool Shape and
Machining Shape
A pocket may be produced, depending upon parts figure and tool figure
as illustrated above. In such a case, designate the area to cut such a pocket
only by using a reversible tool.
NOTE
For actual operations, refer to item 3.4.7 of chapter III.
1.11.2
Interference Check in
Approach and Return
relief
For cutting the area (B) in the above figure, convexed part (A) must be
avoided, otherwise the interference occurs. Accordingly, the return relief
movement is done to the position were a clearance margin is added to the
blank as illustrated.
46
B61804E2/05
1. VARIOUS FUNCTIONS OF
Symbolic FAPT
If the tool moves outside the blank like in the return motion to the turret
position, the system examines the interference up to the position of the
maximum blank size before moving the tool. Then, the movement of the
turret position is output.
If the tool directly moves to the turret position from point (A), the tool
interferes with the convexed part.
In such a case, the tool moves to the turret position after it has retreated
up to point (B) at the blank end.
Whether the return relief movement is done on the simultaneous two
axes or one axis only is determined by system parameters No.0107 to
0115.
It should be carefully noted that the tool referred to here is defined as nose
R (nose circle) only, and it does not include any other tools.
In other words, the system checks the tool nose angle, but it does not check
such an interference as the blank touches a shank or other part other than
specified above in the following figure, for example.
Such a conditions as
illustrated here is not
checked.
(The nose angle
and nose R are set
to a correct cutting
position.)
WARNING
In case of threading tool the system checks the interference
by the nose R specified by the virtual tool position.
If an undesirable tool path is output, specify the opposite
nose R by the virtual tool position.
47
1. VARIOUS FUNCTIONS OF
Symbolic FAPT
1.11.3
B61804E2/05
48
B61804E2/05
1. VARIOUS FUNCTIONS OF
Symbolic FAPT
(3) Dimensional check of the tool width and groove width at groove inlet
The tool width and groove width are checked at the groove inlet to see
if groove inlet width > tool width. If this relation is not satisfied, an
alarm is issued as an error. This dimensional check does not apply to
the innermost of the groove.
1.11.4
Approach and Relief to
Inner Diameter
49
1. VARIOUS FUNCTIONS OF
Symbolic FAPT
1.12
INITIAL SCREEN
DISPLAY FUNCTION
B61804E2/05
System parameter
#7
#6
#5
#4
708
1.12.1
Screen Flow
50
#3
#2
#1
#0
B61804E2/05
1.12.2
Setting Initial Screen
Display Data
1. VARIOUS FUNCTIONS OF
Symbolic FAPT
Characterbased
1. VARIOUS FUNCTIONS OF
Symbolic FAPT
B61804E2/05
22nd line:
Character addresses 1554 to 1617
23rd line:
Character addresses 1628 to 1691
24th line:
Character addresses 1702 to 1765
(2) G codes for displaying figures
G code
Function
Argument
G code type
G01
X, Y
Continuousstate
G02
X, Y, I, J
Continuousstate
G03
Draws an arc
counterclockwise.
X, Y, I, J
Continuousstate
G204
Singleshot
G206
Fill command.
X, Y
Singleshot
G240
Specifies a color.
Singleshot
G242
X, Y
Singleshot
G243
G244
G245
Character
mode.
G246
string
Singleshot
52
B61804E2/05
1. VARIOUS FUNCTIONS OF
Symbolic FAPT
NOTE
The current position remains unchanged after a rectangular
frame is drawn.
4) G206 Fill command
G206X_Y_;
(Specify X and Y in incremental mode.)
With this command, the area enclosed in a closed curve, including
(X, Y), can be filled in. (X, Y) must be located inside the curve.
If (X, Y) lies on the curve, the area cannot be filled in.
X: 512 to 512, dotbased
Y: 384 to 384, dotbased
Example :
G01X__ Y__ ;
.
.
.
G02X__ Y__ ;
G206X__ Y__ ;
53
1. VARIOUS FUNCTIONS OF
Symbolic FAPT
B61804E2/05
NOTE
1 If X or Y is not specified, the current coordinates are
assumed.
2 After the area is filled in, the coordinates immediately before
the specification of G206 are displayed again.
3 The area is filled in with the last color specified.
5) G240 Specifies a color.
G240P_;
Specifies the color of line segments and character strings. If a
negative value is specified for P, characters are displayed in reverse
video.
P = 1: Red, = 2: Green,
= 3: Yellow, = 4: Blue,
= 5: Purple, = 6: Light blue, = 7: White
6) G242 Specifies a drawing start point.
G242X_Y_;
Specify a drawing start point with absolute values in the dot
coordinate system.
The next drawing starts at the specified point.
X: 0 to 512, dotbased
Y: 0 to 384, dotbased
7) G243 Displays a character string.
G243P_,
;
Character string (alphanumerics, , .)
P: Addresses 0 to 1997 at which the character string is to be
displayed
8) G244 Specifies a line type.
G244P_;
Specifies the line type of the straight line or arc to be drawn.
P= 0: Solid line
1: Dotted line
2: Dotanddash line
3: Doubledotanddash line
9) G245 Enters the character string display mode.
G246 Cancels the character string display mode.
G245 is the continuousstate form of the character string display
command (G243).
G245P_ , Character string ;
Character string display mode
P_ , Character string ;
P_ , Character string ;
G246 ;
54
B61804E2/05
1. VARIOUS FUNCTIONS OF
Symbolic FAPT
NOTE
1 Be sure to specify G246 in a separate block.
2 G codes other than G240 must not be placed between the
G245 and G246 blocks.
G245P_ , ;
G01X_Y_,_ ;
This specification is illegal.
G246 ;
3 G240 (color specification) can be specified between the
G245 and G246 blocks.
G245P_ , ABC ;
G240P_ ;
Changes the color of characters
P_ , XYZ ;
(XYZ).
G246 ;
4 The following specification is permitted:
G245P_ , ABC;
P_ ;
A character string (ABC) is displayed repeatedly.
(3) Soft keys
The meanings of the soft keys displayed on the screen are as follows:
CHECK . . . . . Checks set data. If no error is found, the drawing
screen is displayed for drawing operation.
NEW . . . . . . . Pressed when new data is created. If this soft key is
pressed, and the END soft key is pressed with no
data entered, the previous data is maintained.
DELETE . . . . Deletes the line indicated by the cursor. To erase all
the data, use this soft key, and delete data line by line.
INSERT . . . . . Inserts entered data to just above the line indicated by
the cursor. If the keyin buffer line contains no data,
nothing occurs when this soft key is pressed.
PAGE . . . . . Displays the previous page.
PAGE . . . . . Displays the next page. There are a maximum of 12
pages.
CURSOR . . . Moves the cursor backward.
CURSOR . . . Moves the cursor foreward.
END . . . . . . . . Redisplays the SYSTEM DATA SETTING &
OUTPUT/INPUT screen.
1.12.3
Check Screen
When the CHECK soft key is pressed on the data setting screen, the
drawing screen appears unless any error is found. On this screen, the user
can check the drawing to see if the desired picture is obtained.
The meaning of the soft key displayed on this screen is as follows:
EDIT SCREEN Returns the display to the previous edit screen. This
soft key is pressed when the display contents need to be corrected.
55
1. VARIOUS FUNCTIONS OF
Symbolic FAPT
1.12.4
Error Messages
56
B61804E2/05
1. VARIOUS FUNCTIONS OF
Symbolic FAPT
B61804E2/05
1.12.5
System Parameters
57
1. VARIOUS FUNCTIONS OF
Symbolic FAPT
B61804E2/05
1.13
OUTPUTTING NC
DATA IN THE
FS15T/16T FORMAT
WARNING
The initial values in the MTF (machine tool file) listed below
are different from those used for a production run. Actual
setting values vary with the machine. For details, refer to the
manual provided by the machine tool builder. If these data
values are not set appropriately for the actual machine
being used, correct NC data cannot be prepared.
Machining with incorrect NC data may result in the tool
colliding with the workpiece and/or machine, or forced
machining occurring, possibly causing damage to the
machine and/or tool itself, or injury to the user.
For NC data with different formats between the 15T and the 16T, the
values in the following MTF machine file and function tables are
modified before output as NC data.
Only FS16T format NC data can be output for 5700 series of 16T CAP
II.
1.13.1
MTF Setting
Parameter
No
Format
16T/TT
initial value
15TFB/TTFB
setting
1262
Integer
1350
Integer
29
1360
Real
number
83.
81.
1361
Real
number
87.
81.
1362
Real
number
83.
82.
1363
Real
number
87.
82.
1364
Real
number
83.
83.
1365
Real
number
87.
83.
Description
58
B61804E2/05
Parameter
No
Format
1. VARIOUS FUNCTIONS OF
Symbolic FAPT
Description
peck
drilling
16T/TT
initial value
15TFB/TTFB
setting
1366
Real
number
cycle
83.
83.1
1367
Real
number
87.
83.1
1368
Real
number
84.
84.
1369
Real
number
88.
84.
1370
Real
number
84.
84.1
1371
Real
number
88.
84.1
1372
Real
number
84.
84.2
1373
Real
number
88.
84.2
1374
Real
number
84.
84.3
1375
Real
number
88.
84.3
1380
Real
number
107.
7.1
1381
Real
number
112.
12.1
1382
Real
number
113.
13.1
1390
Integer
1391
Single
character
59
1. VARIOUS FUNCTIONS OF
Symbolic FAPT
B61804E2/05
Drilling cycle
command block
Cylindrical interpolation
start block
Cylindrical interpolation
cancel block
* The underlined function codes have been changed for the new function. (See (2) of Section 2.2.)
<New table
2214 =6502, 0004, 0000, 0000
G112 ;
60
B61804E2/05
1. VARIOUS FUNCTIONS OF
Symbolic FAPT
Cylindrical interpolation
start block
Cylindrical interpolation
cancel block
61
1. VARIOUS FUNCTIONS OF
Symbolic FAPT
B61804E2/05
One loworder
digit, major
classification
Function
1.13.2
Supplementary
(1) When MTF data in the old system is read into the new system via the
floppy cassette or another external storage device, only the MTF data
having the conventional MTF Nos. is rewritten. In this case, change
the settings in the function tables whose contents have been changed
for this new function, by referencing the initial values in the function
tables given previously.
(2) Among the optional processes for machining definition in menu 4, the
following six processes are subject to format conversion:
Tapping
Caxis center drilling
Caxis drilling
Caxis tapping
Face milling
Side milling
62
B61804E2/05
1.14
FUNCTION FOR
PREPARING THE
NEXT TOOL
1. VARIOUS FUNCTIONS OF
Symbolic FAPT
This function is used to define the tool change method in NC data so that
the corresponding tool to be used in the next process will be called. This
function is applied to all machining processes except sub cycles.
This function is an optional function.
(1) Programming
Programming is performed in the same way as for normal
programming.
(2) System parameter
Parameter
No.
Format
706
Specificatio
n of 0 or 1
Initial
value
Description
(3) MTF
1) MTF1xxx
The following parameters have been added:
No.
Format
1355
Integer
1400
Twocharac
ters
Initial
value
6
BB
Description
Tool calling M code value
Next tool calling command address
(the same two characters are
specified)
3) Function code
The following function codes have been added:
Higher three
digits
Detailed
classification
Lowest digit
Major
classification
Function
63
1. VARIOUS FUNCTIONS OF
Symbolic FAPT
B61804E2/05
NOTE
The value of MTF1104 (the number of tool number digits)
should be used as the number of digits of the B code for
specifying the next tool.
(4) Example of output NC data block
The following NC data are prepared (when the NC data are prepared
for three processes).
0_ ;
G50X_ Z_ ;
G0X_ Z_ ;
(First process start)
B01 ; . . . . . . . . . . . . Tool number to be used in the first process
M06 ; . . . . . . . . . . . . Tool change
T0101 ; . . . . . . . . . . Tool compensation
B02 ; . . . . . . . . . . . . Tool number to be used in the next (second) process
G50X_ Z_ ;
.
.
T0100 ; . . . . . . . . . . Tool compensation cancel
(First process end)
(Second process start)
M06 ; . . . . . . . . . . . . Tool change
T0202 ; . . . . . . . . . . Tool compensation
B03 ; . . . . . . . . . . . . Tool number to be used in the next (third) process
G05X_ Z_ ;
.
T0200 ; . . . . . . . . . . Tool compensation cancel
(Second process end)
(Third process start)
M06 ; . . . . . . . . . . . . Tool change
T0303 ; . . . . . . . . . . Tool compensation
G05X_ Z_ ;
.
.
T0300 ; . . . . . . . . . . Tool compensation cancel
(Third process end)
CAUTION
1 For the first process, the tool number to be used in the
process is output before M06 (tool change).
2 For the last process, no next tool number is output.
64
B61804E2/05
1.15
OUTPUT FUNCTION
FOR
INTERPOLATION
RIGID TAPPING
1. VARIOUS FUNCTIONS OF
Symbolic FAPT
(1) Programming
Programming for outputting an interpolation rigid tapping cycle is
performed in the same way as that for outputting a normal rigid
tapping cycle.
1) Machining type
On the machining definition screen, select CAXIS TAP. or
YAXIS TAP. as the machining type.
2) Tool data
Use the tapping tool for milling.
3) Cutting conditions
On the definition screen, shown below, enter each data item.
TOOL TYPE . . . . . . . . . TP=2
The rigid tapping type is specified(*1).
CLEARANCE . . . . . . . . C1 = The initial value is set to the value of
system parameter No.363 for the Caxis, or the value of system parameter No. 435 for the Yaxis.
C2 = The initial value is set to the value of
system parameter No.364 for the Caxis, or the value of system parameter No. 436 for the Yaxis.
CUTTING SPEED . . . . N = V*1000/DT*PAI(*2)
(V = cutting speed value set in the
material data, DT = tool diameter value set in the tool data)
1. VARIOUS FUNCTIONS OF
Symbolic FAPT
B61804E2/05
(3) MTF
1) MTF1xxx
The following parameters have been added:
No.
Format
Initial
value
Description
1351 Integer
68
1352 Integer
69
1353 Integer
1354 Integer
1383 Integer
384
1384 Integer
380
1398 Two
characters
FF
1399 Two
characters
TT
66
B61804E2/05
1. VARIOUS FUNCTIONS OF
Symbolic FAPT
3) Function code
The following function codes have been added:
Higher three
digits
Detailed
classification
Lowest digit
Major
classification
Function
*1 The value set in the tool data prepared during machining definition is
output as the pitch value.
*2 TI (value of MTF1353) for the Xaxis cutting direction, or T2 (value
of MTF1354) for the Zaxis cutting direction, is output.
67
1. VARIOUS FUNCTIONS OF
Symbolic FAPT
B61804E2/05
90
40
180
270
.
.
G28H0. ;
G50X150. Z150. C0. ;
G0T0101 ;
X40. ;
Z92. ;
C0. ;
G384Z80. F1.5R0. S2000T2M68 ;
G384C90. ;
G384C180. ;
G384C270 ;
G380. ;
G0Z150. ;
X150. ;
T0100 ;
M1 ;
.
.
68
B61804E2/05
1. VARIOUS FUNCTIONS OF
Symbolic FAPT
90
40
180
270
G50X200. Z200. Y0. C0. ;
G0T0101 ;
G17C90. ;
X40. ;
Y0. ;
Z92. ;
M68 ;
G384Z80. F1. 5R0. S2000T2 ;
G384X0. Y20. ;
G384X40. Y0. ;
G384X0. Y20. ;
G380. ;
M69 ;
G0Z150. ;
X150. ;
Y0.
T0100 ;
M1 ;
.
69
70
B61804E2/05
B61804E2/05
2.1
TOOL FIGURE AND
SETTING METHOD
If you know by what processing the tool figure and setting method are
defined when tool data were input to the Symbolic FAPT system, you will
be able to program these tool more securely.
Data employed by the system for checking the cutting direction, cutting
edge angle, and other tool figures are angles indicating the tool nose
directions in the NC data coordinate system.
Two cutting edges are present normally. They are called major cutting
edge and minor cutting edge. These cutting edge directions are called
major cutting edge direction angle and minor cutting edge direction angle.
In the above figure, the major cutting edge direction angle is 240 or
120 , while the minor cutting edge direction angle is 165 or 195.
Now, the process or determining the tool figure and setting methods in the
Symbolic FAPT will be described in regular sequence, referring to the
above description.
71
B61804E2/05
(2) If the cutter is mounted inside out, grip a tool while erecting its shank
so that the cutting edge faces downward, and cutting edge faces
upward in other cases.
Assume a straight line which passes the tool nose edge and faces just
downward. The following figure shows examples typical figures of
cutters and the straight line which passes the tool nose edge and faces
just downward based on the presumption.
72
B61804E2/05
(3) The major cutting edge angle AC is defined as the angle formed by the
major cutting edge angle and the straight line which passes the tool
nose edge and faces just downward.
Cutting edge angle AN is also defined as the angle formed by the major
cutting edge and minor cutting edge.
The counterclockwise angle is specified as the positive direction angle
as shown in the following figure.
(4) If the straight line which passes the tool nose edge and faces just
downward is presumed as a straight line which passes the virtual tool
position, you will be able to understand the meanings of the following
question asked on the CRT screen by the system.
VIRTUAL TOOL POS. . . . . . XN =
ZN =
Input the distance from the virtual tool position to the center of cutting
edge as XN and ZN.
(5) Setting angle AS indicates the setting direction of a tool. Input the
setting angle to the selected drawing format, irrespective of whether
the turret is located on the front side or on the rear side, and presume
that the tool is set on the upper side of the CRT screen if menu number
1 or 2 was selected, or on the lower side of the CRT screen if menu
number 3 or 4 was selected, for drawing format.
The upward direction of the straight line passing the tool nose edge
employed in (2) (direction from the base of the tool to the tool nose)
is employed for indicating the tool direction.
Input the clockwise direction as a negative () angle from the right side
of the abscissa of the CRT screen and also input the counterclockwise
direction as a positive (+) angle.
73
B61804E2/05
2nd step: Calculation of the direction angles of major cutting edge and
minor cutting edge
There are certain items to be input by an operator according to
questions from the CRT screen. The following three factors are used
to determine the cutting edge direction angles.
CUTTING EDGE . . . . . . . AC = (Cutting edge angle)
NOSE ANGLE . . . . . . . . . AN = (Tool nose angle)
SETTING ANGLE . . . . . . AS = (Setting angle)
The following procedure shows the process of calculating the cutting
edge direction angles inside the system based on the above three pieces
of information.
(1) Assume AC be the major cutting edge angle and AN be the tool nose
angle.
B61804E2/05
Internal processing;
Result;
75
(Example 2)
B61804E2/05
Internal processing;
Result;
76
AS = AS = 90
A = ASAC = 120
. . . . . . Major cutting edge direction angle
A = ASAC = AS(AC+AN) = 165
. . . . . . Minor cutting edge direction angle
B61804E2/05
2.2
CUTTING DIRECTION
AND CUTTING EDGE
ANGLE
For the cutting direction vector (A) as viewed from the tool tip, and the
cutting edge angle vector of major cutting edge (B) and the cutting edge
angle vector of minor cutting edge (C) as viewed from the tool tip by
taking the cutting edge protective angle (standard value: 3) into
consideration,
When cutting is made at the minor cutting edge, consider the above
explanation by exchanging vectors B and C.
77
2.3
ROUGH CUTTING
DIRECTION
78
B61804E2/05
B61804E2/05
2.4
JUDGEMENT OF
POCKETS
The concaved portion (indicated by the slanting lines) in the left figure is
judged as a pocket when the cutting direction is and it is not judged
as a pocket when the cutting direction is
.
The concaved portion which was not judged as a pocket is not cut in the
corresponding process.
When the above portion is cut in the direction;
direction;
79
B61804E2/05
80
B61804E2/05
2.5
DIVISION OF
MACHINING AREA
The arrows indicating the division direction are input for specifying the
area based on the following principle.
Outer diameter side
, (selective use)
81
B61804E2/05
82
B61804E2/05
NOTE
Fi: Feedrate by the specification of surface roughness
Fj: Feedrate by the specification of standard surface
roughness
(5) Concept of area in semifinish and finish cutting
In the semifinish and finish, cutting is made along the part figure
only, while neglecting the blank figure. The profile in the arrow
direction specified when dividing the machining area is regarded as a
part of the part profile.
83
B61804E2/05
2.6
SURPLUS
THICKNESS
2.6.1
Finish Allowance and
Surplus Thickness
Dont give any finish allowance (in rough cutting and medium finish
cutting) larger than or equivalent to the surplus thickness, otherwise the
blank figure may be deformed to unfavorably affect the subsequent
machining.
(Example)
2.6.2
Surplus Thickness and
Blank
84
B61804E2/05
2.6.3
Closed Part
2.6.4
Definition of Optional
Blank Figure
85
B61804E2/05
2.7
GROOVING
2.7.1
Tool Path
If the groove width is equal to the tool width, the tool is applied to the
groove center once.
86
B61804E2/05
2.7.2
Interference Check
2.7.3
Blank Figure in
Grooving Area
If the blank figure at the entrance of the groove is not parallel to the X axis
or Z axis in case of grooving, give care to the following note.
WARNING
In the case of grooving tool, interruption is checked at virtual
tool position by the designated nose R.
If a bad tool path is output by this process, designate the
other side of nose R at virtual tool position.
2.7.4
The flat portion must be equal to or larger than the flat portion of the tool
nose.
87
2.7.5
Concaved Parts in
Groove
Cannot be grooved.
B61804E2/05
(Special example)
AS a special case, grooving becomes impossible when two or more
concaved parts exist in a groove, depending upon the dividing
directions of the groove, even if the groove figure is normal.
If
If
88
B61804E2/05
2.8
DEPTH OF CUT (D) IN
DRILLING
The depth of cut is determined in the way that the drill shoulder is
positioned at the place where the drill is driven by depth D from the
intersection of the blank figure profile at that time (Blank figure changes
as machining advances) and the tool diameter employed.
89
B61804E2/05
2.9
THREADING
2.9.1
Threading Direction
A tool is driven along an angle to which the minor cutting edge faces in
threading.
When defining the virtual tool figure, dont define it in such a way as the
minor cutting edge bites into the major cutting edge side.
The allowable threading is limited up to the direction parallel to the X
axis.
90
B61804E2/05
2.9.2
Threading Depth
D1:
Di:
Dk:
D:
2.9.3
Depth of Screw Thread
When the prompt of the depth of screw is displayed, press the softkey
OVER THREAD or INNER THREAD, then the depth of screw is
calculated automatically.
When asking of screw thread depth, automatically calculated contents
which is displayed on CRT can be changed.
(Example)
M20, P: Pitch
Minor diameter of internal
thread is calculated by the
following equation.
Inner dia. = 20 (P x 0.6495)
CAUTION
Even in the case when the depth of screw thread is input
from keys (not automatically calculated value), recalculation
is executed by inputting multiplier or pitch. In this case, the
required depth of screw thread must be input from keys.
75
2.10
CUTTING
OVERHUNG
PORTION
B61804E2/05
76
B61804E2/05
The tool path is as follows, and the portion remaining uncut occurs.
77
2.11
ERROR WHEN NC
DATA IS PREPARED
B61804E2/05
2) When the dividing direction such that the area to be cut is not
present as a result in the designation of machining area is
designated:
Example 1)
When the dividing direction was designated, the start and end
points were set to the same position and the same direction was
designated.
Example 2)
The already finished place was designated as a cutting area.
78
B61804E2/05
Example)
When roughing or semifinishing, a larger machining allowance
than the surplus thickness was designated.
B61804E2/05
(7) Others
1) When the right and left positions are confused for the inquiry
(PE=_) of parts position when the figure is defined.
2) When an attempt is made to prepare NC data when the machining
definition is not completed.
Example)
The tool data and machining condition data have undefined data.
Or no machining start position is fixed.
80
B61804E2/05
2.12
OTHER
PRECAUTIONS
2.12.1
Chucking Position
2.12.2
Cutting Start Position
and Others
WARNING
Before starting machining based on the prepared NC data,
thoroughly check the contents of the NC data. Machining
with incorrect NC data may result in the tool colliding with the
workpiece and/or machine, or forced machining occurring,
possibly causing damage to the machine and/or tool itself,
or injury to the user.
(1) Function to skip XS and ZS questions when the turret turning position
is fixed (inputtable), the cutting start position is inputtable, and also
tool lengths XS, ZS are unknown.
System parameter
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
0104
B61804E2/05
NOTE
The start point cannot be undefined, if the software key
CORRECTION & OUTPUT of menu No.4 PROCESS
DEFINITION is selected.
2.12.3
Method of Stopping the
Tool on Z Axis
82
B61804E2/05
2.12.4
Tool Path in Finish
Cutting and
Semifinish Cutting
The tool path has been modified to be output to finish all specified range
including already finished parts in finish cutting and semifinish cutting,
if there is no interference with tool path. But can not specify the range that
all of them already finished.
83
B61804E2/05
125
1.1
KIND OF MACHINING
B61804E2/05
126
B61804E2/05
1.2
SPECIFICATION OF
CAXIS MACHINING
After data of the turning section of a part figure input is completed, the
turning figure input up to now reappears on the CRT screen, and displays
the message press the soft key.
When you press the soft key CAXIS MENU on this screen, a screen for
Caxis machining appears if the system is equipped with the Caxis
FAPT option.
When you press soft key NEXT PAGE, a screen for menu 3 (HOME
POSITION & INDEX POSITION) appears.
127
B61804E2/05
1.3
DESIGNATION OF
CAXIS FIGURE
DATA
ESCAPE:
Returns the mode to the program menu screen.
PART FIGURE: Displays the part figure definition screen for turning.
ALL DELETE: Deletes all data related to C axis figure already defined.
NEW:
Press this key when cancelling the data as to C axis figure
already defined and defining C axis figure newly.
CHECK ALL: Draws the figure in accordance with the defined data.
CURSOR : Moves the cursor forward and backward.
CURSOR
NEXT PAGE: Selects the data setting screen as the place which the
cursor points to. Adjust the cursor to the place of the
undefined number and press this soft key. The display
will return to the program menu screen.
1.3.1
Inserting or Deleting
Caxis Figure Data
B61804E2/05
1.3.2
Details of Caxis
Figure Data
WARNING
1 After entering part figure data, check the entered data.
Failure to enter correct data may result in the tool colliding
with the workpiece and/or machine, or forced machining
occurring, possibly causing damage to the workpiece,
machine, and/or tool itself, or injury to the user.
2 For a conversational program for which machining process
data has been prepared, if part figure data is modified, the
cutting area specified in the machining definition may be
changed. Operating the machine based on NC data in
memory, with an incorrect cutting area specified, may result
in the tool colliding with the workpiece and/or machine,
possibly causing damage to the machine and/or tool itself,
or injury to the user.
CAUTION
1 When entering threading data, check the data that is
automatically calculated by pressing the [OUTER
THREAD], [INNER THREAD], or [SQUARE THREAD] soft
key. If this data is incorrect, the workpiece cannot be
machined properly.
2 Check the figure data that is automatically inserted by the
batch input function for chamfering/corner R. If this data is
incorrect, the workpiece cannot be machined properly.
3 Check the figure data that is automatically created by the
pattern figure input function. If this data is incorrect, the
workpiece cannot be machined properly.
4 Check the data that is automatically set by the neck corner
input function. If this data is incorrect, the workpiece cannot
be machined properly.
129
B61804E2/05
The graphic data input screen is as shown below except Face Milling and
Side Milling.
ESCAPE:
Returns the display to the program menu screen.
BACK PAGE: Returns the display to C axis machining menu screen.
When this key is depressed in the cursor of data setting,
the already input data becomes invalid.
CHECK ALL: Draws the figure according to the input data. (All C axis
figure are drawn.)
CHECK:
Draws the figure according to the input data. (Only
patterns defined here are drawn.)
CURSOR : Moves the cursor forward and backward.
CURSOR :
NEXT PAGE: C axis machining menu screen proceeds.
(1) Insert screen for end face hole machining
POSITION (XAXIS) .
DEPTH . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HOLE DIAMETER . . .
CENTER DRILL . . . . .
B61804E2/05
131
B61804E2/05
132
B61804E2/05
133
B61804E2/05
134
B61804E2/05
135
B61804E2/05
CP request is displayed only for the 1st element. The PE request asks
which side should be cut for the element moving direction.
For 0, the right side is cut, and for 1, the left side is cut, and for 2, the part
on the line is cut.
INPUT
136
B61804E2/05
The group of elements that can drawn as a single stroke figure will
be displayed as a single figure, with periods marking the
boundaries between the figures. It is not possible to enter or delete
these periods directly from the keyboard.
2) The starting point of the first element for the first figure will be the
starting point for machining during the NC text creation, so this
should be taken into account when defining part figures.
Workpieces will be machined in the order in which the figures were
defined.
3) When defining the second and subsequent figures, first set the data
for the starting point and then press the key for the element symbol.
This is the only process that is different from defining the first
figure (when defining the first figure, the element symbol is entered
first and then the prompt for the starting point data will appear).
137
B61804E2/05
(c) Notes
NOTE
When defining multiple single stroke figure, the following
limitations are applicable:
(i)
It is not possible to change element directions (CP) for
single figures.
(ii) Figures with level differences cannot be defined.
(per one definition)
(iii) It is not possible to program front and rear
simultaneously.
Due to the above, from among the prompts for the starting
point element for the second and subsequent figures, the
following prompts are not mode:
(i)
Element direction (CP)
(ii) Z axis value for starting point
(d) Creating NC text
1) NC text is created for machining figures (defined in menu 2) in the
order in which they were defined.
2) When machining of one figure has been completed, the tool will
move away before heading toward the starting point for the next
figure (at fast feed speed). The direction of this initial movement
is as follows:
(i) When cutting elements to the left or right, the tool moves in the
X axis direction.
(ii)When cutting elements, the tool moves in the Z axis direction.
138
B61804E2/05
139
B61804E2/05
Expansion diagram)
140
B61804E2/05
NOTE
1 Cylindrical expansion diagram type differs according to the
round cutting figure drawing format.
a) When the drawing format is 1 or 3.
Expansion diagram
141
B61804E2/05
Expansion diagram
NOTE
2 Only one cylindrical groove figure, which is drawn as a
single stroke figure, can be defined; two or more cylindrical
groove figures cannot be defined. However, specifying a C
value of 360 or more (degrees) enables a figure with one or
more turns to be defined.
3 The following are not permitted for cylindrical groove figure
definition:
(1)Incremental input of the C value
(2)Specification of TL (tangent to the last figure) or TN
(tangent to the next figure)
(3)Specification of the radius value for a circular element
(4)Definition in list mode
142
B61804E2/05
1.4
MILLING IN
MULTIPLE PLANES
143
1.5
B61804E2/05
CAXIS MACHINING
WITH A MACHINING
PLANE SPECIFIED
7
0
6
0
5
0
4
0
3
0
2
0
144
B61804E2/05
145
B61804E2/05
(5) Warnings
WARNING
1 Be careful not to make the setting shown in Fig.1.5(b),
where a Caxis machining figure is on a plane which is not
machined. The system does not regard such setting as
being illegal.
If feed mode 2 is selected, the tool may strike against the
workpiece when holes b, c, and d are cut.
Area cut by milling
a
146
B61804E2/05
147
2. MACHINING DEFINITION
(MENU 4)
2. MACHINING DEFINITION
(MENU 4)
2.1
SPECIFICATION OF
CAXIS MACHINING
DEFINITION
2.1.1
Kind of Caxis
Machining
Specification
B61804E2/05
CAXIS C.DRIL . . .
drilling.
CAXIS DRILL . . . .
CAXIS TAP. . . . . . .
CAXIS GROOV. . .
CAXIS F.MILL . . .
CAXIS S.MILL . . .
SUB CYCLE . . . . . .
2.1.2
Tool Data for Caxis
Machining
WARNING
After entering tool data, check the entered data. Failure to
enter correct data may result in the tool colliding with the
workpiece and/or machine, possibly causing damage to the
machine and/or tool itself, or injury to the user.
After setting the type of machining, the setting screen of tools to be used
is displayed.
148
B61804E2/05
2. MACHINING DEFINITION
(MENU 4)
TURRET NO. . . . . . . .
TOOL SELECT NO. . .
TOOL OFFSET NO. . .
TOOL ID NO. . . . . . . .
TL =
TN =
TM =
ID =
(Note 1)
(Note 2)
NOTE
1 The turret number prompt is displayed if there are more than
1 tool rests. The number of tool rests is to be set in No. MTF
1050.
2 The tool ID number (ID) to be input must have been
registered in tool data (see VI2.1). If a tool ID number (ID)
not registered in tool data is input, a message This ID is not
registered in tool data. is displayed. Also if a tool ID number
having a tool type not compatible with the present process
is input, a message The tool type of this ID is not compatible
with the present process. is displayed. The registered tool
ID number is deleted from the tooling information if keyed
in as DEL INPUT.
When using a tool which has already been registered in the tooling
information, the other data is automatically displayed if the tool selection
number (TN) is input.
In new registration, the data of the tool configuration and that of setting
which have been registered in the tool data are displayed if the tool ID
number (ID) is input.
Display of tool figure data (The tool type (TP) and tool material (MT) are
displayed only; they cannot be changed.
(Center Drill)
TOOL TYPE
TOOL MATERIAL
TOOL DIAMETER . . . . . . . . .
CUT WIDTH . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CUT LENGTH . . . . . . . . . . . .
NOSE ANGLE . . . . . . . . . . . .
149
2. MACHINING DEFINITION
(MENU 4)
B61804E2/05
(Drill)
TOOL TYPE
TOOL MATERIAL . . . . . . . . .
TOOL DIAMETER . . . . . . . . .
CUT LENGTH . . . . . . . . . . . .
NOSE ANGLE . . . . . . . . . . . .
(Tap)
TOOL TYPE
TOOL MATERIAL
TOOL DIAMETER . . . . . . . . .
CUT LENGTH . . . . . . . . . . . .
PECK LENGTH . . . . . . . . . . .
PITCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(End mill)
TOOL TYPE
TOOL MATERIAL
TOOL DIAMETER . . . . . . . . .
CUT WIDTH . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CUT LENGTH . . . . . . . . . . . .
CUT COUNT . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Note that the message of tool type (TP) are displayed for 5700 series of
16T CAP II as follows:
Center drill (M)
Drill (M)
Tap (M)
End mill (M)
(5700 series)
Caxis center drill
Caxis drill
Caxis tap
Caxis end mill
NOTE
3 The setting of tool figure data can be disabled, and the data
can be displayed only. To do this, change the following
parameter setting:
No.702: 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0
Specifies whether tool figure data can be set in m
chining definition.
= 0: Tool figure data cannot be set. (Only the display is enabled.)
= 1: Tool figure data can be set.
B61804E2/05
2. MACHINING DEFINITION
(MENU 4)
NOTE
4 The holer number (HL) prompt is displayed if the optional
animation drawing function is available.
5 When a tool registered in the tool data is used, the set data
is registered as tooling information when the user proceeds
to the next screen by pressing the NEXT PAGE soft key.
WARNING
When NC data are created, the interference check or offset
calculation is performed for the tool data according to the
tool figure. If tool data is not input correctly, correct NC data
cannot be output.
2.1.3
When all tool data are input, the screen asks the machining start position.
Machining Start
Position
151
2. MACHINING DEFINITION
(MENU 4)
B61804E2/05
2.1.4
Cutting Conditions
WARNING
The cutting conditions are automatically set according to the
selected machining type. Check the set conditions. If the
conditions are incorrect, the tool may collide with the
workpiece and/or machine, or forced machining may occur,
possibly causing damage to the machine and/or tool itself,
or injury to the user.
(1) Center drilling
DEPTH OF CUT . . . . .
CLEARANCE . . . . . . .
RPM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FEED RATE . . . . . . . . .
D=
C1 =
N=
FT =
(2) Drilling
TYPE 1
CLEARANCE . . . . . . . C1 = Clearance 1 (mm or inch)
C2 = Clearance 2 (mm or inch)
DWELL ON/OFF . . . . DW =Specifies whether to perform
dwell at the bottom of the hole.
(0:Does not performs dwell, 1:
Performs dwell)
RPM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N = Tool rotation speed (rpm)
FEED RATE . . . . . . . . FT = Feed amount per tool rotation
(mm/rev)
152
B61804E2/05
TYPE 2
CLEARANCE . . . . . . . C1 =
C2 =
RETURN AMOUNT . U =
DEPTH OF CUT . . . . . D1 =
RPM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N =
FEED RATE . . . . . . . . FT =
TYPE 3
CLEARANCE . . . . . . . C1 =
C2 =
C3 =
DEPTH OF CUT . . . . . D1 =
RPM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N =
FEED RATE . . . . . . . . FT =
153
2. MACHINING DEFINITION
(MENU 4)
2. MACHINING DEFINITION
(MENU 4)
B61804E2/05
C2 =
V*1000/DT*PAI
(V = cutting speed value set in
the material data, DT = tool
diameter value set in the tool
data)
C1
C2
154
B61804E2/05
2. MACHINING DEFINITION
(MENU 4)
(3) Tapping
TYPE . . . . . . . . . TP = Type of tapping
(1: Tapping cycle, 2: Rigid tapping cycle)
CLEARANCE . . C1 = Clearance 1 (mm or inch)
C2 = Clearance 2 (mm or inch)
RPM . . . . . . . . . . N = Tool rotation speed (rpm)
155
2. MACHINING DEFINITION
(MENU 4)
B61804E2/05
(4) Grooving
CLEARANCE . . C1 = Clearance 1 (mm or inch)
RPM . . . . . . . . . . N = Tool rotation speed (rpm)
FEED RATE . . . . FR = Feed amount per machining pass in the tool
radial direction (mm/rev)
FT = Feed amount per machining pass in the tool
axial direction (mm/rev)
D Side (in the Z direction)
Caxis rotation
End surface
Caxis rotation
NOTE
For machining or , FR is subjected to unit conversion
to deg/min, then output to the NC data.
156
B61804E2/05
2. MACHINING DEFINITION
(MENU 4)
2. MACHINING DEFINITION
(MENU 4)
B61804E2/05
CAUTION
Whether to perform contour milling on an outer or inner
surface depends on the specified cutting position (CP) as
viewed in the direction in which the definitions of elements
for the part figure advance.
Outer surface contour milling:
Lefthand side as viewed in the direction in which the
definitions of elements advance
Inner surface contour millimg:
Righthand side as viewed in the direction in which the
definitions of elements advance
When cutting is performed on the element line,
differentiating between outer surface contour milling and
inner surface contour milling is unnecessary.
NOTE
Approach/escape type
The approach type and escape type for milling can be
selected from the following four patterns:
1) Direct approach (escape)
2) Tangent approach (escape)
3) Normal approach (escape)
4) Circular approach (escape)
When cutting is performed on an element, the system does
not prompt the user to enter the approach and escape
types.
Selection of approach/escape type is not valid for 5700
series of 16T CAP II.
158
B61804E2/05
2. MACHINING DEFINITION
(MENU 4)
159
2. MACHINING DEFINITION
(MENU 4)
B61804E2/05
371
Format
Initial value
Description
1.0
Real number
0.1
B61804E2/05
2. MACHINING DEFINITION
(MENU 4)
Tangent approach/retraction
For approach or retraction, a linear movement equal to the
extension is inserted. The following operation is performed. (The
illustration shows the compensation on the right side of the blank
outline.)
161
2. MACHINING DEFINITION
(MENU 4)
B61804E2/05
162
B61804E2/05
2. MACHINING DEFINITION
(MENU 4)
2.1.5
Specifying the Cutting
Position for Caxis
Machining
After the cutting condition screen, the screen to specify the cutting
position appears.
2. MACHINING DEFINITION
(MENU 4)
2.2
BLIND HOLE AND
THROUGH HOLE
B61804E2/05
Drilling
164
B61804E2/05
3. ANIMATED SIMULATION
FUNCTION (MENU 6)
For the 16TC CAP II and 16iTA CAP II, the animated simulation
function has been improved.
When using the above CAP II models, see Part XIII, ANIMATED
SIMULATION FUNCTION II.
165
3. ANIMATED SIMULATION
FUNCTION (MENU 6)
3.1
OUTLINE
B61804E2/05
166
B61804E2/05
3. ANIMATED SIMULATION
FUNCTION (MENU 6)
3.2
SPECIFICATION
3.2.1
Caxis FAPT Animated
Screen
3. ANIMATED SIMULATION
FUNCTION (MENU 6)
B61804E2/05
b) Caxis machining
1) XZ side view
The tool and the tool path are drawn in the same way as the
turning process. However, the machined part is not cut.
2) XC front view
The Caxis machining is drawn by the tool moving on the
workpiece contour. The outline of the tool is left over in the
machined part.
(Paint drawing is not done for the workpiece. A front view is
not rotated.)
The simulation of the machining of part A in Fig. 3.2.1 (a) is
shown in the Fig. 3.2.1 (c).
168
B61804E2/05
3. ANIMATED SIMULATION
FUNCTION (MENU 6)
For vertical lathes, the screens shown in Figs. 3.2.1 (d) and (e) are
displayed.
169
3. ANIMATED SIMULATION
FUNCTION (MENU 6)
B61804E2/05
3.2.2
Parameter Screen for
Animated Simulation
The next screen is displayed when the soft key PARAMETER is pushed
in Caxis FAPT animated screen.
B61804E2/05
171
4.1
B61804E2/05
MATERIAL DATA
FR
(Diameter
direction)
FT
(Axis
direction)
Center drill
Drill
Tap
End mill
(*) Set the feed amount per one blade in case of end mill.
(2) Cutting condition with the carbide tool in milling machining.
It is the same as (1).
NOTE
The increment system of the cutting speed is m/min or
feet/min.
The increment system of the feed rate is mm/rev or inch/rev.
The increment system of the infeed amount is mm or inch.
Refer to material data in chapter VI 1. for methods to set and
display the data.
172
B61804E2/05
4.2
TOOL DATA
4.2.1
Tool Data
173
4.2.2
B61804E2/05
It is possible to input and output the tool data and collate it in the
conventional way. The input and output format of the tool data for milling
machining is as follows.
CINOOOP
CINOOOP
CINOOOP
CINOOOP
CINOOOP
CINOOOP
CINOOOP
CINOOOP
CINOOOP
CINOOOP
CINOOOP
CINOOOP
CINOOOP
CINOOOP;
CINOOOP;
CINOOOP;
CINOOOP;
CINOOOP;
CINOOOP;
CINOOOP
CINOOOP
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
Tool ID number
Tool type
Cutting diameter
Tool length
Tool tip angle
Tool diameter
Peck length
Pitch
Setting position (Yaxis)
Setting position (Xaxis)
Setting position (Zaxis)
No. of blades
Tool material
(ID)
(TP)
(DS)
(LT)
(AT)
(DT)
(LE)
(PT)
(YS)
(XS)
(ZS)
(NT)
(MT)
;
;
Holder No.
Tool information 2
(HL)
(FLAG 2)
#6
#5
#4
174
#3
#2
#1
#0
B61804E2/05
4.2.3
Displaying and Setting
of Tooling Informations
The display method of the tooling information list screens is as usual. The
screen moves to the tooling information setting screen when the soft key
DATA SETTING is pushed on this screen. The screens of four kinds
are prepared by the tool type.
TOOL OFFSET NO. . . . . . . . TM =
TOOL ID NO. . . . . . . . . . . . . ID = (Note 1)
NOTE
The tool ID number (ID) to be input must have been
registered in tool data. If a number not registered in tool
data is input, a message This ID is not registered in tool
data. is displayed. The registered ID is deleted from the
tooling information if keyed in as DEL INPUT.
When the tool ID number (ID) is input, the tool registered in tool data is
tooled and the data of the tool configuration and that of setting are set.
Display of tool figure data (The tool type (TP) and tool material (MT) are
displayed only; they cannot be changed.)
Note that the messages of the tool type (TP) for 5700 series of 16T CAP
II are displayed as follows:
Center drill (M)
Drill (M)
Tap (M)
End mill (M)
(5700 series)
Caxis center drill
Caxis drill
Caxis tap
Caxis end mill
(Center Drill)
TOOL TYPE
TOOL MATERIAL
TOOL DIAMETER . . . . . .
CUT WIDTH . . . . . . . . . .
CUT LENGTH . . . . . . . . .
NOSE ANGLE . . . . . . . . .
175
B61804E2/05
(Drill)
TOOL TYPE
TP; Drill (M)
TOOL MATERIAL
MT;
TOOL DIAMETER . . . . . . DT =
CUT LENGTH . . . . . . . . . LT =
NOSE ANGLE . . . . . . . . . AT =
(Tap)
TOOL TYPE
TP; Tap (M)
TOOL MATERIAL
MT;
TOOL DIAMETER . . . . . . DT =
CUT LENGTH . . . . . . . . . LT =
PECK LENGTH . . . . . . . . LE =
PITCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PT =
(End mill)
TOOL TYPE
TP; End mill (M)
TOOL MATERIAL
MT;
TOOL DIAMETER . . . . . . DT =
CUT WIDTH . . . . . . . . . . DS =
CUT LENGTH . . . . . . . . . LT =
CUT COUNT . . . . . . . . . . NT =
Prompts on data setting (Common to all tool types)
SETTING DIRECTION . . . . . CP = (0: Side machining,
1: End machining)
SETTING POSITION . . . . . . . XS =
ZS =
ROTATION DIRECTION . . . . TR = (0: Forwards,
1: Backwards)
HOLDER NO. . . . . . . . . . . . . . HL =
(Note)
NOTE
The holer number (HL) prompt is displayed if the optional
animation drawing function is available.
176
B61804E2/05
177
5. MTF
B61804E2/05
MTF
WARNING
When a system parameter value or an MTF parameter
value is modified, check the prepared NC data. Machining
with incorrect NC data may result in the tool colliding with the
workpiece and/or machine, or forced machining occurring,
possibly causing damage to the machine and/or tool itself,
or injury to the user.
178
B61804E2/05
5.1
MTF SETTING WHEN
CAXIS FAPT
FUNCTION IS USED
5. MTF
(1) FANUC standard preset value for MTF 2200 (The servo motor control
system is standard)
MTF
2200 = 0100, 0004, 1105, 0004, 1005, 0004, 4102, 8107, 0004, 0000
FEED ;
M05 ;
MXX ;
G28 H0
;
2201 = 0003, 0004, 0605, 0004, 0000, 0000
TXX00 ;
M01 ;
2202 = 4402, 1101, 0001, AA01, 0004, 0002, 0103, 0004, 0000, 0000
G50 X
Z
C
;
G00 TXXX;
2203 = 5702, 5802, 6002, 6102, 1101, 0001, AA01, 0903, 0C03, 0503
G17 G98 G98 G81 X
Z
C
R
P
F
G18 G99
G82
G19
2204 = 0B03, 0004, 0000, 0000
L
;
2205 = 5702, 5802, 6002, 6202, 1101, 0001, AA01, 0903, 0A03, 0503
G17 G98 G98 G83 X
Z
C
R
Q
F
G18 G99 G83.1
G19
2206 = 0B03, 0004, 0000, 0000
L
;
2207 = 5702, 5802, 6002, 6302, 1101, 0001, AA01, 0903, 0503, 0B03
G17 G98 G98 G84 X
Z
C
R
F
L
G18 G99 G84.1
G19
2208 = 0004, 0000, 0000, 0000
;
2209 = 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000
(Not used)
2210 = 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000 (Not used)
2211 = 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000
179
5. MTF
B61804E2/05
1105,
M05
1105,
M05
1105,
M05
0004,
;
0004,
;
0004,
;
1005,
MXX
1005,
MXX
1005,
MXX
0004
;
0004
;
0004
;
180
B61804E2/05
5. MTF
181
5. MTF
B61804E2/05
182
B61804E2/05
5.2
NC DATA OUTPUT
5. MTF
0004, 0000
;
0004, 0000, 0000, 0000
;
0004, 0000, 0000, 0000
;
0004, 0000, 0000, 0000
;
4102, 8107, 0004, 0000
G28 H0
;
183
5. MTF
B61804E2/05
Machining definition
Process 1: Outside diameter roughing
Process 2: Outside diameter finishing
Process 3: Caxis machining (Drilling end face: Center drilling) A
Process 4: Caxis machining (Drilling end face: Drilling) A
Process 5: Caxis machining (Drilling end face: Tapping) A
Process 6: Caxis machining (Grooving end face) B
Process 7: Caxis machining (Drilling side: Drilling) C
Process 8: Caxis machining (Grooving side face) D
Machining shape
184
B61804E2/05
5. MTF
%;
O01:
G50X400.Z400.;
M05;
M18;
G28H0;
G50X300.Z300.C0;
G00T0101;
G97S2000M13;
X40.;
Z92.;
G17G98G81Z85.R92.F350.;
C90.;
C180.;
C270.;
G00Z300.;
X300.;
T0100;
M01;
G50X300.Z300.C270. ;
G00T0202 ;
G97S1393M13 ;
X40. ;
Z92. ;
C0 ;
G82Z75.R92.P80.F139. ;
C90. ;
C180. ;
C270. ;
G00Z300. ;
X300. ;
T0200 ;
M01 ;
G50X300.Z300.C270. ;
G00T0303 ;
G97S159M13 ;
X40. ;
Z92. ;
C0 ;
G84Z76.R92.F318. ;
C90. ;
C180. ;
C270. ;
G00Z300. ;
X300. ;
T0300 ;
M01 ;
G50X300.Z300.C270. ;
G00T0404
G97S2000M13 ;
X87. ;
Z92. ;
C60 ;
Z42. ;
G01Z35F26. ;
C120.F65. ;
G00Z42. ;
Z92. ;
C240. ;
Z42. ;
G01Z35.F26. ;
C300.F65. ;
G00Z42. ;
Z92. ;
Z300. ;
X300. ;
T0400 ;
M01;
G50X300.Z300.C300.;
G00T0505;
G97S1393M13;
Z25.;
X104.;
C0;
G19G82X83.R104.P0.08F139.;
C180.;
G00X300.;
Z300.;
T0500;
M01;
G50X300.Z300.C180.;
G00T0606;
G97S2000M13;
Z50.;
X104.;
C90;
X79.;
G01X70.F26.;
Z66.F65.;
G00X79.;
X104.;
Z50.C210.;
X79.;
G01X70.F26.;
Z66.F65.;
G00X79.;
185
X104.;
Z50.C330.;
X79.;
G01X70.F26
.;
Z66.F65.;
G00X79.;
X104.;
X300.;
Z300.;
T0600;
M01;
X400.Z400.;
M01;
M05;
M30;
%
5. MTF
B61804E2/05
2018 =
2031 =
2032 =
2200 =
2201 =
2202 =
2203 =
2204 =
2205 =
2206 =
CH
1
0
13
14
50
60
20
45
0100, 0004,
FEED ;
0100, 0004,
FEED ;
0100, 0004,
FEED ;
5202, 5002,
G90 G00
G91 G01
5202, 5002,
G90 G00
G91 G01
5202, 5002,
G90 G00
G91 G01
5202, 5002,
G90 G00
G91 G01
0100, 0004,
FEED ;
0003, 0004,
TXX00 ;
4402, 1101,
G50 X
5702, 5802,
G17 G98
G18 G99
G19
0B03, 0004,
L
;
5702, 5802,
G17 G98
G18 G99
G19
0B03, 0004,
L
;
1105,
M05
1105,
M05
1105,
M05
1101,
X
0004,
;
0004,
;
0004,
;
0001,
Z
1405,
M60
1405,
M60
1405,
M60
0000,
0004
;
0004
;
0004
;
0503, 0004, 0000
F
;
0004,
;
0004,
;
0000,
0004,
;
6102, 1101,
G81 X
G82
0000, 0000
6002, 6202, 1101, 0001, 0000, 0903, 0A03, 0503
G98 G83 X
Z
R
Q
F
G83.1
0000, 0000
2207 = 5702, 5802, 6002, 6302, 1101, 0001, 0000, 0903, 0503, 0B03
G17 G98 G98 G84 X
Z
R
F
L
G18 G99
G84.1
G19
2208 = 0004, 0000, 0000, 0000
;
2211 = 1205, 0004, 0000, 0000
M2X ;
B61804E2/05
5. MTF
Machining definition
Process 1: Outside diameter roughing
Process 2: Outside diameter finishing
Process 3: Caxis machining A (Drilling end face: Center drilling)
Process 4: Caxis machining A (Drilling end face: Drilling)
Process 5: Caxis machining A (Drilling end face: Tapping)
Process 6: Caxis machining B (Drilling side face: Drilling)
Process 7: Caxis machining C (Grooving side face)
Machining shape
187
5. MTF
B61804E2/05
%;
O10:
G50X400.Z400.;
M05;
M50;
G50X300.Z300.;
G00T0101;
G97S2000M13;
X40.;
Z92.;
G17G98G81Z85.R92.F350.;
M21;
M21;
M21;
G00Z300.;
X300.;
T0100;
M01;
G50X300.Z300.;
G00T0202 ;
G97S1393M13 ;
X40. ;
Z92. ;
M21 ;
G82Z75.R92.P80.F139. ;
M21 ;
M21 ;
M21 ;
G00Z300. ;
X300. ;
T0200 ;
M01 ;
G50X300.Z300. ;
G00T0303 ;
G97S1593M13 ;
X40. ;
Z92. ;
M21 ;
G84Z76.R92.F318. ;
M21 ;
M21 ;
M21 ;
C00Z300. ;
X300. ;
T0300 ;
M01 ;
188
G50X300.Z300. ;
G00T0404 ;
G97S1393M13 ;
Z25. ;
X104. ;
M22 ;
G19G82X83.R104.P0.08F139
M23 ;
G00X300. ;
Z300. ;
T0400 ;
M01 ;
G50X300.Z300. ;
G00T0505 ;
G97S2587M13 ;
Z50. ;
X104. ;
M24 ;
X79. ;
G01X70.F26. ;
Z66.F65. ;
G00X79.;
X104.;
Z50.;
M24.;
X79.;
G01X70.F26.;
Z66.F65.;
G00X79.;
X104.;
X300.;
Z300.;
T0500;
M01;
X400.Z400.;
M01;
M05;
M30;
%
B61804E2/05
5. MTF
CH
1
1
13
14
50
60
1105,
M05
1105,
M05
1105,
M05
1101,
X
0004,
;
0004,
;
0004,
;
0001,
Z
1405,
M60
1405,
M60
1405,
M60
0000,
0004
;
0004
;
0004
;
0503, 0004, 0000
F
;
0004, 1305,
;
M50
0004, 0000,
;
AA01, 0004,
C
;
6102, 1101,
G81 X
G82
0000, 0000
6002, 6202, 1101, 0001, 0000, 0903, 0A03, 0503
G98 G83 X
Z
R
Q
F
G83.1
0000, 0000
6002, 6302, 1101, 0001, 0000, 0903, 0503, 0B03
G98 G84 X
Z
R
F
L
G84.1
5. MTF
B61804E2/05
%;
O10:
G50X400.Z400.;
M05;
M50;
G50X300.Z300.C0;
G00T0101;
G97S2000M13;
X40.;
Z92.;
G17G98G81Z85.R92.F350.;
C90.;
C180.;
C270.;
G00Z300.;
X300. ;
T0100 ;
M01 ;
G50X300.Z300.C270. ;
G00T0202 ;
G97S1393M13 ;
X40. ;
Z92. ;
C0 ;
G87Z75.R92.P80.F139. ;
C90. ;
C180. ;
C270. ;
G00Z300. ;
X300. ;
T0200 ;
M01 ;
G50X300.Z300.C270. ;
G00T0303 ;
G97S159M13 ;
X40. ;
Z92. ;
C0 ;
G84Z76.R92.F318. ;
C90. ;
C180. ;
C270. ;
G00Z300. ;
X300. ;
T0300 ;
M01 ;
190
G50X300.Z300.C270. ;
G00T0404 ;
G97S1393M13 ;
Z25. ;
X104. ;
C60 ;
C45 ;
G19G82X83.R104.P0.08F139.
C225 ;
G00X300. ;
Z300. ;
T0400 ;
M01 ;
G50X300.Z300.C225. ;
G00T0505 ;
G97S2000M13 ;
Z50. ;
X104.;
C90.;
X79.;
G01X70.F26.;
Z66.F65.;
G00X79.;
X104.;
Z50.;
C315.;
X79.;
G01X70.F26.;
Z66.F65.;
G00X79.;
X104.;
X300.;
Z300.;
T0500;
M01;
X400.Z400.;
M01;
M05;
M30;
%
B61804E2/05
5. MTF
Lathe turning
machining process
Caxis clutch on
First Caxis machining
process
Approach, machining,
and escape
Final Caxis
machining process
Caxis clutch off
M05;
M30;
%
191
5. MTF
B61804E2/05
Meaning
Setting Value
1313
1314
2024
0002, 0105, 0004, 0006, 0004, 1002, 0203, 0005, 0004, 0000
G00 M05 ;
M?? ;
G97 S
M03 ;
M04
M??
M??
2200
2201
2202
Caxis machining
coordinate system setting
Tool selection T code
command
0705, 504F, 1F40, 0004, 0103, 0004, 4402, 1101, 0001, 0004
M98 P
8000 ;
T??? ;
G50 X
Z
;
Lathe turning
machining process
First Caxis
machining process
Approach, machining,
and escape
192
B61804E2/05
5. MTF
M98P8000;
T0303;
G50X_ Z_ ;
:
:
:
Y0300;
M98P8001;
:
:
:
M98P8000;
T0505;
G50X_ Z_ ;
:
:
:
T0500;
M98P8001;
First Caxis
machining process
M05;
M30;
%
NOTE
No NC programs with program numbers 8000 and 8001 can
be output in the FAPT.
Thus, manually create them beforehand.
O8000;
M05;
M;
G28H0. ;
G50C0. ;
M99;
O8001;
M
;
M01;
M99;
Caxis clutch on
193
5. MTF
5.3
RIGID TAPPING NC
DATA INPUT
B61804E2/05
For both general tapping and rigid tapping processes, select the Caxis
tapping process. Whether general tapping or rigid tapping is to be
performed is set in the cutting conditions.
(1) Cutting conditions
In response to the prompt TYPE, set either 1 (general tapping) or 2
(rigid tapping).
WARNING
1 An M code is output only for forward spindle rotation. So,
the value set in MTF No.1313 is output. In the above
example, MTF No.1313 is set to 13.
2 M code specifying the rigid mode. In the above example,
the value set in MTF No.1350 (MTF No.1321 for 5700 series
of 16T CAP II) is output.
194
5. MTF
B61804E2/05
195
One low-order
digit
Function
Preparation
5. MTF
B61804E2/05
5.4
FACE MILLING
Data for face milling shape in Fig. 5.4 (a) are as follows:
(1) ELEMENT SYMBOL
POSITION
START POINT
CUTTING POS.
EBD POINT
ANGLE FROM C
Z = 70
X0 = 80
C0 = 0
PE = 0
DX = 40
A = 30
DX = 40
DX = 80
C=0
DX = 40
A = 30
DX = 40
196
DX = 80
C=0
B61804E2/05
197
5. MTF
5. MTF
198
B61804E2/05
B61804E2/05
5. MTF
Cutter compensation:
0 : Performed by FAPT (G40/41/42 not output)
1 : Performed by NC (G40/41/42 output)
199
5. MTF
B61804E2/05
Example 1:
Cutting on the right of the element
N1 X134. :
N2 Z5. ;
N3 C52.063 ;
N4 G12.1 ;
N5 G1 X115.015 F78. ;
N6 X28.07 C55.769 ;
N7 X32.703 C64.974 ;
N8 G13.1 ;
N9 G0 Z150. ;
N10 X150. ;
200
B61804E2/05
5. MTF
201
5. MTF
5.5
B61804E2/05
SIDE MILLING
Expansion diagram
B61804E2/05
5. MTF
Tool data and cutting condition data are set as given below.
(Tool data)
TOOL DIAMETER . . . . . . . .
CUT WIDTH . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CUT LENGTH . . . . . . . . . . . .
CUT COUNT . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SETTING DIRECTION . . . . .
DT = 10
DS = 10
LT = 30
NT = 4
CP = 0 (face use)
(Cutting condition)
SPEED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N = 4138
FEED RATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FR = 0.025
FT = 0.01
CLEARANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . C1 = 2
Sample MTF setting
No.1305 = 00000000
No.1340 = 0
No.1341 = 0
No.2209 = 0102, 5702, 0170, 8107, 0004, 6402, AA01, 0004, 0000, 0000
G1
G18 W0 H0
;
G7.1 C
;
G19
G107
No.2210 = 6402, AA01, 0004, 0000
G7.1 C
;
G107
203
5. MTF
B61804E2/05
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
Bit 0 Unused
Bit 1 Coolant
0 : not used
1 : used
Bit 2 Tool compensation cancel
0 : not output
1 : output
Bit 3, 4 Approach (X, Z, C axis)
00: simultaneous 1 axis
01: simultaneous 2 axis
11, 10 : simultaneous 3 axis
Bit 5 Return relief (X, Z axis)
0 : simultaneous 2 axis
1 : simultaneous 1 axis
Bit 7 Transit point setting screen
0 : not displayed
1 : displayed
(2) Side milling machining process single step
Bit
315
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
2
Initial value (green)
204
#0
5. MTF
B61804E2/05
2) MTF
Initial
value
No.
Format
Description
1305
BIT
1340
Integer
1341
Integer
2209
Function table
2210
Function table
Function code
Three high-order
digits
One low-order
digit
Function
Outputs a G code FS15: G7.1
for cylindrical
FS16: G107
interpolation.
CAUTION
1 If MTF No.1344 is 0 (the Caxis is parallel to the Xaxis),
G18 is output as the plane selection command at the start
of circular interpolation. In this case, a lefthanded
coordinate system is used. If 1344 is 1 (the Caxis is
parallel to the Yaxis), the plane selection command is G19,
and righthanded coordinate system is used.
2 For the G1 move command at the start of cylindrical
interpolation, dummy values W0 and H0 are a output. This
means that approach takes place before the start of
cylindrical interpolation.
3 The cylinder radius specified in the cylindrical interpolation
command is output in the least input increment for the axis
specified in MTF No.1341.
4 If bit 1 of MTF No.1305 is set to 0, the cylinder radius
specified in the cylindrical interpolation command is output
without a decimal point. If bit 1 of MTF No.1305 is set to 1,
the radius is output with a decimal point. (MTF No.1305 is
also referenced for the C0 value output at the end of
cylindrical interpolation.)
205
5. MTF
5.6
G85/G89 BORING
CYCLE
B61804E2/05
Format
Description
1376
Real
number
Boring cycle:
front face
85
89
1377
Real
number
Boring cycle:
side face
89
89
Repeat count
Feedrate (feed per revolution)
Dwell time at the bottom of the hole
Distance between the initial point and the reference point
2) For 15TFB/15TTFB
2216 =5702, 5802, 6002, 6702, 1101, 0001, AA01, 0903, 0C03, 0503
G17 G98 G98 G89 X
Z
C
R
P
F
G18 G99
G19
Feedrate (feed per revolution)
Dwell time at the bottom of the hole
Repeat count
NOTE
A new function code, 6702, has been provided to enable
output of a boring cycle G code.
206
B61804E2/05
207
B61804E2/05
6.1
SIMULTANEOUS
AXIS MOVE
CONTROL OF
APPROACH AND
RETURN RELIEF
6.1.1
Setting of Parameter
6.1.2
Specification of Move
Order at the Time of
the Approach
6.1.3
Type of NC Data
208
B61804E2/05
6.2
SPINDLE
POSITIONING
METHOD
209
B61804E2/05
210
B61804E2/05
7.1
FIGURE DEFINITION
A figure can be defined in the same way as a face milling defined in (7)
of Section 1.3.2 of this part, except for the following restrictions:
(1) If multiple face millings are defined in a single definition, this function
is not supported.
(2) If cutting on an entity is defined, this function is not supported.
211
7.2
MACHINING
DEFINITION
B61804E2/05
Machining type
Select CAXIS F. MILL process from the machining definition
screen.
Tool data
Use an end mill tool for milling.
Cutting conditions
The DRIVE ...DR= prompt is displayed on the cutting condition
screen before the prompt for the machining method. To perform
infeed machining, define 1. Otherwise, define 0.
When a cutting condition is newly defined, initial values are defined.
When a family program that has been created using an earlier version
is loaded, 0 is defined.
Select and define one of the following three types of infeed
machining methods.
DRIVE...DR = (1: on 0: off)
Infeed machining methods ... TP =
Select one of the following machining types. (initial value: 2)
1: Roughing
2: Finishing
3: Roughing finishing
B61804E2/05
However, note the following points when defining data because they
are not checked upon the creation of an NC format.
CAUTION
1 When cutting a face milling from the outside diameter,
setting too great a cutting allowance results in an excess air
cut.
2 When cutting a pocketed face milling from the inner surface,
setting too great a cutting allowance may result in excessive
cutting of a parts figure.
Automatic process determination
When a face milling is defined using the automatic process
determination function, method 2 without infeed machining is set.
Therefore, to use this function, modification is required on the cutting
condition screen.
213
7.3
SYSTEM
PARAMETERS
B61804E2/05
Format
Initial value
Description
372
Real number
0.2
373
Real number
7.4
MTF
214
B61804E2/05
7.5
(1) Roughing
(a) Tool path viewed from an end face
TOOL PATH
DRAWING
Operation is as follows:
D
TX+DT/2
(Finishing allowance along the X axis
direction + tool diameter/2)
W1
(Cutting width)
B61804E2/05
TZ (Finishing allowance)
RZ (Cutting allowance)
X
D1 (Cutting depth)
D
W1 (Cutting width)
RX
(Cutting allowance)
Z
Side view of a face milling
B61804E2/05
D
TX
(Finishing
allowance)
Z
Side view of a face milling
217
B61804E2/05
1. OVERVIEW
OVERVIEW
221
1. OVERVIEW
1.1
DRILLING
B61804E2/05
Both on a side face and end face, hole figures can be specified on a
circumference (CIRCLE HOLE), line (LINE HOLE), or at a desired
position (RANDOM HOLE).
222
B61804E2/05
1. OVERVIEW
1.2
MILLING
1) Machining a pattern
On a side face and end face, a rectangle with rounded corners, like that
shown below, can be programmed as a pattern.
223
1. OVERVIEW
B61804E2/05
224
B61804E2/05
1.3
ROTATING THE
MACHINING PLANE
1. OVERVIEW
If the Caxis angles (phase) of the desired machining planes are specified,
as well as the figure to be machined, the figure can be machined on the
specified planes.
The following figure shows holes of identical figures machined on plane
A (0), plane B (90), plane C (180), and plane D (270). Only a single
hole figure is programmed for this machining.
225
226
B61804E2/05
B61804E2/05
2.1
SPECIFYING A
YAXIS MACHINING
PROFILE
After the figure of a part to be turned is input using menu 2, the following
soft keys are displayed on the screen.
Press the [YAXIS MENU] soft key. The menu screen for programming
a Yaxis machining profile is displayed.
Upon the display of the FIGURE TYPE = prompt, input the number of
the desired machining profile (1 to 10). The detailed data input screen is
displayed.
NOTE
Up to 10 profiles can be input.
227
B61804E2/05
Soft keys
ESCAPE:
PART FIGURE:
ALL DELETE:
NEW:
CHECK ALL:
CURSOR
CURSOR:
NEXT PAGE:
228
B61804E2/05
2.2
SPECIFYING THE
YAXIS FIGURE
DATA
WARNING
1 After entering part figure data, check the entered data.
Failure to enter correct data may result in the tool colliding
with the workpiece and/or machine, or forced machining
occurring, possibly causing damage to the workpiece,
machine, and/or tool itself, or injury to the user.
2 For a conversational program for which machining process
data has been prepared, if part figure data is modified, the
cutting area specified in the machining definition may be
changed. Operating the machine based on NC data in
memory, with an incorrect cutting area specified, may result
in the tool colliding with the workpiece and/or machine,
possibly causing damage to the machine and/or tool itself,
or injury to the user.
CAUTION
1 When entering threading data, check the data that is
automatically calculated by pressing the [OUTER
THREAD], [INNER THREAD], or [SQUARE THREAD] soft
key. If this data is incorrect, the workpiece cannot be
machined properly.
2 Check the figure data that is automatically inserted by the
batch input function for chamfering/corner R. If this data is
incorrect, the workpiece cannot be machined properly.
3 Check the figure data that is automatically created by the
pattern figure input function. If this data is incorrect, the
workpiece cannot be machined properly.
4 Check the data that is automatically set by the neck corner
input function. If this data is incorrect, the workpiece cannot
be machined properly.
229
B61804E2/05
The data input screen, featuring a figure for Yaxis machining (excluding
the machining of a figure on a side face or end face) is configured as shown
below:
Soft keys
ESCAPE:
Returns the display to the program menu screen.
BACK PAGE: Returns the display to Y axis machining menu screen.
When this key is depressed in the course of data setting,
the already input data becomes invalid.
CHECK:
Draws the figure according to the input data.
(Only patterns defined here are drawn.)
CURSOR
CURSOR:
Moves the cursor forward and backward.
NEXT PAGE: Y axis machining menu screen proceeds.
(1) Screen for specifying holes on a circumference on the end face
B61804E2/05
TAPPING:
PITCH:
C.CENTER (XAXIS):
(YAXIS):
CIRCLE RADIUS:
INTERVAL:
HOLE QUANTITY:
ANGLE:
POS.QUANTITY:
POSITION ANGLE:
231
B61804E2/05
B61804E2/05
POS.QUANTITY:
POSITION ANGLE:
NG =
G1 =
G2 =
G3 =
G4 =
G5 =
G6 =
(3) Screen for specifying holes at desired positions on the end face
HOLE POSITION:
POS.QUANTITY:
POSITION ANGLE:
234
B61804E2/05
B61804E2/05
POSITION ANGLE:
G1 =
G2 =
G3 =
G4 =
G5 =
G6 =
B61804E2/05
B61804E2/05
HOLE PITCH:
HOLE QUANTITY:
HOLE POSITION:
SHIFT VALUE:
POS.QUANTITY:
POSITION ANGLE:
237
B61804E2/05
DEPTH:
DT = Hole depth
THREADING DIA:
WT = Hole diameter
THROUGH HOLE:
CENTER DRILL:
TAPPING:
PITCH:
PT = Pitch of tapping
HOLE QUANTITY:
HOLE POSITION:
POS.QUANTITY:
238
B61804E2/05
POSITION ANGLE:
239
G1 =
G2 =
G3 =
G4 =
G5 =
G6 =
B61804E2/05
240
B61804E2/05
241
B61804E2/05
When the [CHECK] soft key is pressed on the detailed figure data setting
screen, the figure is drawn according to the data set as shown above. If
a figure has been programmed with symbolic keys, the figure is drawn
simultaneously. The screen used for programming a figure does not have
the [CHECK] soft key. (See (12) and (13) below.)
The figure above shows the hole figures on the side face. The side view
on the left shows the hole positions in the YZ plane. The front view, on
the right, shows the position of the drilling plane with a dotted line.
If hole figures on the end face are displayed, the front view, on the right,
indicates the hole positions in the XY plane with circles (D). The side
view, on the left, uses a dotted line to indicate the drilling plane.
(10) Screen for checking an entire figure
When the [CHECK ALL] soft key is pressed on the Yaxis figure
definition menu screen, the figure selected with the cursor is drawn as
shown above.
To draw another programmed figure, press the [LAST FIGURE] or
[NEXT FIGURE] soft key.
242
B61804E2/05
The XY plane is drawn and the prompts relating to the figure elements and
coordinates are displayed. Input a desired figure, using symbolic keys.
The following figure elements can be specified:
RC
243
B61804E2/05
RC
B61804E2/05
NOTE
A figure cannot be defined in directory mode.
[Additional information 1]
(a) Defining a figure
1) Once a desired figure (singlestroke figure) has been defined, the
following prompt is displayed:
ES =
In response to the prompt, press the INPUT key or the [NEXT
PAGE] soft key. Then, the following prompt is displayed:
DEFINE ANOTHER FIGURE? (1: YES, 0: NO)
To define only one singlestroke figures, enter 0 (NO). The Yaxis
menu screen is displayed.
To define tow or more singlestroke figures, enter 1 (YES). The
prompt relating to the start point of the next figure is displayed.
(Usually, the prompt relating to the start point is displayed after the
first figure element has been entered. In this case, however, the
prompt is displayed before any figure elements have been entered.)
If the INPUT key or the [NEXT PAGE] soft key is pressed in
response to the ES = prompt, before the end point of the last
element has been determined, the NO END POINT OF THE
LAST FIGURE error message is displayed. The subsequent
screen is not displayed.
2) Specify the start point of each figure with an absolute value. The
start point of the second or subsequent figure cannot be specified
with an incremental value relative to the coordinates of the end
point of the previous figure.
3) If multiple figures are defined, a dividing point between figures is
represented by a period (.).
4) Deleting and inserting a figure element
(i) Position the cursor to the element to be deleted and press the
[ELEMENT DELETE] soft key.
A period (.), which is used as the element to divide figures,
cannot be deleted. If an attempt is made to delete a period, the
THE KEY IS INVALID message is displayed.
(ii)To insert a figure element, simply follow the procedure for
defining a part figure.
To insert a figure between
alreadydefined figures, follow the steps described below:
(1) Position the cursor to the period (.) dividing the existing
figures.
(2) Press the [FIGURE INSERT] soft key.
(3) A prompt relating to the start point of the next figure is
displayed. In response to this prompt, enter the necessary
data. Then, follow the procedure for defining a part figure.
245
B61804E2/05
246
B61804E2/05
DXH =
ZH =
YH =
Index position
DXI =
ZI =
YI =
247
4. DEFINING MACHINING
(MENU 4)
248
B61804E2/05
B61804E2/05
4. DEFINING MACHINING
(MENU 4)
4.1
MACHINING
DEFINITION MENU
The soft keys of (a), below, are displayed. Select the desired type of
Yaxis machining. If the rightmost soft key [
] is pressed, the
subsequent sets of soft keys are displayed in the following order:
(a) (b) (c) (d) (e)
(a) Yaxis machining
249
4. DEFINING MACHINING
(MENU 4)
B61804E2/05
(d) Turning
(e) Grooving/threading
NOTE
1 Pattern machining on an end face or side face is defined.
2 Machining of a figure on an end face or side face is defined.
250
B61804E2/05
4.2
4. DEFINING MACHINING
(MENU 4)
1) Tool data
TOOL DATA
DT =
DS =
LT =
AT =
Drill
TOOL DIAMETER:
CUT LENGTH:
NOSE ANGLE:
DT =
LT =
AT =
Tap
TOOL DIAMETER:
CUT LENGTH:
TECH LENGH:
PITCH:
DT =
LT =
LE =
PT =
End mill
TOOL DIAMETER:
CUT WIDTH:
TOOTH LENGTH:
NUMBER OF TEETH:
DT =
DS =
LT =
NT =
251
4. DEFINING MACHINING
(MENU 4)
B61804E2/05
252
B61804E2/05
4. DEFINING MACHINING
(MENU 4)
4.3
CUTTING AREA
When two or more figures are machined in a single process, the cutting
area definition screen is displayed. On this screen, the target figures are
drawn as shown above. Press the [LAST FIGURE] or [NEXT FIGURE]
soft key to select the desired figure.
253
4. DEFINING MACHINING
(MENU 4)
B61804E2/05
4.4
CUTTING
CONDITIONS
WARNING
The cutting conditions are automatically set according to the
selected machining type. Check the set conditions. If the
conditions are incorrect, the tool may collide with the
workpiece and/or machine, or forced machining may occur,
possibly causing damage to the machine and/or tool itself,
or injury to the user.
1) Cutting conditions
Enter the following cutting conditions for the machining:
a. Yaxis center drilling
DEPTH OF CUT: D1 = Depth of cut (mm)
CLEARANCE:
C1 = Clearance 1 (mm)
RPM:
N=
FEEDRATE:
b. Yaxis drilling
b1. Drilling method 1
CLEARANCE:
C1 = Clearance 1 (mm)
C2 = Clearance 2 (mm)
N=
FEEDRATE:
C1 = Clearance 1 (mm)
C2 = Clearance 2 (mm)
RETRACTION:
U=
N=
FEEDRATE:
C1 = Clearance 1 (mm)
C2 = Clearance 2 (mm)
C3 = Clearance 3 (mm)
N=
FEEDRATE:
254
B61804E2/05
4. DEFINING MACHINING
(MENU 4)
c. Yaxis tapping
c1. Tapping method 1
CLEARANCE: C1 = Clearance 1 (mm)
C2 = Clearance 2 (mm)
RPM:
N = Tool rotational speed (rpm)
c2. Tapping method 2 (rigid tapping)
CLEARANCE: C1 = Clearance 1 (mm)
C2 = Clearance 2 (mm)
RPM:
N = Tool rotational speed (rpm)
c3. Tapping method 3 (rigid tapping with pecking):
FANUC Series 15TFB/TTFB only
CLEARANCE: C1 = Clearance 1 (mm)
C2 = Clearance 2 (mm)
DEPTH OF CUT: D1 = Depth of cut (mm)
RPM:
N = Tool rotational speed (rpm)
d. Yaxis pattern machining (grooving/pocketing)
d1. Machining method 1 (See 2) Cutting patterns.)
CUTTING DIRECTION: CD = Cutting direction
(See (*) Cf1 below.)
DIRECTION OF CUT: DR = Direction of cut
(See (*) Cf1 below.)
CLEARANCE:
C1 = Clearance 1 (mm)
C2 = Clearance 2 (mm)
FINISHING ALLOWANCE: TS = Finishing allowance
(mm)
(See (*) Cf2 below.)
DEPTH OF CUT:
D1 = Depth of cut (mm)
ROTATION SPEED:
N = Tool rotational speed (rpm)
FEEDRATE:
FT = Feed amount for each tooth
in the transverse direction
of the tool (mm/rev)
FR = Feed amount for each tooth
in
the
longitudinal
direction of the tool
(mm/rev)
d2. Machining method 2 (See 2) Cutting patterns.)
CUTTING DIRECTION: CD = Cutting direction (See (*)
Cf1 below.)
DIRECTION OF CUT: DR = Direction of cut
(See (*) Cf1 below.)
CLEARANCE:
C1 = Clearance 1 (mm)
C2 = Clearance 2 (mm)
FINISHING ALLOWANCE: TS = Finishing allowance
(mm)
(See (*) Cf2 below.)
DEPTH OF CUT:
D1 = Depth of cut (mm)
255
4. DEFINING MACHINING
(MENU 4)
B61804E2/05
ROTATION SPEED:
N=
FEEDRATE:
TP = Machining type 1, 2, or 3
(See (*) Cf3 below.)
CLEARANCE:
C1 = Clearance 1 (mm)
N=
FEEDRATE:
normal
EM = Escape type
(See (*) Cf4 below.)
DT = Length in the tangent
direction (mm)
DN = Length in the
direction (mm)
normal
B61804E2/05
4. DEFINING MACHINING
(MENU 4)
2) Cutting patterns
a. Yaxis center drilling
Rapid traverse
Cutting feed
b. Yaxis drilling
b1. Drilling method 1
257
4. DEFINING MACHINING
(MENU 4)
c. Yaxis tapping
c1, c2. Tapping methods 1 and 2
258
B61804E2/05
B61804E2/05
4. DEFINING MACHINING
(MENU 4)
Machining method 2
Cutting is performed in both directions, as shown below.
Upon the completion of this cutting, finishing is performed
along the contour except if the finishing allowance is set to
0 or is not defined. (See d3 below.)
259
4. DEFINING MACHINING
(MENU 4)
B61804E2/05
d2. Clearance
For machining method 1 or 2, specify the following
clearances:
(1) In safety first mode (when bit 1 of system parameter 309 is
set to 0)
Blank figure
260
B61804E2/05
4. DEFINING MACHINING
(MENU 4)
Blank figure
261
4. DEFINING MACHINING
(MENU 4)
Top view
(Machining method 1)
262
B61804E2/05
B61804E2/05
4. DEFINING MACHINING
(MENU 4)
(Machining method 2)
263
4. DEFINING MACHINING
(MENU 4)
B61804E2/05
Direction
of feed
Direction
of feed
264
B61804E2/05
4. DEFINING MACHINING
(MENU 4)
265
4. DEFINING MACHINING
(MENU 4)
B61804E2/05
e1. Roughing/finishing
Roughing for contouring of type 1 or 3 is executed to leave
a finishing allowance around the defined part figure.
WARNING
The cutting position (CP), viewed from the point at which the
definition of a part figure element is started, represents the
difference between outer surface contouring and inner
surface contouring.
Outer surface contouring:
The cutting position is on the left, viewed from the start
point of figure definition (CP = 1).
Inner surface contouring:
The cutting position is on the right, viewed from the
start point of figure definition (CP = 0).
B61804E2/05
4. DEFINING MACHINING
(MENU 4)
Part figure
267
4. DEFINING MACHINING
(MENU 4)
B61804E2/05
371
Format
Initial value
Description
1.0
Real number
0.1
B61804E2/05
4. DEFINING MACHINING
(MENU 4)
269
4. DEFINING MACHINING
(MENU 4)
B61804E2/05
270
B61804E2/05
4. DEFINING MACHINING
(MENU 4)
271
5. ANIMATED SIMULATION
(MENU 6)
B61804E2/05
In 16TC CAP II and 16iTA CAP II, the animated simulation function
has been improved.
When using CAP II of the above models, see Part XIII, Animated
Simulation Function II.
Yaxis machining is simulated for the YZ and XY planes.
1) The following planes are displayed as the side view and front view for
turning, Caxis machining, and Yaxis machining:
2)
3)
4)
5)
side view
Front view
XZ plane
XC plane
Yaxis machining
YZ plane
XY plane
272
B61804E2/05
Fig. 5 (a)
273
5. ANIMATED SIMULATION
(MENU 6)
5. ANIMATED SIMULATION
(MENU 6)
274
B61804E2/05
6. SYSTEM PARAMETERS
B61804E2/05
SYSTEM PARAMETERS
WARNING
System parameters, setting data, and the MTF data,
described below, vary with the machine. For details, refer
to the manual provided by the machine tool builder. If these
data values are not set appropriately for the actual machine
being used, correct NC data cannot be prepared.
Machining with incorrect NC data may result in the tool
colliding with the workpiece, or forced machining occurring,
possibly causing damage to the machine and/or tool itself,
or injury to the user.
a. Parameters to enable the skipping of prompts
Parameter No.
Format
Initial value
0009
0, 1
designation
(8 bits)
00010000
Description
Remarks
7
0
5
0
3
0
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 6
275
6. SYSTEM PARAMETERS
B61804E2/05
Format
Initial value
0320
Real number
0321
Integer
80
0322
Integer
80
0370
Real number
2000
1.0
0371
Real number
0.1
Description
Remarks
Format
0222
Real number
0223
0224
0225
0226
0227
0228
0229
Initial value
Description
Undefined
mm specification
Undefined
inch specification
Undefined
mm specification
Undefined
inch specification
Undefined
mm specification
Undefined
inch specification
Undefined
mm specification
Undefined
inch specification
Undefined
mm specification
Undefined
inch specification
Undefined
mm specification
Undefined
inch specification
Undefined
mm specification
Undefined
inch specification
Undefined
mm specification
Undefined
inch specification
Real number
Real number
Real number
Real number
Real number
Real number
Real number
276
6. SYSTEM PARAMETERS
B61804E2/05
Format
Initial value
0400
0, 1
designation
(8 bits)
00100100
Description
Remarks
Bit 1
0
0
For Yaxis
machining
Coolant
0: Not used
1: Used
Bit 2
0401
0, 1
designation
(8 bits)
00100100
0402
0, 1
designation
(8 bits)
00100100
0403
0, 1
designation
(8 bits)
00100100
0404
0, 1
designation
(8 bits)
00100100
0405 to 0409
0, 1
designation
(8 bits)
00000000
Cant use.
(Dont change the data.)
0, 1
designation
(8 bits)
0410
0411
00000000
0, 1
designation
(8 bits)
00000000
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
7
0
6
0
5
0
4
0
3
0
Process start
Just before approach
Just before escape
0: Not stopped
1: Stopped
277
6. SYSTEM PARAMETERS
Parameter No.
Format
Initial value
Description
0412
0, 1
designation
(8 bits)
00000000
0413
0, 1
designation
(8 bits)
00000000
0414
0, 1
designation
(8 bits)
00000000
0415 to 0419
0, 1
designation
(8 bits)
00000000
Cant use.
(Dont change the data.)
0420
Real number
0421
Real number
0422
Real number
0423
Real number
0425
Real number
0427
0428
0.08
inch specification
Undefined
2.
mm specification
0.08
inch specification
2.
mm specification
0.08
inch specification
Undefined
2.
mm specification
0.08
inch specification
2.
mm specification
0.08
inch specification
2.
mm specification
0.08
inch specification
2.
mm specification
0.08
inch specification
Real number
0430
Real number
Undefined
Cant use.
(Dont change the data.)
Real number
Real number
Cant use.
(Dont change the data.)
Real number
0429
0431
mm specification
Real number
0424
0426
2.
Cant use.
(Dont change the data.)
2.
mm specification
0.08
inch specification
2.
mm specification
0.08
inch specification
Real number
278
B61804E2/05
Remarks
B61804E2/05
Parameter No.
Format
0432
Real number
0433
Real number
0435
Real number
0437
mm specification
0.08
inch specification
2.
mm specification
0.08
inch specification
Undefined
2.
mm specification
0.08
inch specification
2.
mm specification
0.08
inch specification
2.
mm specification
0.08
inch specification
0439
Real number
Undefined
mm specification
0.08
inch specification
2.
mm specification
0.08
inch specification
2.
mm specification
0.08
inch specification
Real number
Real number
Integer
80
0443
Real number
Undefined
0444
Real number
0445
0446
0447
Cant use.
(Dont change the data.)
2.
mm specification
0.08
inch specification
2.
mm specification
0.08
inch specification
2.
mm specification
0.08
inch specification
Real number
80
Cutting depth D1
(Percentage of the tool diameter)
Real number
Integer
Cant use.
(Dont change the data.)
2.
0442
Cant use.
(Dont change the data.)
Real number
Real number
0441
2.
Real number
0438
0440
Description
Real number
0434
0436
Initial value
6. SYSTEM PARAMETERS
Cutting depth D1
(Percentage of the tool diameter)
279
Remarks
6. SYSTEM PARAMETERS
Parameter No.
Format
Initial value
0448
Real number
Undefined
2.
0449
0450
0451 to 0459
Description
mm specification
inch specification
0.5
mm specification
0.02
inch specification
Real number
Real number
Undefined
Remarks
Cant use.
(Dont change the data.)
Real number
0.08
B61804E2/05
Clearance
(CD)
in
longitudinal direction of the
and clearance (C1) in
circumferential direction of
tool for Yaxis contouring
Unit: mm or inch
Finishing allowance
Yaxis
Y
axis contouring
Unit: mm or inch
the
tool
the
the
(TS)
of
Cant use.
(Dont change the data.)
Description
Value
Color
0570
Green
0571
Green
0572
Green
0573
Green
0574
Green
0575 to 0578
Undefined
Undefined
Not used
0579
Light blue
Format
Initial value
Description
0733
Integer
Undefind
0734
Integer
Undefind
0771
Character
Undefind
280
Remarks
B61804E2/05
WARNING
The initial values in the MTF (machine tool file) listed below
are different from those used for a production run. Actual
setting values vary with the machine. For details, refer to the
manual provided by the machine tool builder. If these data
values are not set appropriately for the actual machine
being used, correct NC data cannot be prepared.
Machining with incorrect NC data may result in the tool
colliding with the workpiece and/or machine, or forced
machining occurring, possibly causing damage to the
machine and/or tool itself, or injury to the user.
Format
1022
Real number
1032
Initial value
Description
0.001
mm specification
0.0001
inch specification
mm specification
inch specification
Integer
1048
2
characters
YV
1049
2
characters
JJ
1081
1082
Integer
Integer
281
Parameter No.
Format
1084
Integer
1093
Integer
1304
0, 1
designation
(8 bits)
B61804E2/05
Initial value
Description
4000.
mm specification
160.
inch specification
Center drilling
Drilling
Bit
1305
0, 1
designation
(8 bits)
00000000
1350
Integer
(3 bits)
29
7
0
6
0
5
0
4
0
3
0
Bit 0
282
B61804E2/05
Description
Remarks
2018
2019
2031
2032
2033
2034
2070
2071
2072
2073
2074
2075
2080
Not used
2081
2082
2083
2084
2085
2110
2111
2212
2213
283
B61804E2/05
NOTE
1 Data is referenced at the beginning of Yaxis machining.
If two or more Yaxis machining processes are defined
continuously, the data is not referenced for the second or
subsequent processes.
2 The data is referenced at the beginning of a turning process.
If two or more turning processes are defined continuously,
the data is not referenced for the second or subsequent
processes.
3 The data is referenced at the beginning of a milling process.
If two or more milling processes are defined continuously,
the data is not referenced for the second or subsequent
processes. The milling process can be a Caxis machining
process or Yaxis machining process.
c. Function codes
Highorder Loworder
three digits one digit
2
284
Function
3rd axis output (Y axis)
Remarks
Address specified
MTF1048
in
in
Output of V0
Output of Y0
Output of Y0
Output of J0
Output of J0
B61804E2/05
Yaxis drilling
Point to be
referenced
Parameter
No.
Description
2000
2016
G50X_Z_Y_;
2017
(3) Toolchange
oint
point
(beginning of a
process)
2111
2070
2071
to
2075
2202
2024
285
Point to be
referenced
(4) Approach
First movement
from the
toolchange
point, coolant
on
B61804E2/05
Parameter
No.
Description
WARNING
1 Specify whether the approach is simultaneously performed
along one, two, or three axes.
2 Do not specify the function code of AA01 (Caxis move
command).
3 A Caxis move command is executed.
286
B61804E2/05
NOTE
1 The data is not referenced for the second or subsequent
process of continuous (Caxis/Yaxis) milling processes.
2 The data is not referenced for the second or subsequent
process of continuous Yaxis processes.
Point to be
referenced
Parameter
No.
(10) Escape
Movement to
the toolchange
point, coolant off
2019
or
2033
2034
(11) Toolchange
point
(End of the
process)
2081
to
2085
(12) Toolchange
point
machine zero
point
2017
2001
Trailing section
Spindle stop, tool offset cancel, program
stop, EOR
287
Description
Example)
B61804E2/05
Point to be
referenced
Parameter
No.
2000
2016
G50X_Z_Y_;
2017
(3) Toolchange
point
(beginning of a
process)
2111
2070
2071
to
2075
2202
2024
288
Description
B61804E2/05
Point to be
referenced
(4) Approach
First movement
from the
toolchange
point, coolant
on
Parameter
No.
Description
2017
(5) to (15)
Command of
linear
movement or
rotation
2020
or
2221
(16) Escape
Movement to
the toolchange
point, coolant off
2019
or
2033
2034
(17) Toolchange
point
(End of the
process)
2081
to
2085
(18) Toolchange
point
home
posision
2017
2001
Trailing section
Spindle stop, tool offset cancel, program
stop, EOR
NOTE
1 The data is not referenced for the second or subsequent
process of continuous (Caxis/Yaxis) milling processes.
2 The data is not referenced for the second or subsequent
process of continuous Yaxis processes.
3 Specify whether the simultaneous approach is performed
along one, tow, or three axes.
4 Do not specify the function code of AA01 (Caxis move
command).
5 A Caxis move command is executed.
289
7.1
SETTING MTF
PARAMETERS WHEN
THE YAXIS FAPT
FUNCTION IS
SUPPORTED
B61804E2/05
290
B61804E2/05
291
B61804E2/05
Machining profile
Machining definition
Process 1:
Process 2:
B61804E2/05
G50X150.Z150.Y0.C270. ;
G0T0202 ;
G07SxxxxM03 ;
M08 ;
G19C0. ;
X84.Z30.Y8. ;
G1X40. ;
Y10. ;
Z60. ;
Y0. ;
Z30. ;
Y10. ;
Z60. ;
Y12. ;
G3Z62.Y10.K2. ;
G1Y10. ;
G3Z60.Y12.J2 ;
G1Z30. ;
G3Z28.Y10.K2 ;
G1Y10. ;
G3Z30.Y12.J2. ;
G1Z60. ;
Y10. ;
G0X84. ;
C180. ;
Z30.Y8. ;
G1X40. ;
Y10. ;
Z60. ;
Y0. ;
Z30. ;
Y10. ;
Z60. ;
Y12. ;
G3Z62.Y10.K2. ;
G1Y10. ;
G3Z60.Y12.J2. ;
G1Z30. ;
G3Z28.Y10.K2 ;
G1Y10. ;
G3Z30.Y12.J2. ;
G1Z60. ;
Y10. ;
G0X84. ;
Z150.X150.Y0. ;
T0200 ;
M1 ;
X200.Z200.Y0. ;
M5 ;
M30 ;
%
293
8. NOTES
NOTES
294
B61804E2/05
B61804E2/05
OUTLINE
297
1. OUTLINE
2. SPECIFICATIONS
SPECIFICATIONS
298
B61804E2/05
B61804E2/05
2. SPECIFICATIONS
2.1
PROGRAMMING
2.1.1
Material Data Input
(Menu No.1)
2.1.2
Part Figure Input
(Menu No.2)
Input back machining base line ZP2 as well as primary machining base
line ZP.
In case of drawing format 2:
299
2. SPECIFICATIONS
2.1.3
Home Position and
Turret Index Position
(Menu No.3)
B61804E2/05
Input the home position (DXH, ZH) and the turret index position (DXI,
ZI) for back machining as well as those for primary machining. If those
for back machining are the same as those for primary machining, input the
same values. If a position is in the second quadrant as shown in the figure
below, input a minus value for ZH or ZI.
For those questions, initial values can be set system parameters No.206
to 221. These can be skipped based on the value of system parameter
No.0009.
2.1.4
Machining Definition
(Menu No.4)
Machining except cutting off and bar feed machining can be performed
on the rear side.
(1) Machining type selection
Specify a machining type without discrimination of primary
machining/back machining. For work regrasping on moving from
primary machining to back machining, use Sub cycle.
(2) Spindle number
The question for a spindle to be used appears on the tool data screen.
SPINDLE NO ... SN = (1: 1ST SPINDLE, 2: 2ND SPINDLE)
Input SN = 1 in case of primary machining; input SN = 2 in case of
back machining. This question is used to decide an M code for
commanding spindle rotation direction.
300
B61804E2/05
2. SPECIFICATIONS
WARNING
That SN = 2 in any process before sub cycle for work
regrasping and SN = 1 after this process can be input but
proper machine function cannot be guaranteed.
(3) Tool data
Designate tool data for back machining as follows:
a) Center drilling/drilling
AS=0
(AS=180 in Primary machining)
b) OD cutting
Same as tool data for primary machining. A reversible tool may
be used frequently.
c) ID cutting
d) OD grooving
Same as tool data for primary machining.
301
2. SPECIFICATIONS
B61804E2/05
e) ID grooving
g) OD necking
Designate 45 degrees as tool mounting angle for OD grooving
(AS) or designate 45 degrees as that for end face grooving.
h) ID necking
Designate 45 degrees as tool mounting angle for ID grooving
(AS) or designate 45 degrees as that for end face grooving (AS).
i) OD threading
Same as tool data for primary machining
j) ID threading
B61804E2/05
2. SPECIFICATIONS
k) Face threading
Designate 0 degree as tool mounting angle for primary machining
(AS).
l) C axis machining
The following question regarding mounting direction is displayed.
SETTING DIRECTION . . . . CP = (0: SIDE, 1: FRONT
FACE, 2: REAR FACE)
For machining of rear end face, select 2.
WARNING
Machining start position
This is automatically calculated using the turret turning
position and tool mounting position. To change this value,
note the following conditions.
The path of approach or escape varies with the relation
between the work position and machining start position. In
simultaneous two axis movement, approach or escape is
performed ad shown in Fig. A unless no interference
between a work and tool exists. If interference with a work
exists, the tool bypasses the work as shown in Fig. B.
303
2. SPECIFICATIONS
2.1.5
NC Data Preparation
(Menu No.5)
B61804E2/05
304
B61804E2/05
2.1.6
Animation Drawing
(Menu No.6)
2. SPECIFICATIONS
The layout of screen is the same as before. Milling front view is a drawing
viewed from the front side. On this screen, any figure on the rear side is
drawn with dotted lines.
In back machining FAPT, any shuck figure is not drawn.
Work regrasping from primary machining to back machining is not
drawn.
Designate an M code in MTF No.1145 with which FAPT perceives the
start of back machining. When the M code designated here is executed,
FAPT animation drawing changes into back machining mode.
305
2. SPECIFICATIONS
B61804E2/05
2.2
PARAMETERS, ETC.
2.2.1
System Parameters
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
708
306
2.2.2
MTF
2. SPECIFICATIONS
B61804E2/05
Description
1252
Integer
54
1253
Integer
55
307
Lowest
digit
Major
classification
Function
2. SPECIFICATIONS
B61804E2/05
Format
Initial
Value
1410
Integer
1411
Integer
1412
Integer
1413
Integer
1414
Integer
1415
Integer
68
1416
Integer
69
Description
308
2. SPECIFICATIONS
B61804E2/05
2) Function codes
The following function codes are referenced. These function codes
are the same as those used conventionally to output M codes for the
first spindle. No additional function code need be defined for the
second spindle.
Upper three Lowest digit
digits
Major
Detailed
classification
classification
2.2.3
Function
2 (rear end face) can be designated as mounting direction of tool data for
milling (CP).
CP = _ (1: SIDE, 1: FRONT FACE, 2: REAR FACE)
In this case, tool information 2 in tool data (FLAG2) means as follows:
Tool Data
#7
#6
#5
#4
309
#3
#2
#1
#0
2. SPECIFICATIONS
B61804E2/05
2.3
WARNINGS AND
CAUTION
WARNING
1 C axis end face machining
In a section to which part figure is defined on the rear side, C axis end face machining cannot
be performed in primary machining.
Although rear end face machining before sub cycle with work regrasping can be defined in
machining definition, machining cannot be performed in proper position using prepared NC
data.
310
B61804E2/05
3. EXAMPLE OF NC DATA
EXAMPLE OF NC DATA
5002, 4C02, 0103, 0305, 0004, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000
G0 G54 Txx M8 ;
Example output
0100(BACKFAPT) ;
N001(ROUGH OF OUT.) ; . . . . . Start machining for the first spindle.
G0G54T0101M8 ; . . . . . . . . . . . . Output the block specified with MTF2068.
G96S1500M3 ;
X85. ;
Z2. ;
G1X5.F0.65 ;
.
.
<Reholding of workpiece by means of miscellaneous function>
N006(ROUGH OF OUT.) ; . . . . . Start machining for the second spindle.
G0G55T0606M8 ; . . . . . . . . . . . . Output the block specified with MTF2068.
G96S2000M203 ;
X65.5 ;
Z2. ;
Z0. ;
G1X1.5.F0.2 ;
.
.
311
AUTOMATIC PROCESS
DETERMINATION FUNCTION
B61804E2/05
1. OUTLINE
OUTLINE
WARNING
For those machining processes that have been
automatically created, check the machining sequence. If
the machining sequence is invalid, the tool may collide with
the workpiece and/or machine, or forced machining may
occur, possibly causing damage to the machine or tool itself,
or injury to the user.
The automatic process determination function enables the operator to
create NC data by simply entering the material figure and part figure and
pressing soft keys.
This function eliminates or greatly reduces the number of data entering
operations for menu item 4 (machining definition).
This function uses tooling information, tool data, and setting data. Set
these data before using this function.
The following processes can be specified using the automatic process
determination function:
1) Turning process
Center drilling
Drilling
Outer surface roughing
Inner surface roughing
Outer surface semifinishing
Inner surface semifinishing
Outer surface finishing
Inner surface finishing
Grooving or residual machining
Cuttingoff (B option for the automatic process determination
function)
Threading
Bar feeding (B option for the automatic process determination
function)
2) Caxis process
Caxis center drilling
Caxis drilling
Caxis tapping
Caxis grooving
Face milling
Cylindrical grooving
315
1. OUTLINE
AUTOMATIC PROCESS
DETERMINATION FUNCTION
B61804E2/05
CAUTION
The tools to be used are determined from tooling data and
tool data.
NOTE
1 The end surface and outer surface can be machined in
separate processes for outer surface machining.
2 For the outer and inner surface machining processes,
inverse processes can also be automatically determined (B
option for the automatic process determination function).
3 The following processes cannot be automatically
determined. Enter data manually.
Reaming
Tapping
4 Auxiliary machining processes cannot be automatically
determined.
5 Multiple processes can be specified for drilling (only for
turning) to create multitiered parts (B option for the
automatic process determination function).
6 The cuttingoff process cannot be determined when system
parameter 140 is 0.
316
B61804E2/05
AUTOMATIC PROCESS
DETERMINATION FUNCTION
2. EXECUTING AUTOMATIC
PROCESS DETERMINATION
317
2. EXECUTING AUTOMATIC
PROCESS DETERMINATION
2.1
DEFINING A NEW
PROCESS
AUTOMATIC PROCESS
DETERMINATION FUNCTION
B61804E2/05
If the soft key for defining machining (menu item 4) is pressed when no
process is defined yet, the KINDS OF MACHINING screen appears.
On this screen the automatic process determination function is enabled.
Pressing the rightmost soft Key changes the soft key menu. Pressing
the AUTO soft key starts (executes) the automatic process determination
function. Pressing the AUTO PROC. soft key displays the PROCESS
SETTING screen (see Chapter 3, Setting the Machining Procedure for
setting machining procedure data).
CAUTION
Pressing the AUTO soft key starts the automatic process
determination immediately without displaying the
PROCESS SETTING screen. Set machining procedure
data beforehand.
318
B61804E2/05
AUTOMATIC PROCESS
DETERMINATION FUNCTION
2. EXECUTING AUTOMATIC
PROCESS DETERMINATION
319
2. EXECUTING AUTOMATIC
PROCESS DETERMINATION
2.2
MODIFYING A
DEFINED PROCESS
AUTOMATIC PROCESS
DETERMINATION FUNCTION
B61804E2/05
If the soft key for defining machining (menu item 4) is pressed when
processes are already defined, the MACHINING PLAN screen
appears. On this screen the operator can modify or add processes.
Pressing the NEW soft key on this screen displays the KINDS OF
MACHINING screen. On that screen, the automatic process
determination function is enabled.
NOTE
Note that pressing the NEW soft key deletes all existing
processes.
320
B61804E2/05
AUTOMATIC PROCESS
DETERMINATION FUNCTION
Pressing the AUTO PROC. soft key displays the PROCESS SETTING
screen for setting the machining procedure. After the setting is
completed, pressing the EXEC soft key starts automatic process
determination. Manual input flags can also be set on this screen.
The PROCESS SETTING screen displays the setting data for the
machining method group number (No.000) and the machining procedure
data for the group (No.100 to 129, No.200 to 229, or No.300 to 329).
If the machining method group number is not defined, the group number
is determined by the material figure and the machining procedure data for
that group is displayed.
Round bar:
Machining method group 1
(data in No.100 to 129)
Perforated round bar: Machining method group 2
(data in No.200 to 229)
Special material:
Machining method group 3
(data in No.300 to 329)
321
AUTOMATIC PROCESS
DETERMINATION FUNCTION
B61804E2/05
322
B61804E2/05
AUTOMATIC PROCESS
DETERMINATION FUNCTION
NOTE
When using a cuttingoff process, set the following system
parameter to 1:
No. 140:
Whether a cuttingoff process is defined
Initial value: 0
0 : No cuttingoff process is defined
1 : A cuttingoff process is defined
323
AUTOMATIC PROCESS
DETERMINATION FUNCTION
B61804E2/05
324
B61804E2/05
AUTOMATIC PROCESS
DETERMINATION FUNCTION
4. DETAILS OF AUTOMATIC
PROCESS DETERMINATION
AND NOTES ON ITS USE
325
4. DETAILS OF AUTOMATIC
PROCESS DETERMINATION
AND NOTES ON ITS USE
4.1
AUTOMATIC
SELECTION OF A
TOOL
AUTOMATIC PROCESS
DETERMINATION FUNCTION
B61804E2/05
326
B61804E2/05
AUTOMATIC PROCESS
DETERMINATION FUNCTION
4. DETAILS OF AUTOMATIC
PROCESS DETERMINATION
AND NOTES ON ITS USE
CAUTION
1 For drilling, grooving, and residual machining, both tooling
information and tool data are searched for the tool, and the
optimum tool (the largest tool which can be used) is
selected. For other processes, the tool which is found first
is used. If the selected tool is not a desired one, turn the
manual flag on and select the tool manually, or change the
tool after all processes are determined.
2 If the tool is selected from tool data, the tool is automatically
added to tooling information. The data items for the added
tool are automatically set as follows: The tool selection
number (TN) is set to the smallest unused number. The tool
compensation number (TM) is set to the same number as
the tool selection number. For the other data related to
mounting, the same data as that in tool data is used.
Automatic process determination therefore cannot operate
correctly if the tool data related to mounting is incorrect.
3 When the tool is selected from tooling information, the turret
to be used is automatically selected from tooling data if
there are two or more turrets. When the tool is selected from
tool data, the turret number is normally set to 1. To set the
turret number to 2, turn on the manual input flag and
manually enter the turret number or change the turret
number after all processes are determined. When balance
cutting is performed, the turret number for the second tool
is automatically set to 2 even when the tool is selected from
tool data.
4 The tool can be selected only from tooling information or
from tool data by changing the following setting data:
No.72:
0 : searched
1 : Not searched
327
4. DETAILS OF AUTOMATIC
PROCESS DETERMINATION
AND NOTES ON ITS USE
4.2
DETERMINING
INVERSE
PROCESSES
(AUTOMATIC
PROCESS
DETERMINATION
FUNCTION B
OPTION)
AUTOMATIC PROCESS
DETERMINATION FUNCTION
B61804E2/05
The use of inverse tools can be set in automatic process determination for
the following processes:
End surface roughing
Outer surface roughing
Inner surface roughing
End surface semifinishing
Outer surface semifinishing
Inner surface semifinishing
End surface finishing
Outer surface finishing
Inner surface finishing
When determining inverse processes, set the following setting data:
No.71:
B61804E2/05
AUTOMATIC PROCESS
DETERMINATION FUNCTION
4. DETAILS OF AUTOMATIC
PROCESS DETERMINATION
AND NOTES ON ITS USE
CAUTION
To determine processes automatically, set a value other
than 2 (machinig below an overhang) in system parameter
101. If 2 is specified, the correct cutting area for an
overhang is not automatically determined.
No.101:
Initial value:
NOTE
1 For residual machining, the processes for sections a and b
in the figure below can be determined but processes using
inverse tools, such as the processes for sections c and d,
cannot be determined. Such processes should be manually
added after all processes are automatically determined.
329
4. DETAILS OF AUTOMATIC
PROCESS DETERMINATION
AND NOTES ON ITS USE
AUTOMATIC PROCESS
DETERMINATION FUNCTION
B61804E2/05
NOTE
2 When a very small pocket is machined using a normal tool
during end, outer, or inner surface machining, an error
occurs when the inverse process is determined in the
following case: When an area is left uncut after tool angle
check is performed (Fig. a) but there is no area to be cut with
the inverse tool as a result of applying offset (Fig. b).
Shaded area:
Area left uncut after tool angle
check is performed
(area to be cut with the inverse tool)
Fig. a
Shaded area:
Area to be cut with the normal
tool after tool angle check is
performed and offset is applied
Fig. b
NOTE
3 When the back of the area to be cut with the inverse tool
intersects with the material figure as shown below, the
process using the inverse tool is not determined.
Area to be cut
with the normal
tool
Shaded area:
Area left uncut
(area to be cut
with theinverse
tool)
Intersects with the material
figure at this point.
330
B61804E2/05
AUTOMATIC PROCESS
DETERMINATION FUNCTION
4. DETAILS OF AUTOMATIC
PROCESS DETERMINATION
AND NOTES ON ITS USE
NOTE
4 If an area is still left uncut after the machining with the
inverse tool, no additional process for cutting that area
(shaded area in the figure below) can be automatically
determined.
Area (1) :
Cut with the normal tool
Area (2):
Cut with the inverse tool Shaded area: Left uncut
NOTE
5 The inverse process for balance cutting cannot be
automatically determined.
331
4. DETAILS OF AUTOMATIC
PROCESS DETERMINATION
AND NOTES ON ITS USE
4.3
CUTTING DIRECTION
AUTOMATIC PROCESS
DETERMINATION FUNCTION
B61804E2/05
(1) Always from +X to X along the end surface (from X to +X for the
inverse process)
(3) When the machining procedure data is set as shown below for outer
surface finishing, the end surface is cut from the outside to the center,
then the outer surface is cut with the same tool, if there is no inner
surface (Fig. a). If there is an inner surface, the end surface and outer
surface are cut in one continuous operation (Fig. b).
Setting of machining procedure data
End surface finishing
Outer surface finishing
332
B61804E2/05
AUTOMATIC PROCESS
DETERMINATION FUNCTION
4. DETAILS OF AUTOMATIC
PROCESS DETERMINATION
AND NOTES ON ITS USE
To cut the end surface from the outside to the center and then cut the outer
surface with the same tool as shown in Fig.a even when there is an inner
surface, change the following setting data:
No.71:
x 0000000
Method of outer surface finishing
333
4. DETAILS OF AUTOMATIC
PROCESS DETERMINATION
AND NOTES ON ITS USE
4.4
AREA DIVISION
AUTOMATIC PROCESS
DETERMINATION FUNCTION
B61804E2/05
334
B61804E2/05
AUTOMATIC PROCESS
DETERMINATION FUNCTION
4. DETAILS OF AUTOMATIC
PROCESS DETERMINATION
AND NOTES ON ITS USE
335
4. DETAILS OF AUTOMATIC
PROCESS DETERMINATION
AND NOTES ON ITS USE
AUTOMATIC PROCESS
DETERMINATION FUNCTION
B61804E2/05
(5) Cutting start point for a cuttingoff process (B option for the automatic
process determination function)
The cutting start point for a cuttingoff process is determined as shown
in Fig.a when there is no C/R (chamfer/corner R) at the cutoff section
and as shown in Fig.b when there is a C/R at the cutoff section.
(6) Division direction for inverse processes (B option for the automatic
process determination function)
The division direction at division point DS for an inverse process is
one of the following three types (outer surface machining is taken as
an example):
[Type 1]
Division starts at point D, proceeds toward
the subedge of the inverse tool, and intersects first with the part figure
[Type 2]
Division starts at point D, proceeds toward the
subedge of the inverse tool, and intersects with
the material figure at two or more points
[Type 3]
Division starts at point D, proceeds toward the
subedge of the inverse tool, and intersects with
the material figure at less than two points
336
B61804E2/05
4.5
RESIDUAL
MACHINING AND
THREADING
4.6
CENTER DRILLING
AND BAR FEEDING
4. DETAILS OF AUTOMATIC
PROCESS DETERMINATION
AND NOTES ON ITS USE
AUTOMATIC PROCESS
DETERMINATION FUNCTION
Pullout
method 2
Slidestop
method 1
Slidestop
method 2
No.152 (CAX)
Undefined
Set
Undefined
Undefined
No.153 (CAZ)
Set
Undefined
Set
Undefined
No.154 (WG)
Set
Set
Undefined
Undefined
No.155 (CEZ)
Undefined
Undefined
Set
Undefined
No.152: Clearance when the tool approaches for bar feeding (CAX)
No.153: Clearance when the tool approaches for bar feeding (CAZ)
No.154: Position at which the fingers pinch the workpiece during bar
feeding (WG)
No.155: Amount of tool retraction during bar feeding (CEZ)
NOTE
The B option for the automatic process determination
function is necessary for automatically determining the bar
feeding process.
337
4. DETAILS OF AUTOMATIC
PROCESS DETERMINATION
AND NOTES ON ITS USE
4.7
MULTITIER DRILLING
(B OPTION FOR THE
AUTOMATIC
PROCESS
DETERMINATION
FUNCTION)
AUTOMATIC PROCESS
DETERMINATION FUNCTION
B61804E2/05
Set the minimum inner diameter which can be machined with the prepared
inner surface machining tool. The automatic process determination
function determines the process so that a diameter less than the set value
is machined with drills.
Fig. 1
WARNING
1 The automatic process determination function always
machines a diameter less than the set value with drills
regardless of the values in setting data No.52 and 53.
2 If the value is undefined, the automatic process
determination function determines the process so that all
inner surface are machined with the inner surface tool.
3 The automatic process determination function specifies
cutting areas so that machining for a diameter less than the
set value does not require an inner surface tool.
No.51:
Initial value:
Set the maximum inner diameter which can be machined with drills. The
automatic process determination function machines a diameter less than
the set value with drills. Multitier drilling can be performed for a diameter
less than the set value.
338
B61804E2/05
4. DETAILS OF AUTOMATIC
PROCESS DETERMINATION
AND NOTES ON ITS USE
AUTOMATIC PROCESS
DETERMINATION FUNCTION
Fig. 2
WARNING
If the value is undefined, the automatic process
determination function determines the process so that all
inner surfaces are machined with drills.
Setting data Nos.52 and 53 determine whether drills are used for
machining the inner surface with a diameter greater than the value in
setting data No.50 (minimum inner diameter which can be machined with
the inner surface tool) and less than the value in setting data No.51
(maximum inner diameter which can be machined with drills).
The inner surface with a diameter less than the value in setting data No.50
is always machined with drills regardless of the values in setting data
No.52 and 53.
Fig. 3
No.52:
Initial value:
Set the minimum allowance on the inner surface to be drilled. The inner
surface is drilled when the allowance is more than the set value.
339
4. DETAILS OF AUTOMATIC
PROCESS DETERMINATION
AND NOTES ON ITS USE
AUTOMATIC PROCESS
DETERMINATION FUNCTION
B61804E2/05
Fig. 4
WARNING
If the value is undefined, drilling is not performed.
No.53:
Initial value:
Fig. 5
340
B61804E2/05
4. DETAILS OF AUTOMATIC
PROCESS DETERMINATION
AND NOTES ON ITS USE
AUTOMATIC PROCESS
DETERMINATION FUNCTION
No.70: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Specifies how to machine the inner surface with two
or more steps using drills.
Specifies the tool selection method.
How to machine the inner surface with two or more steps using drills
0 : Performs two or more drilling steps in ascending order of drill
diameter.
1 : Performs two or more drilling steps in descending order of drill
diameter.
Specify ascending or descending order of drill diameter when machining
the inner surface in two or more drilling steps.
Tool selection method
0 : Creates the drilling process using the machinable tool selected by the
automatic process determination function.
1 : Prompts the operator to enter the tool figure on the tool data screen if a
drill suitable for the drilled diameter does not exist information or tool
data.
Set the method of selecting the tool if a drill suitable for the drilled
diameter does not exist in the tooling information or tool data when the
automatic process determination function creates a drilling process.
If a drill suitable for the diameter to be drilled does not exist when this
setting data is set to 0 (creates the drilling process using the machinable
tool selected by the automatic process determination function), an uncut
area may remain after drilling.
Fig. 6
* Examples of machining
The following examples show how the drilling process or inner
surface machining process is automatically determined, depending on
the values in setting data No.50 (minimum inner diameter which can
be machined with the inner surface tool) and No.51 (maximum inner
diameter which can be machined with drills).
341
4. DETAILS OF AUTOMATIC
PROCESS DETERMINATION
AND NOTES ON ITS USE
AUTOMATIC PROCESS
DETERMINATION FUNCTION
B61804E2/05
(1) When the value in No.50 is smaller than the value in No.51
No.51(maximum
inner diameter
which can be machined with drills)
No.50 (minimum inner diameter which can be machined with the inner surface tool)
Fig. 7
When setting data Nos.50 and 51 are set as shown in Fig.7, the following
processes are created:
Process 01 Drilling
Drills area (1) in Fig.8.
Fig. 8
Checks setting data Nos.52 and 53 for the second area to be drilled.
1
D
Fig. 9
B61804E2/05
4. DETAILS OF AUTOMATIC
PROCESS DETERMINATION
AND NOTES ON ITS USE
AUTOMATIC PROCESS
DETERMINATION FUNCTION
Fig. 10
When the conditions in Fig.9 are not satisfied
Drilling is not performed.
Fig. 11
Checks setting data Nos.52 and 53 for the third area to be drilled.
Fig. 12
4. DETAILS OF AUTOMATIC
PROCESS DETERMINATION
AND NOTES ON ITS USE
AUTOMATIC PROCESS
DETERMINATION FUNCTION
B61804E2/05
Fig. 13
Fig. 14
Fig. 15
Fig. 16
(2) When the value in No.50 is larger than the value in No.51
Fig. 17
344
AUTOMATIC PROCESS
DETERMINATION FUNCTION
B61804E2/05
4. DETAILS OF AUTOMATIC
PROCESS DETERMINATION
AND NOTES ON ITS USE
When setting data Nos.50 and 51 are set as shown in Fig.17, the following
processes are created:
Process 01 Drilling
Drills area (1) in Fig.18.
Fig. 18
Checks the conditions shown in Fig. 9 for the second area to be drilled.
When the conditions in Fig. 9 are satisfied
Fig. 20
Fig. 19
Fig. 21
Fig. 22
345
Uncut area
4. DETAILS OF AUTOMATIC
PROCESS DETERMINATION
AND NOTES ON ITS USE
AUTOMATIC PROCESS
DETERMINATION FUNCTION
B61804E2/05
When setting data No. 50 is set as shown in Fig. 23, the following
processes are created:
Process 01 Drilling
Drills area (1) in Fig.24.
Fig. 24
Process 02 Drilling
Drills area (2) in Fig.25.
Fig. 25
346
4. DETAILS OF AUTOMATIC
PROCESS DETERMINATION
AND NOTES ON ITS USE
AUTOMATIC PROCESS
DETERMINATION FUNCTION
B61804E2/05
Checks the conditions shown in Fig.12 for the third area to be drilled.
When the conditions in Fig.12 are satisfied
Process 03 Drilling
Drills area (3) in Fig.26.
Fig.30
4. DETAILS OF AUTOMATIC
PROCESS DETERMINATION
AND NOTES ON ITS USE
AUTOMATIC PROCESS
DETERMINATION FUNCTION
B61804E2/05
Process 02 Drilling
Drills area (2) in Fig.32.
Fig. 31
Fig. 32
Process 03 Drilling
Drills area (3) in Fig.33.
Fig. 33
Process 04 Inner
surface machining
Fig. 34
348
B61804E2/05
4. DETAILS OF AUTOMATIC
PROCESS DETERMINATION
AND NOTES ON ITS USE
AUTOMATIC PROCESS
DETERMINATION FUNCTION
Fig.35
No.50 (minimum inner diameter which can be machined with the inner
surface tool): Undefined
No.51 (maximum inner diameter which can be machined with drills):
Undefined
The following processes are created:
Process 01 Drilling
Drills area (1) in Fig.36.
Fig.36
Fig.37
349
4. DETAILS OF AUTOMATIC
PROCESS DETERMINATION
AND NOTES ON ITS USE
AUTOMATIC PROCESS
DETERMINATION FUNCTION
B61804E2/05
NOTE
If an uncut area remains after machining using a drill with a
tip, that area is not cut in later processes that are
automatically determined.
350
B61804E2/05
4.8
AUTOMATIC
PROCESS
DETERMINATION
FOR A CLOSED
FIGURE
AUTOMATIC PROCESS
DETERMINATION FUNCTION
4. DETAILS OF AUTOMATIC
PROCESS DETERMINATION
AND NOTES ON ITS USE
Example 2)
When the start point of the part figure is the same as the cuttingoff
start point
351
4. DETAILS OF AUTOMATIC
PROCESS DETERMINATION
AND NOTES ON ITS USE
4.9
MACHINING FOR
WHICH AUTOMATIC
PROCESS
DETERMINATION
CANNOT BE USED
AUTOMATIC PROCESS
DETERMINATION FUNCTION
B61804E2/05
352
B61804E2/05
AUTOMATIC PROCESS
DETERMINATION FUNCTION
SETTING DATA
353
5. SETTING DATA
B61804E2/05
357
1. SYSTEM PARAMETER
B61804E2/05
SYSTEM PARAMETER
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
104
358
B61804E2/05
Fig. 2
359
B61804E2/05
The method of defining part figure with the single stroke drawing by
using symbolic key is the same as standard system. There are following
remarks and a restriction matters.
a. Do not define it as shown in the figure below.
D The line crosses. (Fig. 3. (a))
D There are same lines on one line. (Fig. 3 (b))
D One point comes in contact. (Fig. 3 (c))
Fig. 3 (a)
Fig. 3 (b)
Fig. 3 (c)
b. Please define the figure to become the end point as same place the start
point.
c. Please make a head and the last element an arrow element. Do not
specify Chamfer or Round element for a head or last element.
d. The position of start point and the end point exerts the effect on the
definition of the processing area. The position of start point and the
end point becomes the division point of the processing area division
in Automatic process decision. Therefore, it is necessary to specify
start point and the end point after previous is foreseen to some degree.
(Please refer to 5.2.5 and 5.3.4)
360
B61804E2/05
Home and index positions of the First process and the second process can
be set.
361
5. PROCESSING DEFINITION
PROCESSING DEFINITION
362
B61804E2/05
B61804E2/05
5.1
OUTLINE
5. PROCESSING DEFINITION
363
5. PROCESSING DEFINITION
5.2
DEFINITION BY
MANUAL
B61804E2/05
It will change into soft key like the under figure, if softkey of a right
edge is pushed.
364
B61804E2/05
5. PROCESSING DEFINITION
5.2.1
Fig. 5.2.1
365
5. PROCESSING DEFINITION
5.2.2
Cutting Area Screen
B61804E2/05
The coordinate value of the point which the cursor shows displays the
coordinate value in the coordinate system of Secondary processing.
Fig.5.2.2
Do not specify the cutting area by stepping over the start and end points
of the part figure.
Example
For instance, the shaded portion cannot be specified for a cutting area
when the part figure started from a point.
5.2.3
Cutting Condition
Screen
366
B61804E2/05
5. PROCESSING DEFINITION
5.3
AUTOMATIC
PROCESSING
DECISION FUNCTION
WARNING
For those machining processes that have been
automatically created, check the machining sequence. If
the machining sequence is invalid, the tool may collide with
the workpiece and/or machine, or forced machining may
occur, possibly causing damage to the machine or tool itself,
or injury to the user.
First of all, the cutting area of the First processing and Secondary
processing are divided. Next time, the process for the First processing is
decided automatically according to the processing procedure data. The
process on a Secondary side is continuously decided.
5.3.1
Processing Area
Division Screen
367
5. PROCESSING DEFINITION
B61804E2/05
Specify the first and second processing areas using the cursor and arrow
keys on the MACHINING AREA DIVISION screen as same way as the
CUTTING AREA DEFINE screen. The arrows of , , , can be
used on this screen.
The position of DC1 becomes the starting point of the part figure
definition. The dividing direction of DC1 can be changed. However, the
position cannot be changed. DC2 can change both positions and
directions of division.
When the specifies dividing point as shown in Fig. 5.3.1 (b).
The area of the First processing and a Secondary processing will divided
as shown in Fig. 5.3.1 (c).
First
processing
area
Secondary
processing
area
If the NEXT PAGE is pushed in Fig. 5.3.1 (b), the screen switches to
the PROCESS SETTING screen.
368
5. PROCESSING DEFINITION
B61804E2/05
5.3.2
Process Setting Screen
5.3.3
Automatic Processing
Decision
System parameter
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
708
369
#1
#0
5. PROCESSING DEFINITION
5.3.4
Process Area Division
B61804E2/05
First
processing area
Secondary
process
area
370
B61804E2/05
5. PROCESSING DEFINITION
EXAMPLE B.
Secondary processing area is overhang.
371
6. NC DATA PREPARATION
B61804E2/05
NC DATA PREPARATION
WARNING
Even when the tool path and machining processes
specified in NC data are verified by machining simulation or
tool path check, if the data relating to the actual tool offset
and workpiece shift is incorrect, the tool may collide with the
workpiece and/or machine, possibly causing damage to the
machine and/or tool itself, or injury to the user. Before
starting a production run, perform a dry run to ensure that
the tool will not collide with the workpiece or machine. For
example, specify a low feedrate, then start the NC program
without mounting a workpiece on the machine.
372
B61804E2/05
6. NC DATA PREPARATION
373
7. MACHINING TIME
DISPLAY SCREEN
B61804E2/05
After preparing NC data, the soft key will change as follows so that the
machining time can be checked.
Fig. 7 (a)
Fig. 7 (b)
374
B61804E2/05
8. SYSTEM PARAMETER
SYSTEM PARAMETER
The initial values of home and index positions are set the system
parameters.
No.206: X coordinate of first processing home position
No.207: Z coordinate of first processing home position
No.210: X coordinate of first processing index position
No.211: Z coordinate of first processing index position
No.214: X coordinate of secondary processing home position
No.215: Z coordinate of secondary processing home position
No.218: X coordinate of secondary processing index position
No.219: Z coordinate of secondary processing index position
375
9. NOTES
NOTES
376
B61804E2/05
B61804E2/05
9.1
9. NOTES
The tool data used for this function is the same as that of standard system.
TOOL DATA
9.2
TOOLING
INFORMATION
9.3
RELATION WITH
BACKSIDE
MACHINING FAPT
9.4
RELATION WITH
4AXIS LATH
The tooling information used for this function is the same as that of
standard system.
If MTF parameter Nos.1050, 1055 are set to 2axis lath, the double
sided machining function can be performed. If these MTF parameter are
4axis lath, this function cannot be used.
377
B61804E2/05
1. OUTLINE
OUTLINE
2. FLOW OF ANIMATED
SIMULATION
B61804E2/05
Animated simulation
parameter screen
Chuck
Tailstock
Tool holder
Standard chuck
data screen
Standard tailstock
data screen
Special chuck
data screen
Special tailstock
data screen
Tool holder
data screen
D With any of the above screens, pressing the [END] soft key returns
control to the previous screen.
D Regardless of which screen is currently displayed, pressing the
[MENU SCREEN] soft key returns control to the main menu screen.
For details of how to set a chuck, tailstock, tool holder, and
animated simulation parameters, see Section 3.6, Checking
NC Data.
B61804E2/05
3. OPERATION PROCEDURE
FOR ANIMATED SIMULATION
4. ANIMATED SIMULATION
SCREENS
B61804E2/05
B61804E2/05
4. ANIMATED SIMULATION
SCREENS
4.1
ANIMATED
SIMULATION OF
TURNING
4. ANIMATED SIMULATION
SCREENS
B61804E2/05
4.2
ANIMATED
SIMULATION WITH
GRADATION
B61804E2/05
4. ANIMATED SIMULATION
SCREENS
4.3
CAXIS ANIMATED
SIMULATION
(1) After executing an M code set in system parameter No. 741, executing
the tool selection T code switches to the Caxis machining screen.
(For cylindrical grooving, an M code set in system parameter No. 742
is referenced.)
This screen is displayed in the same way for animated simulation with
gradation.
(2) The right half of the screen is used to display Caxis cylindrical
grooving, the lower left quarter is used to display Caxis end face
machining and Caxis side face machining other than cylindrical
grooving, and the upper left quarter is used for threedimensional
display.
(3) Cutting is represented with a filledin cross section (a circle) of the
tool tip. Rapid traverse drawing is represented with a dotted line,
regardless of whether the tool path is set to on or off.
(4) Even when a portraitmode lathe is being used, drawing is displayed
in landscape mode.
4. ANIMATED SIMULATION
SCREENS
B61804E2/05
4.4
YAXIS ANIMATED
SIMULATION
(1) After executing an M code set in system parameter No. 741, executing
the tool selection T code causes switching to the Yaxis machining
screen. This screen is displayed in the same way for animated
simulation with gradation.
(Yaxis side face drawing is updated when the phase angle is
changed.)
(2) The right half of the screen is used to display Yaxis side face
machining, the lower left quarter is used to display Yaxis end face
machining, and the upper left quarter is used to display
threedimensional line drawing.
(3) For Yaxis side face machining, the screen is further divided into four
pieces. Each time the phase angle is updated, machining display is
scrolled.
(The latest machining result is always displayed at the bottom of the
screen.)
(4) Cutting is represented with a filledin cross section of the tool tip.
Rapid traverse drawing is represented with a dotted line, regardless of
whether the tool path is set to on or off.
10
B61804E2/05
4. ANIMATED SIMULATION
SCREENS
4.5
INTERFERENCE
CHECK FUNCTION
11
4. ANIMATED SIMULATION
SCREENS
B61804E2/05
4.6
ANIMATED
SIMULATION FOR
TWOPATH LATHE
(1) Animated simulation is performed for the first and second turrets. (For
a twopath lathe, animated simulation with gradation is not
supported.)
(2) Normally, the first turret is displayed at the top of the screen and the
second turret is displayed at the bottom of the screen. Setting bit 1 of
system parameter No. 705 to 1 enables the position of the turrets to be
reversed.
(3) When the interference check function is on, interference between the
first and second turrets is checked, as well as interference between a
turret and a chuck or tailstock.
(4) For Caxis animated simulation, drawing is performed in the same
way as for a singlepath lathe.
12
B61804E2/05
4. ANIMATED SIMULATION
SCREENS
4.7
The following soft keys are displayed on the animated simulation screen.
SOFT KEYS
CHECK
START
ORIGINAL
PARAM- TOOL
ETER
PATH
DRAWING INTER
RANGE
CHECK
END
INTER
CHECK
END
CHECK
START
13
5. SYSTEM PARAMETERS
B61804E2/05
SYSTEM PARAMETERS
Format
Initial value
Description
740
Integer
Undefined
(NOTE)
741
Integer
Undefined
742
Integer
Undefined
743
Integer
Undefined
771
Character Undefined
NOTE
The setting of this parameter can be omitted when only
turning is performed. However, it cannot be omitted when
turning is performed after C or Yaxis machining.
14
B61804E2/05
6. SUPPLEMENT
SUPPLEMENT
15
6. SUPPLEMENT
B61804E2/05
MTF
Parameter No.
Description
Remarks
2220
2221
2222
2223
2224
2225
2230
2231
2232
2233
2234
2235
2070
2071
2072
2073
2074
2075
16
APPENDIX
B61804E2/05
APPENDIX
A. SETTING DATA,
SYSTEM PARAMETER, MTF
WARNING
System parameters, setting data, and the MTF data,
described below, vary with the machine. For details, refer
to the manual provided by the machine tool builder. If these
data values are not set appropriately for the actual machine
being used, correct NC data cannot be prepared.
Machining with incorrect NC data may result in the tool
colliding with the workpiece, or forced machining occurring,
possibly causing damage to the machine and/or tool itself,
or injury to the user.
A. SETTING DATA,
SYSTEM PARAMETER, MTF
A.1
APPENDIX
B61804E2/05
SETTING DATA
TABLE
Data No.
Format
Initial value
Description
Remarks
0000
Integer
0001
Real number
0002
Real number
0003
Real number
Drilling coefficient 1
When (drilling depth)/(drilling diameter) does not exceed the value of
data 3, a workpiece is machined in drilling method 1.
0004
Real number
101
Drilling coefficient 2
When (drilling depth)/(drilling diameter) is greater than the value of data
3 and does not exceed the value of data 4, a workpiece is machined in
drilling method 2. When (drilling depth)/(drilling diameter) is greater
than the value of data 4, a workpiece is machined in drilling method 3.
0005
Integer
0010
Real number
3.
0011
Real number
0.
0012
Real number
0.
0020
Real number
1.
0021
Real number
101
0022
Real number
0023
Real number
100.
0024
Real number
80.
0030 to
0049
Integer
0050
Real number
Option B
0051
Real number
Option B
A. SETTING DATA,
SYSTEM PARAMETER, MTF
APPENDIX
B61804E2/05
Data No.
Format
Initial value
0052
Real number
Option B
0053
Real number
Option B
0054
Real number
Not defined Coefficient for calculating the diameter of a prepared hole for Caxis
tapping (thread catch rate)
If this value is not defined, 1.082532 is specified.
Maximum prepared hole diameter
= D P C (value of data 22/100)
Minimum prepared hole diameter
= D P C (value of data 22/100)
D: Nominal diameter, P:
Pitch, C: Value of data 54
0055 to
0069
Real number
0070
Eightdigit
binary
00000000
Description
Bit
7
0
6
0
5
0
4
0
3
0
2
0
Remarks
Option B
Eightdigit
binary
00000111
Bit
6
0
5
0
4
0
3
0
Option B
Eightdigit
binary
00000000
Bit
7
0
6
0
5
0
4
0
3
0
2
0
Eightdigit
binary
00000000
Not used
Option B
A. SETTING DATA,
SYSTEM PARAMETER, MTF
APPENDIX
B61804E2/05
Format
Initial value
Description
Integer
Remarks
Drilling
10
11
12
13
14
15
0111 0211
0311
16
17
18
19
30
32
34
36
31
33
35
37
B61804E2/05
APPENDIX
A. SETTING DATA,
SYSTEM PARAMETER, MTF
A. SETTING DATA,
SYSTEM PARAMETER, MTF
APPENDIX
B61804E2/05
Format
Initial value
Description
Eightdigit
binary
00000000
00000000
For drilling
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
For cuttingoff
00000000
00000000
Not used
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
Remarks
A. SETTING DATA,
SYSTEM PARAMETER, MTF
APPENDIX
B61804E2/05
#7
0
#5
0
#4
0
#3
0
#2
0
#1
#0
Bit 0 Specifies whether a tool is manually selected and whether the machining
start point and passing point are manually specified.
0 : The correct tool is automatically selected from the tooling
information.
1 : A tool is manually selected. The cursor temporarily stops moving
automatically to each field on the tool data screen, so the operator can
manually enter a tool number, machining start point, and passing
point.
Bit 1 Specifies whether cutting conditions are manually entered.
0 : Cutting conditions are automatically set.
1 : The cursor temporarily stops moving automatically to each field on
the cutting condition screen, so the operator can manually enter
cutting conditions.
Bit 2 Specifies whether a cutting direction and cutting area are manually
specified.
0 : A cutting direction and cutting area are automatically specified.
1 : The cursor temporarily stops moving automatically to each field on
the cutting direction and area screen, so the operator can manually
enter a cutting direction and cutting area.
(2) FAPT I/O interface data
Data No.
Format
Initial value
Description
0900
Integer
0901
Integer
10
Integer
Option B
Setting
Baud rate
50
100
110
150
200
300
Setting
10
11
Baud rate
0902
Remarks
Specifies the number of stop bits and the use of the DC code.
1: One stop bit and the DC code is used.
2: Two stop bits and the DC code is used.
5: One stop bit and the DC code is not used.
6: Two stop bits and the DC code is not used.
A. SETTING DATA,
SYSTEM PARAMETER, MTF
APPENDIX
B61804E2/05
A.2
SYSTEM
PARAMETER TABLE
Parameter
No.
Format
Initial
value
0000
Integer
0001
Integer
Sets output code of system parameter, MTF and setting data. Only
1: ISO
2: EIA
15TF/
15TTF
0002
Integer
0003
Integer
0004
0, 1
designation (8 bits)
01100000
0005 to
0007
Character
Not
defined
0008
Integer
0009
Description
Waiting time until going to the next screen after entering the
answers to all questions.
1 : No waiting time
0 : Until the soft key NEXT PAGE is pressed.
N : n second
0, 1
00010000 Specify to skip a particular question.
designation (8 bits)
Bit 7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 6
00010
0, 1
designation (8 bits)
00011110
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
Real number
0011
Remarks
7
0
6
0
5
0
1.
mm specification
25.4
inch specification
10
A. SETTING DATA,
SYSTEM PARAMETER, MTF
APPENDIX
B61804E2/05
Parameter
No.
Format
Initial
value
0012
Real number
1000.
mm specification
12.
inch specification
Description
Remarks
0013
Real number
0014
Real number
6.4
0015
0, 1
00010001
designation (8 bits)
Set the I/O unit of family program, material file, and tooling file.
Bit
7
0
6
0
5
0
3
0
2
0
1
0
Character
0017
Character
0018
Character
0019
0, 1
00000000
designation (8 bits)
7
0
Bit 0
Bit 1
6
0
5
0
4
0
3
0
2
0
0020
0, 1
00000000 Cant use. (Dont change the data.)
designation (8 bits)
0049
0, 1
00000000
designation (8 bits)
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
7
0
6
0
5
0
4
0
3
0
Process start
Just before approach
Just before escape
0050
0, 1
00000000 Single step of center drilling process
designation (8 bits)
(Refer to parameter No.49)
0051
0, 1
00000000 Single step of drill process, reamer process and tapping
designation (8 bits)
process
(Refer to parameter No.49)
0052
0, 1
00000000 Single step of rough cutting process
designation (8 bits)
(Refer to parameter No.49)
11
Within 15
characters.
A. SETTING DATA,
SYSTEM PARAMETER, MTF
Parameter
No.
Format
APPENDIX
Initial
value
B61804E2/05
Description
Remarks
0053
0, 1
00000000 Single step of semifinish cutting process
designation (8 bits)
(Refer to parameter No.49)
0054
0, 1
00000000 Single step of finish cutting process
designation (8 bits)
(Refer to parameter No.49)
0055
0, 1
00000000 Single step of grooving process
designation (8 bits)
(Refer to parameter No.49)
0056
0, 1
00000000 Single step of Threading process
designation (8 bits)
(Refer to parameter No.49)
0057
0, 1
00000000 Single step of cutting off process
designation (8 bits)
(Refer to parameter No.49)
0100
Integer
0101
Integer
0102
Integer
0103
Integer
0104
0, 1
00000000
designation (8 bits)
Bit
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 7
4
0
3
0
Questions of XS and ZS is
0 : Skipped
1 : Not skipped
Questions of firsttime override of rough cutting is
0 : Skipped
1 : Not skipped
Doublesided machining function
0 : Not used
1 : Used
At rough machining
0 : Machining is performed under an overhanging
portion.
1 : Machining is not performed under an overhanging
portion.
At semifinish and finish machining
0 : Machining is performed under an overhanging
portion.
1 : Machining is not performed under an overhanging
portion
Regarding data display
0 : 1 or 1/10000 in unit
1 : 0.1 or 1/100000 in unit
12
Parameter
No.
0105
A. SETTING DATA,
SYSTEM PARAMETER, MTF
APPENDIX
B61804E2/05
Format
0, 1
designation (8 bits)
Initial
value
01011100
Description
Bit
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 7
0106
0, 1
designation (8 bits)
01011100
0107
0, 1
designation (8 bits)
01011100
0108
0, 1
designation (8 bits)
01011100
0109
0, 1
designation (8 bits)
01011100
0110
0, 1
designation (8 bits)
01011101
0111
0, 1
designation (8 bits)
01011101
0112
0, 1
designation (8 bits)
01011101
0113
0, 1
designation (8 bits)
01011101
0114
0, 1
designation (8 bits)
00011100
0115
0, 1
designation (8 bits)
01011101
0116
Real number
2.
0.08
Remarks
13
A. SETTING DATA,
SYSTEM PARAMETER, MTF
APPENDIX
Parameter
No.
Format
Initial
value
0117
Real number
0.5
mm specification
0.02
inch specification
0.1
mm specification
0.04
inch specification
0.01
mm specification
0.0004
inch specification
1.
mm specification
0.04
inch specification
0118
0119
0120
Real number
Real number
Real number
B61804E2/05
Description
Finishing allowance in X axis of roughing
Unit: mm or inch
Allowance in X axis of semifinishing
Unit: mm or inch
Final cutting depth of threading
Unit: mm or inch
Return relief of roughing and drilling
Unit: mm or inch
0121
Real number
2.
0122
Real number
5.
0123
Real number
0.
0124
Real number
1.
mm specification
0.04
0125
Real number
0.6495
Inner threading
Constant to obtain threading depth from pitch
(Threading depth) = (Pitch) (Parameter No.0125)
0126
Real number
45.
Threading
Boundary value of ordinary thread/face thread
0127
Real number
3.
0128
Real number
2000.
0129
Real number
1.5
0130
Real number
0.0005
Real number
0.0005
mm specification
Real number
0.01
mm specification
Real number
0.001
14
Remarks
A. SETTING DATA,
SYSTEM PARAMETER, MTF
APPENDIX
B61804E2/05
Parameter
No.
Format
Initial
value
0134
Real number
0.000573
0135
Real number
3.
0136
Integer
0140
Integer
0141
Real number
0.
mm specification
0.
0142
Real number
5.
0.2
0143
Real number
1.
0.04
0144
Real number
0.
0.
Description
System constant 5 (R4 TOLA) (Dont change this setting at
random.)
0150
Integer
0151
Integer
0152
Real number
0153
0154
0155
Real number
Real number
Real number
0.4
10.
mm specification
10.
mm specification
0.4
20.
mm specification
0.8
20
mm specification
0.8
inch specification
Spindle speed at bar feed (S1)
0156
Real number
100
0157
Real number
1000.
40.
15
Remarks
A. SETTING DATA,
SYSTEM PARAMETER, MTF
APPENDIX
Parameter
No.
Format
Initial
value
0158
Real number
3000.
0159
Real number
B61804E2/05
Description
120.
1000.
mm specification
40.
mm specification
0160
Real number
3.
0170
Real number
2.
mm specification
0.08
0171
0172
0173
Real number
Real number
Real number
0174
Real number
0175 to
0179
Real number
0180
Real number
0181
Real number
0.04
0.5
mm specification
0.02
inch specification
0.1
mm specification
1.
Real number
Real number
Real number
mm specification
0.08
inch specification
2.
mm specification
2.
2.
2.
0.08
0185
Real number
0.7578
0.08
0184
0.08
0183
mm specification
0.004
0.08
0182
2.
0.08
16
Remarks
Parameter
No.
Format
Initial
value
0186
Real number
2.
0.08
0187
Real number
2.
0.08
0188
Real number
2.
0.08
0189
Real number
2.
0.08
0190
0191
0192
0193
0194
Real number
Real number
Real number
Real number
Real number
Real number
Description
Clearance amount of semifinishing in the
Xaxis
X
axis direction CZ.
inch specification Unit: mm or inch
mm specification
2.
mm specification
0.08
inch specification
2.
mm specification
0.08
inch specification
2.
mm specification
0.08
inch specification
2.
mm specification
0.08
inch specification
2.
mm specification
0.08
0195
A. SETTING DATA,
SYSTEM PARAMETER, MTF
APPENDIX
B61804E2/05
2.
mm specification
0.08
inch specification
5.
0196
Real number
0197 to
0199
Real number
0200
Integer
0201
Integer
0202
Real number
0203
Integer
17
Remarks
A. SETTING DATA,
SYSTEM PARAMETER, MTF
APPENDIX
Parameter
No.
Format
Initial
value
0204
Integer
B61804E2/05
Description
Sets the position of parts as viewed from the advancing
direction of the definition of parts figure.
(1)
1 : Right side
1 : Left side
(when drawing format is 1 or 2)
(2)
1 : Right side
1 : Left side
(when drawing format is 3 or 4)
However, if vertical drawing display is available, right and left
should be reversed.
0205
Integer
0206
Real number
Undefined mm specification
0207
Real number
Undefined mm specification
0208
Real number
Undefined mm specification
0209
Real number
Undefined mm specification
0210
Real number
Undefined mm specification
0211
Real number
Undefined mm specification
0212
Real number
Undefined mm specification
0213
Real number
Undefined mm specification
0213
Real number
Undefined mm specification
18
Remarks
A. SETTING DATA,
SYSTEM PARAMETER, MTF
APPENDIX
B61804E2/05
Parameter
No.
Format
0214
Real number
Undefined mm specification
0215
Real number
Undefined mm specification
0216
Real number
Undefined mm specification
0217
Real number
Undefined mm specification
0218
Real number
Undefined mm specification
0219
Real number
Undefined mm specification
0220
Real number
Undefined mm specification
0221
Real number
Undefined mm specification
0222
Real number
Undefined mm specification
0223
Real number
Undefined mm specification
0224
Real number
Undefined mm specification
0225
Real number
Undefined mm specification
Initial
value
Description
19
Remarks
A. SETTING DATA,
SYSTEM PARAMETER, MTF
APPENDIX
B61804E2/05
Parameter
No.
Format
0226
Real number
Undefined mm specification
0227
Real number
Undefined mm specification
0228
Real number
Undefined mm specification
0229
Real number
Undefined mm specification
0230
Integer
0231
Integer
0300
Initial
value
Description
Remarks
0, 1
00100100
designation (8 bits)
6
0
0
0
Bit 1
Coolant
0 : Not used
1 : Used
Bit 2 Cancellation of tool compensation
0 : Not output
1 : Output
Bit 3,4 Approach
00: Simultaneous 1 axis
01: Simultaneous 2 axis
11, 10: Simultaneous 3 axes
Bit 5 Return relief (X, Z axis)
0 : Simultaneous 2 axes
1 : Simultaneous 1 axis
Bit 7 Passing point setting screen
0 : Not displayed
1 : Displayed
Process parameter on center drilling
0301
0, 1
00100100 Caxis drill processing process parameter
designation (8 bits)
(Refer to the parameter 300)
0302
0, 1
00100100 Caxis tapping processing process parameter
designation (8 bits)
(Refer to the parameter 300)
0303
0, 1
00100100 Caxis groove processing process parameter
designation (8 bits)
(Refer to the parameter 300)
0304
0, 1
00100100 Caxis face milling process parameter
designation (8 bits)
(Refer to the parameter 300)
20
For Caxis
machining
Parameter
No.
0305
0306 to
0308
0309
A. SETTING DATA,
SYSTEM PARAMETER, MTF
APPENDIX
B61804E2/05
Format
Initial
value
Description
Remarks
0, 1
00100100 Caxis drill working process parameter
designation (8 bits)
(see parameter 300)
0, 1
00000000 Cant use. (Dont change the data.)
designation (8 bits)
0, 1
00000000
designation (8 bits)
7
0
6
0
5
0
4
0
3
0
2
0
For Caxis/
Yaxis
machining
Bit 0
0, 1
00000000
designation (8 bits)
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
7
0
6
0
5
0
4
0
3
0
Head of process
Before approach
Before escape
0 : Not stop
1 : Stop
0311
0, 1
00000000 Single step process for Caxis drilling process
designation (8 bits)
(Refer to parameter 310)
0312
0, 1
00000000 Single step process for Caxis tapping
designation (8 bits)
(Refer to parameter 310)
0313
0, 1
00000000 Single step process for Caxis grooving
designation (8 bits)
(Refer to parameter 310)
0314
0, 1
00000000 Single step process for Caxis face milling
designation (8 bits)
(Refer to parameter 310)
0315
0, 1
00000000 Single step process for Caxis drill process
designation (8 bits)
(see parameter 310)
0316 to
0319
For Caxis
machining
0, 1
00000000 Cant use. (Dont change the data.)
designation (8 bits)
0320
Real number
0.
0321
Integer
80
0322
Integer
80
Feed amount override (% to special tool) when the tool material Caxis/
is Special
Yaxis
0323
Real number
0.
0330
Real number
2.
mm specification
0.08
21
Caxis/
Yaxis
A. SETTING DATA,
SYSTEM PARAMETER, MTF
Parameter
No.
Format
0331
Real number
0332
Real number
APPENDIX
Initial
value
Real number
2.
2.
0.08
0334
Real number
0335
Real number
Real number
2.
2.
0.08
0337
Real number
0338
Real number
Real number
2.
1.
0.04
0340
Real number
2.
0.08
0341
Real number
2.
0.08
0342
Real number
2.
0.08
0343
Real number
2.
0.08
0344 to
0362
Real number
0363
Real number
0364
0365
Real number
Real number
0.08
0339
0.08
0336
Description
0.08
0333
B61804E2/05
mm specification
0.08
inch specification
2.
mm specification
0.08
inch specification
2.
mm specification
0.08
22
Remarks
A. SETTING DATA,
SYSTEM PARAMETER, MTF
APPENDIX
B61804E2/05
Parameter
No.
Format
0366
Real number
0367
Real number
Initial
value
Description
Remarks
0368
Real number
0369
Real number
0370
Real number
2000.
0371
Real number
1.0
0.5
Finishing allowance
notching
inch specification Unit: mm or inch
mm specification
in
Caxis
front
Caxis/
Yaxis
0.1
0372
Real number
0.2
0373
Real number
0.5
mm specification
0.02
0400
0, 1
00100100
designation (8 bits)
For Caxis
machining
0
0
Bit 1
Coolant
0 : Not used
1 : Used
Bit 2 Cancellation of tool compensation
0 : Not output
1 : Output
Bit 3,4 Approach
00: Simultaneous 1 axis
01: Simultaneous 2 axis
10: Simultaneous 3 axis
11: Simultaneous 4 axis
Bit 5,6 Return relief
00: Simultaneous 1 axis
01: Simultaneous 2 axis
11, 10: Simultaneous 3 axis
Bit 7 The prompt relating to the passing point is:
0 : Not displayed.
1 : Displayed.
0401
0, 1
00100100 Yaxis drilling process parameter
designation (8 bits)
(refer to the parameter No.400)
0402
0, 1
00100100 Yaxis tapping process parameter
designation (8 bits)
(refer to the parameter No.400)
0403
0, 1
00100100 Yaxis pattern machining process parameter
designation (8 bits)
(refer to the parameter No.400)
0404
0, 1
00100100 Yaxis contouring process parameter
designation (8 bits)
(refer to the parameter No.400)
23
For Yaxis
machining
A. SETTING DATA,
SYSTEM PARAMETER, MTF
Parameter
No.
0405 to
0409
0410
Format
APPENDIX
Initial
value
B61804E2/05
Description
Remarks
0, 1
00000000 Cant use. (Dont change the data.)
designation (8 bits)
0, 1
00000000
designation (8 bits)
For Yaxis
machining
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
7
0
6
0
5
0
4
0
3
0
Process start
Just before approach
Just before escape
0 : Not stopped
1 : StoppedBit
0411
0, 1
00000000 Single step of Yaxis drilling process
designation (8 bits)
(refer to the parameter No.410)
0412
0, 1
00000000 Single step of Yaxis tapping process
designation (8 bits)
(refer to the parameter No.410)
0413
0, 1
00000000 Single step of Yaxis pattern machining process
designation (8 bits)
(refer to the parameter No.410)
0414
0, 1
00000000 Single step of Yaxis contouring process
designation (8 bits)
(refer to the parameter No.410)
0415 to
0419
0420
0, 1
00000000 Cant use. (Dont change the data.)
designation (8 bits)
Real number
2.
0.08
0421
Real number
0422
Real number
0423
Real number
2.
0.08
0424
Real number
0425
Real number
Real number
2.
2.
0.08
0427
Real number
2.
0.08
0428
Real number
2.
0.08
0429
Real number
0.08
0426
24
Parameter
No.
Format
Initial
value
0430
Real number
2.
0.08
0431
Real number
2.
0.08
0432
Real number
2.
0.08
0433
Real number
2.
0.08
0434
Real number
0435
Real number
0436
0437
Real number
Real number
0438
Real number
0439
Real number
0441
Real number
Integer
0443
Real number
0444
Real number
0446
Real number
Real number
0.08
inch specification
2.
mm specification
0.08
inch specification
2.
mm specification
0.08
0.5
mm specification
2.
80
mm specification
0445
mm specification
0.02
0442
2.
0.08
Real number
Description
0.08
0440
A. SETTING DATA,
SYSTEM PARAMETER, MTF
APPENDIX
B61804E2/05
0.08
0.5
mm specification
2.
0.02
mm specification
25
Remarks
A. SETTING DATA,
SYSTEM PARAMETER, MTF
APPENDIX
Parameter
No.
Format
Initial
value
0447
Integer
80
0448
Real number
0449
Real number
Real number
2.
0.5
0.02
0451 to
0459
Real number
Description
Remarks
0.08
0450
B61804E2/05
0700
0, 1
00000000 Cant use. (Dont change the data.)
designation (8 bits)
0701
0, 1
00000000
designation (8 bits)
Bit
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 7
1
0
0
0
26
Parameter
for
animation
drawing
Parameter
No.
0702
Format
Initial
value
0, 1
00001000
designation (8 bits)
Description
Bit
Bit 0
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 7
0, 1
00000000
designation (8 bits)
Bit
Bit 2
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 7
Remarks
0
Bit 1
0703
A. SETTING DATA,
SYSTEM PARAMETER, MTF
APPENDIX
B61804E2/05
6
0
3
0
1
0
0
0
27
A. SETTING DATA,
SYSTEM PARAMETER, MTF
Parameter
No.
0704
Format
APPENDIX
Initial
value
0, 1
00000000
designation (8 bits)
Description
Bit
Bit 0
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 6
Bit 7
0, 1
00000000
designation (8 bits)
Bit
Bit 1
Bit 5
Bit 6
5
0
Remarks
0
Bit 1
0705
B61804E2/05
6
0
4
0
3
0
2
0
0
0
28
Parameter
No.
0706
Format
0, 1
designation
Initial
value
Description
Remarks
Bit 5
Bit 7
0, 1
00000000
designation (8 bits)
4
0
3
0
2
0
1
0
0
0
Bit 6
0707
A. SETTING DATA,
SYSTEM PARAMETER, MTF
APPENDIX
B61804E2/05
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 7
4
0
3
0
29
TT only
A. SETTING DATA,
SYSTEM PARAMETER, MTF
Parameter
No.
0708
Format
APPENDIX
Initial
value
0, 1
00000000
designation (8 bits)
Description
Bit
Bit 0
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 7
0709
B61804E2/05
0, 1
10000000 Bit 4
designation (8 bits)
Bit 5
Bit 7
1
0
Remarks
0
0710
Integer
0711
Integer
100
0712
Integer
0713 to
0728
Integer
30
A. SETTING DATA,
SYSTEM PARAMETER, MTF
APPENDIX
B61804E2/05
Parameter
No.
Format
Initial
value
0729
Integer
Description
Display language switching parameter
1: Japanese
4: French
7: Norwegian
10: Dutch
2: English
5: Swedish
8: Danish
11: Italian
3: German
6: Finnish
9: Chinese
12: Spanish
Remarks
The
optional
ROM
is
required for
Swedish
and
the
languages
beyond it.
15TTF
only
0730
Integer
100
0731
Integer
200
0732
Real number
0733
Real number
0734
Real number
0735
Real number
0736 to
0738
Integer
0739
Integer
0740
Integer
0741
Integer
Undefined M code number for the start of Caxis machining (switching to Only for the
the Caxis animated simulation screen)
5900 and
5F00
systems
0742
Integer
Undefined M code number for the start of cylindrical grooving (switching Only for the
to the cylindrical groove animated simulation screen)
5900 and
5F00
systems
0743
Integer
Undefined M code number for the start of Yaxis machining (switching to Only for the
the Yaxis animated simulation screen)
5900 and
5F00
systems
0744 to
0748
Integer
0749
Integer
0750
Real number
500
Initial value of the waiting M code for each machining path Only for TT
when using balance cut B.
31
A. SETTING DATA,
SYSTEM PARAMETER, MTF
APPENDIX
Parameter
No.
Format
Initial
value
0751
Real number
3.
mm specification
0.1
inch specification
3.
mm specification
0.1
inch specification
2.
mm specification
0.08
inch specification
5.
mm specification
0.2
inch specification
0.2
mm specification
0.008
inch specification
0752
0753
0754
0755
Real number
Real number
Real number
Real number
B61804E2/05
Description
Remarks
Parameters
for
animated
drawing
0756
Real number
120
0757
Real number
1.5
0758 to
0768
0, 1
Undefined Cant use. (Dont change the data.)
designation (8 bits)
0769
Real number
0770
Character
Undefined File name of the sub cycle file using the automatic loading
0771
Character
Undefined Axis names and their order (Specify the axis names in the order
in which they are programmed on the NC. Example: XZCY)
0771 to
0776
0.8
0, 1
Undefined Cant use. (Dont change the data.)
designation (8 bits)
NOTE
The undefined character parameter is indicated with the D
code. To return to undefined data after setting data at the
undefined parameter No.0016, 0017, input two or more SP
codes. In this case, instead of the D code, a space is
displayed on the CRT. To change the undefined parameter
to undefined data, input
32
DEL
and
INPUT
A. SETTING DATA,
SYSTEM PARAMETER, MTF
APPENDIX
B61804E2/05
Color
Details
0500
Light blue
0501
Light blue
0502
Yellow
Not used.
0550
White
Axis.
0551
Blue
0552
Red
0553
White
0554
Blue
0555
Blue
0556
Green
0557
Green
0558
Green
0559
Green
0560
Light blue
0561
Light blue
0562
Violet
0563
Yellow
0570
Green
0571
Green
0572
Green
0573
Green
0574
Green
0575 to
0578
Undefined
Undefined
0579
Sea blue
0580
Green
0581
Green
0582
Green
0583
Green
0584
Green
0585
Green
0586
Yellow
Not used.
Yaxis machining parts figure
33
Format
A. SETTING DATA,
SYSTEM PARAMETER, MTF
Parameter
Initial value
No.
APPENDIX
Color
B61804E2/05
Details
0587 to
0589
Not defined
0590
Sea blue
0600
Red
0601
Green
0602
Red
0603
Green
0604
Yellow
0605
Green
0606
Green
Menu display.
0607
Red
0608
Red
0609
Yellow
0610
Light blue
0611
*White
0612
Yellow
0613
Yellow
0614
Red
0615
Yellow
0616
White
0617
White
0618
Violet
0619
White
0620
Green
2ndline message.
0621
Green
0622
Green
0623
Green
Question message.
0624
Light green
0625
Yellow
Error message.
Not used.
Question key word and relevant data.
34
Format
A. SETTING DATA,
SYSTEM PARAMETER, MTF
APPENDIX
B61804E2/05
Parameter
Initial value
No.
Color
0626
Violet
0627
Light blue
Details
Format
0628
Light blue
0629
Violet
0650
Green
Not used.
0651
Green
0652
White
T code display T
0653
Red
O No. display O
0654
Yellow
NC data.
0655
White
Coordinate display X, Y.
0656
Yellow
0657
Yellow
0660
Green
Integer
0661
Blue
Integer
0662
Blue
Integer
0663
Purple
Integer
0664
White
Integer
0665
Red
Integer
0666
Red
Integer
35
A. SETTING DATA,
SYSTEM PARAMETER, MTF
Parameter
Initial value
No.
APPENDIX
Color
B61804E2/05
Details
Format
0667 to
0669
Undefined
7
Undefined
White
Not used
Do not change
the data
0670
White
0671
White
0672 to
0689
Undefined
Undefined
Not used
Color
Red
Green
Yellow
Blue
Violet
Light Blue
White
Setting value
NOTE
Negative symbol () means inverted display.
36
A. SETTING DATA,
SYSTEM PARAMETER, MTF
APPENDIX
B61804E2/05
A.3
MACHINE TOOL FILE
(MTF) TABLE
Parameter
No.
Format
Initial
value
Description
1000
8
Characters
F16
1001
Integer
1002
Integer
1010
Real number
9999.999
mm specification
999.9999
inch specification
1011
Real number
0.02
1020
Real number
0.001
mm specification
0.0001
inch specification
0.001
mm specification
0.0001
inch specification
0.001
mm specification
0.0001
inch specification
0.0001
mm specification
0.000001
inch specification
0.0001
mm specification
0.000001
inch specification
1021
1022
1023
1024
Real number
Real number
Real number
Real number
1025
Real number
0.001
1026
Real number
1.0
1030
Integer
mm specification
inch specification
mm specification
inch specification
mm specification
inch specification
mm specification
inch specification
1031
1032
1033
Integer
Real number
Integer
37
A. SETTING DATA,
SYSTEM PARAMETER, MTF
APPENDIX
Parameter
No.
Format
Initial
value
1034
Integer
mm specification
inch specification
B61804E2/05
Description
Number of decimal digits of the minimum setting unit of
highprecision
high
recision screw lead (E code)
1035
Integer
1036
Integer
1037
Integer
1040
2
Characters
ZW
1041
2
Characters
XU
1042
2
Characters
KK
1043
2
Characters
II
1044
2
Characters
FF
1045
2
Characters
EE
1046
2
Characters
UU
1047
2
Characters
RR
1048
2
Characters
YV
1049
2
Characters
JJ
1050
Integer
Number of turrets (1 or 2)
1 : 2spindle lathe
2 : 4spindle lathe (1 spindle/2 turrets)
1051
Integer
1052
Integer
1053
Integer
1054
Integer
38
Parameter
No.
Format
Initial
value
1055
Integer
1060
A. SETTING DATA,
SYSTEM PARAMETER, MTF
APPENDIX
B61804E2/05
Description
Setting of turret types
0 : Normal 2spindle lathe
1 : 2spindle lathe with reversible
Xaxis (Chasing tool type turret, etc.)
2 : 4spindle lathe
0, 1
10000000 Bit 7
designation (8 bits)
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 6
Bit 7
5
0
4
0
1061 to
1064
Real number
1070 to
1073
Real number
1080
Integer
1.
Program number
1 : Provided
2 : Output with main program and subprogram format.
1081
Integer
1082
Integer
1083
Integer
39
A. SETTING DATA,
SYSTEM PARAMETER, MTF
APPENDIX
Parameter
No.
Format
Initial
value
1084
Integer
B61804E2/05
Description
Simultaneous oneaxis moving sequence (Effective when simultaneous
one axis is specified by system parameters No.0107 to 0115.)
0 : Xaxis moves first in approach, while the
Zaxis moves first in escape at all times.
1 : Inner diameter, end face
Approach: Zaxis Xaxis
Escape: Xaxis Zaxis
Outer diameter
Approach: Xaxis Zaxis
Escape: Zaxis Xaxis
2 : Reverse procedure of set values in 1 (Standard setting)
3 : Zaxis moves first in approach, while Xaxis moves first in escape at
all times.
Movement sequence of sequential approach and escape along one or two
axes if the Yaxis FAPT function is used (valid only when simultaneous
approach or escape along one or two axes is specified in system parameters
0400 to 0405)
0 : Approach is always started from the XY axes. Escape is always
started from the Zaxis.
1 : End face
Approach: Tool axis (Zaxis)
Tool path (XY plane)
Escape: Tool path (XY plane)
Tool axis (Zaxis)
Side face
Approach: Tool axis (Xaxis)
Tool path (ZY plane)
Escape: Tool path (ZY plane)
Tool axis (Xaxis)
2 : Reverse movement sequence of 1 (standard setting)
3 : Approach is always started from the Zaxis. Escape is always started
from the X, Y axes.
1085
Integer
1090
Real number
4000.
mm specification
160.
inch specification
4000.
mm specification
160.
inch specification
1.
mm specification
1.
inch specification
4000.
mm specification
160.
inch specification
1091
1092
1093
Real number
Real number
Real number
40
APPENDIX
B61804E2/05
A. SETTING DATA,
SYSTEM PARAMETER, MTF
Parameter
No.
Format
Initial
value
1100
Integer
1101
Integer
1102
Integer
1103
Integer
Not used
1104
Integer
1105
Integer
1106
Integer
T code value to be output after all process ends (Required for returning to a
specified tool number.
This parameter is set to 1, if this function is not required.)
1107
Integer
1110
Integer
1111
Integer
1112
Integer
1113
Integer
1114
Real number
50
1115
Real number
5000
1116
Real number
1.0
1117
Real number
1.0
1118
Real number
1.0
1119
Real number
1.0
1120
Real number
1.0
1121
Real number
1.0
1122
Real number
0.01
1130
Integer
1131
Integer
1132
Integer
1133
Integer
1134
Integer
1135
Integer
30
1136
Integer
Description
41
A. SETTING DATA,
SYSTEM PARAMETER, MTF
APPENDIX
B61804E2/05
Parameter
No.
Format
Initial
value
1137
Integer
98
1138
Integer
99
1139
Integer
1140
Integer value
M code for override cancel ON (for the balance cut FAPT, type B) (When not
in use: 1)
1141
Integer value
M code for override cancel ON (for the balance cut FAPT, type B) (When not
in use: 1)
1142
Integer
M code for clockwise rotation of the 2nd spindle (for back machining)
(Not used: 1)
1143
Integer
M code for counterclockwise rotation of the 2nd spindle (for back machining)
(Not used: 1)
1144
Integer
1145
Integer
1146 to
1149
Integer
1200
Integer
1201
Integer
1202
Integer
1203
Integer
1204
Integer
32
Threading G code
1205
Integer
92
1206
Integer
90
Not used
1207
Integer
94
Not used
1210
Integer
97
1211
Integer
96
1220
Integer
1221
Integer
1222
Integer
1223
Integer
1224
Integer
Not used
1225
Integer
Not used
1230
Integer
40
1231
Integer
41
1232
Integer
42
Description
42
A. SETTING DATA,
SYSTEM PARAMETER, MTF
APPENDIX
B61804E2/05
Parameter
No.
Format
Initial
value
1240
Integer
Dwell G code
1241
Integer
28
Not used
1242
Integer
29
Not used
1243
Integer
30
Not used
1244
Integer
50
1245
Integer
70
Not used
1246
Integer
71
Not used
1247
Integer
72
Not used
1248
Integer
73
Not used
1249
Integer
74
Not used
1250
Integer
75
Not used
1251
Integer
76
Not used
1252
Integer
54
1253
Integer
55
1260
Integer
98
1261
Integer
99
1262
Integer
G code for return to the initial point (only for 5E00, 5710 series)
1300
Two characters
CH
1301
Real number
0.001
1302
Integer
1303
Real number
4000.
1304
0, 1
designation (8 bits)
00000011
Description
1305
Specified with 0 or
1 (8 bits)
00000000 Bit 7
0
Bit 0
Bit 1
6
0
5
0
4
0
3
0
2
0
43
A. SETTING DATA,
SYSTEM PARAMETER, MTF
APPENDIX
B61804E2/05
Parameter
No.
Format
Initial
value
1306
Integer
1307
Integer
1308
Integer
1309
Real number
1.
mm specification
0.01
inch specification
mm specification
inch specification
1310
Integer
Description
1311
Real number
0.01
No use
1312
Integer
No use
1313
Integer
1314
Integer
1315
Integer
1316
Integer
1317
Integer
Orientation M code
1318
Integer
1319
Integer
1320
Real
1321
Real number
29
M code for preparation of rigid tapping (Only 5700 series. 1 for other series)
1322 to
1339
Integer
1340
Integer
1341
Integer
Specifies the number of decimal places of data specified for the Caxis.
0 : That specified in the least input increment for the Xaxis in MTF 1030
1 : That specified in the least input increment for the Zaxis in MTF 1031
1342
0, 1
designation (8 bit)
1343
1344 to
1349
Integer
1350
Integer
(8 digit)
29
M code of the miscellaneous function for preparing for rigid tapping (valid for
series except 5700 series)
44
A. SETTING DATA,
SYSTEM PARAMETER, MTF
APPENDIX
B61804E2/05
Parameter
No.
Format
Initial
value
1351
Integer
68
1352
Integer
69
1353
Integer
1354
Integer
1355
Integer
1360
Integer
83.
1376
Integer
85.
1377
Integer
89.
1380
Integer
107.
1381
Integer
112.
1382
Integer
113.
1383
Integer
384
1384
Integer
380
1390
Integer
1391
1
characters
1392
2
characters
RR
II
Address specifying the difference in radius of the thread for a multiple thread
cutting cycle (High order: 5710, low order 5E00)
1393
2
characters
PP
KK
Address specifying the thread height for a multiple thread cutting cycle (High
order: 5710, low order 5E00)
1394
2
characters
QQ
DD
Address specifying the depth of the first cut for a multiple thread cutting cycle
(High order: 5710, low order 5E00)
1395
2
characters
PP
AA
Address specifying a tool angle for a multiple thread cutting cycle (High order:
5710, low order 5E00)
1396
2
characters
PP
PP
Address specifying the cutting method for a multiple thread cutting cycle
(High order: 5710, low order 5E00)
1397
2
characters
RR
RR
Description
NOTE
Parameter numbers other than listed above may also
appear on the CRT. These parameters are employed the
system.
Dont change them.
45
A. SETTING DATA,
SYSTEM PARAMETER, MTF
A.4
APPENDIX
B61804E2/05
FUNCTION TABLE
(MTF 2000S)
The parameter numbers 2000s of the MTF (Machine Tool File) are used
as a function table to be referred to when NC data is prepared by the
Symbolic FAPT. When a parameter number of 2000s is referred to, NC
data of the format in accordance with the function code set therein is
prepared. The format of NC data can be altered by changing the function
code to be set in and after the parameter number 2000.
A.4.1
Each parameter in and after the MTF parameter number 2000 is provided
with the following meaning:
Outline
NOTE
For details of the parameters to be referenced by the Yaxis
FAPT function, see Part IX.
Parameter No.
Meaning
Remarks
2000
2001
2002
2003
2004
2005
2006
2007
2008
2009
2010
2011
2012
2013
2014
2015
2016
Setting of coordinate system and output of tool selection T code G50, Txxxx, etc.
2017
G01 X_ Z_ F_ ;
2018
Rapid traverse
coolant ON, etc.
move
command,
2019
command,
2020
In case of I or K command.
46
APPENDIX
B61804E2/05
Parameter No.
A. SETTING DATA,
SYSTEM PARAMETER, MTF
Meaning
Remarks
2021
2022
2023
2024
rpm command
2025
2026
2027
2028
2029
Unused.
2030
2031
2032
2033
2034
2035
2036
2040
2041
2045
2046
M05;
G00X_ Z_ ; etc.
2047
M05;
G00X_ ; etc.
2048
M05;
G00Z_ ; etc.
2049
G98G01Z_ F_ ; or
G98G01X_ F_ ;
2050
M_ ;
G04U_ ; etc.
2051
G01Z_ F_ ; etc.
2052
M_ ;
G04U_ ;
2053
G01Z_F_ ; or
G01X_ F_ ;
2054
G00Z_ ;
47
G50S_ ;
A. SETTING DATA,
SYSTEM PARAMETER, MTF
Parameter No.
APPENDIX
B61804E2/05
Meaning
Remarks
2055
2056
2057
2058
2059
Command block outputs for tapping cycle (G84) and reverse Tapping process relief cutting
tapping cycle (G84.1)
command when canned cycle is used
and MTF 1060 bit 7 is set to 1
2060
2061
2065
Outputs the T code specifying tool offset for each cutting area.
TXXXX;
Outputs the T code specifying the second tool offset for grooving
2066
2067
2068
(Back machining)
2069
(Back machining)
2070
2071
2072
2073
2074
2075
2080
Not used
2081
2082
2083
2084
2085
2100
2101
2102
Start of subprogram
FEED, O_ , etc.
2103
End of subprogram
2104
M98P_ ;
2110
2111
48
APPENDIX
B61804E2/05
Parameter No.
Meaning
A. SETTING DATA,
SYSTEM PARAMETER, MTF
Remarks
2200
2201
2202
2203
2204
2205
Machining type
2: G83.1
3: G83
2206
2207
2208
2209
2210
2211
2212
Block in which cutter compensation for front milling (polar Valid when bit 7 of MTF 1305 is set to
coordinate interpolation) or finishing of Yaxis pattern/contouring 1
is started
2213
2214
2215
2216
2217
2220
2221
2222
2223
2224
2225
49
A. SETTING DATA,
SYSTEM PARAMETER, MTF
Parameter No.
APPENDIX
Meaning
B61804E2/05
Remarks
2230
2231
2232
2233
2234
2235
2240
2241
2242
2243
2244
2245
2300
2301
2302
2303
2304
2305
2306
2307
2308
2309
CAUTION
1 Data is referenced at the beginning of Yaxis machining.
If two or more Yaxis machining processes are defined
continuously, the data is not referenced for the second or
subsequent processes.
2 The data is referenced at the beginning of a turning process.
If two or more turning processes are defined continuously,
the data is not referenced for the second or subsequent
processes.
3 The data is referenced at the beginning of a milling process.
If two or more milling processes are defined continuously,
the data is not referenced for the second or subsequent
processes. The milling process can be a Caxis machining
process or Yaxis machining process.
50
APPENDIX
B61804E2/05
A.4.2
Function Code
A. SETTING DATA,
SYSTEM PARAMETER, MTF
4
Function code of 4 digits
Least significant 1 digit
(major classification)
Most significant 3 digits
(detailed classification)
Function
Special function
Output of G code
51
A. SETTING DATA,
SYSTEM PARAMETER, MTF
APPENDIX
B61804E2/05
other than
(= a)
Least significant
1 digit (major
classification)
Function
No operation
Feed output
Remarks
Output a x 20 feeds
Least significant
1 digit (major
classification)
Function
Remarks
Output of W0
Output of U0
Outputs the address specified in MTF 1394. Depth of the first cut
52
APPENDIX
B61804E2/05
A. SETTING DATA,
SYSTEM PARAMETER, MTF
Least significant
1 digit (major
classification)
Function
Remarks
53
A. SETTING DATA,
SYSTEM PARAMETER, MTF
Most significant
3 digits (detailed
classification)
Least significant
1 digit (major
classification)
APPENDIX
Function
B61804E2/05
Remarks
MTF 1200 (G00) or 1201 The G code of MTF 1200 and 1201 are output in the
(G01) is output
case of rapid traverse move and cutting feed (line),
respectively.
MTF 1202 (G02) or 1203 The G code of MTF 1202 and 1203 are output in the
(G03) is output
case of CW circular and CCW circular, respectively.
G codes of MTF 1220 and The G codes of MTF 1220 and 1221 are output in the
1221 are output
case of absolute command and incremental
command, respectively.
Output MTF 1231 (G41) or MTF 1231 for left side cutter compensation MTF 1232
1232 (G42)
for right side cutter compensation
G codes of MTF 1202 and The G codes of MTF 1203 and 1202 output in the
1203 are output
case of CW circular and CCW circular, respectively.
G codes of MTF 1222 and The G codes of MTF 1222 and 1223 are output in the
1223 are output
case of mm input and inch input, respectively.
54
A. SETTING DATA,
SYSTEM PARAMETER, MTF
APPENDIX
B61804E2/05
Most significant
3 digits (detailed
classification)
Least significant
1 digit (major
classification)
Function
Remarks
G codes of MTF 1260 and MTF 1260 at every minute feed, MTF 1261 at every
1261 are output
revolution feed
Initial point return G code is The G98 is output only in the case of B, C of G code
output
system
G7.1 is output.
The G code (G98) set to G codes of MTF 1260 1261 are output.
MTF 1260 is output
CAUTION
The G codes of MTF 1260 1261 are modal
The G code (G99) set to
managed.
Thus, when the function code
MTF 1261 is output
specifying these G code output. Also, this G code
is not output when 1 is set to MTF 1260 1261.
Least significant
1 digit (major
classification)
Function
Remarks
T code output
55
A. SETTING DATA,
SYSTEM PARAMETER, MTF
Most significant
3 digits (detailed
classification)
Least significant
1 digit (major
classification)
APPENDIX
B61804E2/05
Function
Remarks
Maximum speed clamp It is output only when the MTF 1085 has the constant
value S code output
surface speed control function and the constant
surface speed control function is used in the process
parameter (system parameter 0108 0114).
F code output
R code output
Q code output
L code output
P code output
Outputs the address specified in MTF 1395. Tool angle (valid for the Series 15 only)
Outputs the address specified in MTF 1395. Tool angle (valid for the Series 16 only)
Outputs the address specified in MTF 1396. Specified cut method (valid for the
Series 15 only)
F code output
Outputs
the
address
specified in MTF1398
1
T code output
Outputs
the
address
specified in MTF1399
1
B code output
Outputs
the
address
specified in MTF1400.
B code output
Outputs
the
address
specified in MTF1400.
T code output
T code output
56
APPENDIX
B61804E2/05
A. SETTING DATA,
SYSTEM PARAMETER, MTF
Least significant
1 digit (major
classification)
Function
Remarks
NC data output
Least significant
1 digit (major
classification)
Function
Remarks
Spindle forward revolution The M codes of MTF 1130 or 1131 are output
M code output (M03 or corresponding to the spindle revolution direction set
M04)
by the process parameter (system parameter 0108
0113) and turret position MTF 1051.
The spindle stop M code When the spindle revolution direction is reversed the
(M05) is output on spindle M05 (MTF 1132) is output. Nothing is output when the
reverse revolution
direction of revolution does not change.
Spindle stop M code output The M code set to the MTF 1132 is output. Also, the
(M05)
M03 M05 are modal managed and the M code
which is the same as the modal value is not output.
Coolant on M code output The M code of MTF 1133 is output. However, this
(M08)
applies to the coolant use process only (by
designation of process parameter).
Coolant off M code output The M code of MTF 1134 is output. Also, the M08 and
(M09)
M09 are modal managed and it is output only when
it is different from the modal value.
Program end
output (M30)
Optional stop
output (M01)
57
A. SETTING DATA,
SYSTEM PARAMETER, MTF
Most significant
3 digits (detailed
classification)
Least significant
1 digit (major
classification)
APPENDIX
Function
B61804E2/05
Remarks
Milling machining M code The M code set to the MTF 1315 and 1316. It is
or turning machining M selected by machining type.
code output
Spindle stop M code output The M code set to the MTF 1132. It is output when the
milling machining is executed from the turning
machining or the turning machining is executed from
the milling machining.
Outputs
the
Caxis M code specified in MTF1351
clamping M code (M68).
Outputs
the
Caxis M code specified in MTF1352
unclamping M code (M69).
Least significant
1 digit (major
classification)
Function
Remarks
Spindle range selection M The M code (MTF 1110 1113) corresponding to the
code
selected range is output. Also, the M code of MTF
1110 1113 is modal managed.
Turret selection M code The M code of MTF 1054 1056 is output. Currently
output (unused)
it is not used.
58
A. SETTING DATA,
SYSTEM PARAMETER, MTF
APPENDIX
B61804E2/05
Least significant
1 digit (major
classification)
Function
Remarks
Z0 output
W0 output
X0
U0
R0
R0
R0
R0
F0
F0
F0
F0
C0 output
H0 output
59
A. SETTING DATA,
SYSTEM PARAMETER, MTF
APPENDIX
B61804E2/05
Least significant
1 digit (major
classification)
M code value
M code output
S code value
S code output
T code value
T code output
Function
Remarks
NOTE
With the function codes of major classes 8, 9 and A, the M,
S, T code specified by the first 3 digits of the function code
is output. The value of the M, S, T code to be output is
specified by a 3digit hexadecimal number.
8: M code
9: S code
0: T code
output M, S, T code value
(hexadecimal number)
Example)
The function code to output S100 is specified as follows.
0
60
APPENDIX
B61804E2/05
A. SETTING DATA,
SYSTEM PARAMETER, MTF
Function
1
to
7
to
F
Least significant
1 digit (major
classification)
Remarks
(b)
8
to
F
(b)
Example 1)
If the function code is set to 503F, 0064, the following is output as NC
data output.
P100
Example 2)
Set No. MTF 2200 as follows.
2200 = 0705, 504F, 1F40, 0004, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000
NC data at the Caxis machining head part is output as follows.
M98P8000;
CAUTION
1 Any other function code than those listed in this table is
undefined. Any other code than them must not be set to the
function table.
2 Difference between CC01 and 0107, between DD01 and
1107.
If the latter parameter is referred to, W0 and U0 are output
always. Besides, for the former parameter, W0 and U0 are
output only when it is the symmetry axis resulting from
division.
61
A. SETTING DATA,
SYSTEM PARAMETER, MTF
A.4.3
Size of Function Table
APPENDIX
B61804E2/05
The function table of MTF 2000s is fixed in size, that is, the number of
function codes which can be set for each parameter number is fixed.
The number of the function codes which can be set to MTF 2000s is equal
to the number of those displayed on the picture, and a larger number of
function codes cannot be specified any longer. When all of the allowable
number of function codes are not used, 0000 should be set to the
remaining ones.
The number of function codes which can be set to MTF 2000s is listed in
the following table.
Parameter Number of Parameter Number of Parameter Number of
No.
function
No.
function
No.
function
2000
2001
2002
2003
2004
2005
2006
2007
2008
2009
2010
2011
2012
2013
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
2020
2021
2022
2023
2024
2025
2026
2027
2028
2029
10
10
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
8
8
10
10
9
8
7
7
10
8
7
4
10
7
2030
2031
2032
2033
2034
2035
2036
4
10
10
10
10
6
6
2040
2041
6
6
2045
2046
2047
2048
2049
2050
2051
2052
2053
2054
2055
2056
2057
2058
2059
2060
2061
2065
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
6
6
6
6
10
10
10
6
2100
2101
2102
2103
2104
10
10
10
10
10
2110
2111
10
10
2200
2201
2202
2203
2204
2205
2206
2207
2208
2209
2210
2211
2212
2213
2214
2215
10
6
10
10
4
10
4
10
4
10
4
4
10
10
10
10
2300
2301
2302
2303
2304
2305
2306
2307
2308
2309
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
(Example)
2203 = 5702, 5802, 6002, 6102, 1101, 0001, AA01, 0903, 0C03, 0503
G17 G98 G98 G81 X
Z
C
R
P
F
G18 G99 G82
G19
62
B61804E2/05
A. SETTING DATA,
SYSTEM PARAMETER, MTF
APPENDIX
Example of Setting
2000 = 0300, 0104,
FEED %
2001 = 0205, 0004,
M05 ;
2002 = 0100, 0000,
FEED
2003 = 0100, 0000,
FEED
2004 = 0100, 0000,
FEED
2005 = 0100, 0000,
FEED
2006 = 0100, 0000,
FEED
2007 = 0100, 0000,
FEED
2008 = 0100, 0000,
FEED
2009 = 0003, 0004,
TXX00 ;
2010 = 0003, 0004,
TXX00 ;
2011 = 0003, 0004,
TXX00 ;
2012 = 0003, 0004,
TXX00 ;
2013 = 0003, 0004,
TXX00 ;
2014 = 0003, 0004,
TXX00 ;
2015 = 0003, 0004,
TXX00 ;
2016 = 4402, 1101,
G50 X
2017 = 5202, 5002,
G90 G00
G91 G01
2018 = 5202, 5002,
G90 G00
G91 G01
2019 = 5202, 5002,
G90 G00
G91 G01
2020 = 5202, 5102,
G90 G02
G91 G03
2021 = 5202, 5102,
G90 G92
G91 G03
2022 = 5802, 5202,
G98 G90
G99 G91
2023 = 0502, 1101,
G92 X
63
0004, 0603,
;
0
0703, 0004,
TXXXX ;
0000, 0000,
0004,
;
0505,
M30
0000,
0004,
;
0004,
;
0004,
;
0004,
;
0004,
;
0004,
;
0004,
;
0303,
Smax
0001,
Z
0000, 0000
0000, 0000
0000, 0000
0000, 0000
0000, 0000
0000, 0000
0000, 0000
0004, 0002,
;
G00
AA01, 0503,
C
F
0103, 0004
TXXXX ;
0004, 0000
;
A. SETTING DATA,
SYSTEM PARAMETER, MTF
APPENDIX
B61804E2/05
2024 = 0002, 0105, 0004, 0006, 0004, 1002, 0203, 0005, 0004,
G00 M05 ;
MXX ;
G97 S
M03 ;
M04
2025 = 0002, 0205, 0004, 0006, 0004, 0000, 0000, 0000
G00 M05 ;
MXX ;
2026 = 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000
2027 = 4002, 8801, 0004, 0000
G04 U
;
2028 = 0105, 0004, 0006, 0004, 1102, 0403, 0005, 0004, 0000,
M05 ;
MXX ;
G96 S
M03 ;
M04
2029 = 1002, 0203, 0004, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000
G97 S
;
2030 = 4402, 0303, 0004, 0000
G50 Smax ;
2031 = 5202, 5002, 1101, 0001, AA01, 0305, 0004, 0000, 0000,
G90 G00 X
Z
C
M08 ;
G91 G01
2032 = 5202, 5002, 1101, 0001, AA01, 0305, 0004, 0000, 0000,
G90 G00 X
Z
C
M08 ;
G91 G01
2033 = 5202, 5002, 1101, 0001, 0000, 0405, 0004, 0000, 0000,
G90 G00 X
Z
M09 ;
G91 G01
2034 = 5202, 5002, 1101, 0001, 0000, 0405, 0004, 0000, 0000,
G90 G00 X
Z
M09 ;
G91 G01
2035 = 0100, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000
FEED
2036 = 0100, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000
FEED
2040 = 0003, 0004, 0605, 0004, 0000, 0000
TXX00 ;
M01 ;
2041 = 0003, 0004, 0605, 0004, 0000, 0000
TXX00 ;
M01 ;
2045 = 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000,
2046 = 5202, 5002, 1101, 0001, 0000, 0000, 0004, 0000, 0000,
G90 G00 X
Z
;
G91 G01
2047 = 5202, 5002, 1101, 0001, 0000, 0000, 0004, 0000, 0000,
G90 G00 X
Z
;
G91 G01
2048 = 5202, 5002, 1101, 0001, 0000, 0000, 0004, 0000, 0000,
G90 G00 X
Z
;
G91 G01
2049 = 7002, 5202, 5002, 1101, 0001, 0503, 0004, 0000, 0000,
G98 G90 G00 X
Z
F
;
G91 G01
2050 = 0000, 0000, 4002, 8801, 0004, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000,
G04 U
;
2051 = 7002, 5202, 5002, 1101, 0001, 0503, 0004, 0000, 0000,
G98 G90 G00 X
Z
F
;
G91 G01
2052 = 0000, 0000, 4002, 8801, 0004, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000,
G04 U
;
64
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
B61804E2/05
A. SETTING DATA,
SYSTEM PARAMETER, MTF
APPENDIX
0000, 0000
0000, 0000
0903, 0503, 0004, 0000, 0000, 0000
R
F
;
FS15 format
2060 = 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000
2061 = 4B02, 1101, 0001, E101, E201, E301, 6601, 0D03, 0F03, 0004
G76 X
Z
I
K
D
F
A
P
;
FS16 format
2060 = 4B02, 0E03,
G76 P
2061 = 4B02, 1101,
G76 X
2065 = 0103, 0004,
TXXXX ;
2100 = 0603, 0004,
0
;
2101 = 0703, 0004,
TXXX ;
2102 = 0100, 0603,
FEED 0
2103 = 0205, 0004,
M05 ;
2104 = 0705, 0803,
M98 P
2110 = 0000, 0000,
Not used
2111 = 0000, 0000,
Not used
2200 = 0100, 0004,
FEED ;
2201 = 0003, 0004,
TXX00 ;
2202 = 4402, 1101,
G50 X
2203 = 5802, 6002,
G98 G98
G99
2204 = 0004, 0000,
;
65
0E401
R
0001,
Z
0000,
0004,
;
E101,
R
0000,
0004, 1005,
;
MXX
0004, 0000,
;
AA01, 0004,
C
;
1101, 0001,
X
Z
0000
A. SETTING DATA,
SYSTEM PARAMETER, MTF
APPENDIX
2205 = 5802,
G98
G99
2206 = 0004,
;
2207 = 5802,
G98
G99
2208 = 0503,
F
B61804E2/05
2300 = 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000
2301 = 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000
2302 = 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000
2303 = 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000
2304 = 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000
2305 = 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000
2306 = 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000
2307 = 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000
2308 = 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000
2309 = 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000
66
A. SETTING DATA,
SYSTEM PARAMETER, MTF
APPENDIX
B61804E2/05
A.4.4
Reference of Function
Table
Parameter
No.
Description
2000
2016
G50X_ Z_ ;
2017
2002 to
2008
or
2035
or
2036
2016
G50X_ Z_ S;
G00T_ ;
2024
or
2028
67
A. SETTING DATA,
SYSTEM PARAMETER, MTF
Point to be Referred to
APPENDIX
Parameter
No.
B61804E2/05
Description
2018
or
2031
2032
In case the machining process except for the bar feed process
2018 is referred to for 2 axes atatime, 2031 and 2032 are
referred to for 1 axis atatime. At the same time whether it is axis
2 or axis 1, it is according to the system parameter setting No.108
115 of bit 3.
2046
or
2047
2048
2017
2025
2024
2030
2025
2028
2020
2021
(16) Escape
2019
2033
2034
2009 to
2015
or
2040
or
2041
2017
2001
Trailer part Spindle stop, tool offset cancel, program stop, EOR
68
A. SETTING DATA,
SYSTEM PARAMETER, MTF
APPENDIX
B61804E2/05
Point referenced
(1) Home position (start of program)
Parameter
No.
Descriptions
2000
2016
G50 X_ Z_ ;
2017
2036
2016
(4) Approach
Simultaneous 2 axes
2047 and
2048
Simultaneous 1 axis
Select the Simultaneous 2 axes or 1 axis depending on the
setting of bit 3 of system parameter No.107.
2049
69
A. SETTING DATA,
SYSTEM PARAMETER, MTF
Point referenced
APPENDIX
Parameter
No.
B61804E2/05
Descriptions
(6) Dwell
2050
2051
(8) Dwell
2052
2053
2054
(11) Escape
Simultaneous 2 axes
2033 and
2034
Simultaneous 1 axis
Select the Simultaneous 2 axes or 1 axis depending on the
setting of bit 4 of system parameter No.107.
2041
2017
2001
Trailer part
Spindle stop and tool offset cancel
Program stop and EOR
70
A. SETTING DATA,
SYSTEM PARAMETER, MTF
APPENDIX
B61804E2/05
2) Pullout system 2
Point reference
(1) Home position (start of program)
Parameter
No.
Descriptions
2000
2016
G50 X_ Z_ ;
2017
2036
2016
(4) Approach
Simultaneous 2 axes
2047 and
2048
Simultaneous 1 axis
Select the Simultaneous 2 axes or 1 axis depending on the
setting of bit 3 of system parameter No.107.
2049
71
A. SETTING DATA,
SYSTEM PARAMETER, MTF
Point reference
APPENDIX
Parameter
No.
B61804E2/05
Descriptions
(6) Dwell
2050
2051
(8) Dwell
2052
2053
(10) Escape
Simultaneous 2 axes
2033 and
2034
Simultaneous 1 axis
Select the Simultaneous 2 axes or 1 axis depending on the
setting of bit 4 of system parameter No.107.
2041
2017
2001
Trailer part
Spindle stop and tool offset cancel
Program stop and EOR
72
A. SETTING DATA,
SYSTEM PARAMETER, MTF
APPENDIX
B61804E2/05
Point referenced
(1) Home position (start of program)
Parameter
No.
Descriptions
2000
2016
G50 X_ Z_ ;
2017
2036
2016
2024
or
2028
73
A. SETTING DATA,
SYSTEM PARAMETER, MTF
Point referenced
APPENDIX
Parameter
No.
(4) Approach
B61804E2/05
Descriptions
First movement from the tool exchange point Coolant on
2024 or
Simultaneous 2 axes
2027 and
2028
Simultaneous 1 axis
Select the Simultaneous 2 axes or 1 axis depending on the
setting of bit 3 of system parameter No.107.
2050
2051
(7) Dwell
2952
2054
(9) Escape
Simultaneous 2 axes
2033 and
2034
Simultaneous 1 axis
Select the Simultaneous 2 axes or 1 axis depending on the
setting of bit 4 of system parameter No.107.
2041
2017
2001
Trailer part
Spindle stop and tool offset cancel
Program stop and EOR
74
A. SETTING DATA,
SYSTEM PARAMETER, MTF
APPENDIX
B61804E2/05
Point referenced
(1) Home position (start of program)
Parameter
No.
Descriptions
2000
2016
G50 X_ Z_ ;
2017
2036
2016
2024
or
2028
(4) Approach
Simultaneous 2 axes
2027 and
2028
Simultaneous 1 axis
Select the Simultaneous 2 axes or 1 axis depending on the
setting of bit 3 of system parameter No.107.
75
A. SETTING DATA,
SYSTEM PARAMETER, MTF
Point referenced
APPENDIX
Parameter
No.
B61804E2/05
Descriptions
(5) Dwell
2050
(6) Dwell
2052
(7) Escape
Simultaneous 2 axes
2033 and
2034
Simultaneous 1 axis
Select the Simultaneous 2 axes or 1 axis depending on the
setting of bit 4 of system parameter No.107.
2041
2017
2001
Trailer part
Spindle stop and tool offset cancel
Program stop and EOR
76
APPENDIX
B61804E2/05
Point referenced
(1) Home position (start of program)
Parameter
No.
A. SETTING DATA,
SYSTEM PARAMETER, MTF
Descriptions
2000
2016
G50 X_ Z_ ;
2017
2200
2202
2024
(4) Approach
Simultaneous 3 axes
2031 and
2032
2031
2032
2211
CAUTION
1 Set the simultaneous 1 axis or simultaneous 2 axes (XZ
C).
2 Never set the function code of AA01 (Caxis shift
command).
NOTE
1 If the Caxis machining process has been defines
continuously, the second process and thereafter cannot be
referenced.
2 Perform the shift command of Caxis.
77
A. SETTING DATA,
SYSTEM PARAMETER, MTF
Point referenced
(5) (9)
Line or rotation shift
APPENDIX
Parameter
No.
B61804E2/05
Descriptions
In the case of MTF No.1304 bit 1 = 0 (when no drilling canned cycle is used)
In the case of servo motor control system
2017
2017
2211
In the case of MTF No.1304 bit 1 = (the drilling canned cycle is used)
In the case of servo motor control system
2203 to
2206
2203 to
2206
2211
(10) Escape
2019 or
Simultaneous 2 axes
2033 and
2034
Simultaneous 1 axis
Select the Simultaneous 2 axes or 1 axis depending on the
setting of bit 5 of system parameter No.300 to 304.
2201
2017
2001
Trailer part
Spindle stop and tool offset cancel
Program stop and EOR
78
A. SETTING DATA,
SYSTEM PARAMETER, MTF
APPENDIX
B61804E2/05
Point reference
Parameter
No.
Descriptions
2000
2016
G50 X_ Z_ ;
2017
2200
2202
2024
(4) Approach
Simultaneous 3 axes
2031 and
2032
2017
79
A. SETTING DATA,
SYSTEM PARAMETER, MTF
APPENDIX
B61804E2/05
NOTE
1 When the Caxis machining process has been continuously
defined, the second process and thereafter are not
referenced.
2 The polar coordinate interpolation is started before the point
(5) of line shift.
Point referenced
(6), (8), (9), and (10)
Circular move
Parameter
No.
2020 or
2021
(13) Escape
Description
Circular interpolation shift command (NOTE 3)
MTF 1082 = 0, 1 (I and J commands)
MTF 1082 = 2, 3 (Radius R command)
Shift command to tool exchange point Coolant off
2019 or
Simultaneous 2 axes
2033 and
2034
Simultaneous 1 axis
Select the Simultaneous 2 axes or 1 axis depending on the
setting of bit 5 of system parameter No.304.
2201
2017
2001
Trailer part
Spindle stop and tool offset cancel
Program stop and EOR
NOTE
3 Cancel the polar coordinate interpolation after the point (11)
of circular shift
80
A. SETTING DATA,
SYSTEM PARAMETER, MTF
APPENDIX
B61804E2/05
1 or 0
1060
1
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
In this case the NC format output will conform to the settings of MTF
2059.
2059=5702, 5802, 6302, 1101, 0001, 0903, 0503, 0004, 0000, 0000
G17 G98 G84 X
Z
R
F
;
G18 G99 G84.1
G19
With the above setting the tapping processing NC format output would
be G17 G99 G84 Z_ R_ F_ ;
2) When MTF 1060 bit 7 is set to 0, an NC format with the G codes for
a threading processing is output.
1 or 0
1060
0
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
In this case the NC format output will conform to the settings of MTF
2022 for retapping and MTF 2059 for relief cutting.
2022=5802, 5202, 0402, 1101, 0001, 6601, 0004
G98 G90 G32 X
Z
F
;
G99 G91
E
2059=0205, 0004, 0001, 0005, 0004, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000
M05 ;
Z
M04 ;
M03
With the above settings the tapping operation NC format output would be
either:
(1) Where spindle rotation direction ... SD = 0 (forward rotation)
G97 S_ M03;
.
.
G99 G32 Z_ F_ ; . . . . . retapping
M05; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . stop spindle
Z_ M04; . . . . . . . . . . . . return relief
In contrast,
(2) Where spindle rotation direction ... SD = 1 (reverse rotation)
G97 S_ M04;
.
.
G99 G32 Z_ F_ ; . . . . . retapping
M05; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . stop spindle
Z_ M03; . . . . . . . . . . . . return relief
81
A. SETTING DATA,
SYSTEM PARAMETER, MTF
A.4.5
Referencing an
Optional Function
Table
APPENDIX
B61804E2/05
Parameters MTF 2300 to MTF 2399 are listed in the function table
specifying special function codes. Special NC data items can be output
to any block according to the table.
(1) Function table specifying special function codes
Parameter No.
Meaning
Remarks
2300
2301
Same as above
Same as above
2303
Same as above
Same as above
2304
Same as above
Same as above
2305
Same as above
Same as above
2306
Same as above
Same as above
2307
Same as above
Same as above
2308
Same as above
Same as above
2309
Same as above
Same as above
82
Function
Remarks
A. SETTING DATA,
SYSTEM PARAMETER, MTF
APPENDIX
B61804E2/05
2000
2001
2002 to
2008
2009 to
2015
2016
2017 and
2018
2019
2020 and
2021
High order
00
01
02
03
04
05
05
06
Low order
00
00
00 to 06
00 to 06
00
04
00 and 01
2002
2023
2024 and
2025
2026
2027
2028 to
2030
2031 and
2032
2033 and
2034
High order
07
08
09
0A
0B
0C
05
05
Low order
00
00
00 and 01
00
00
00 to 02
2035 and
2036
2040 and
2041
2045 to
2054
2055 and
2056
2057 and
2058
2059
2100 to
2104
2200
High order
0E
0F
10
02
03
16
0D
11
Low order
00 to 02
00 to 02
00 to 09
00
00 to 04
00
2201
2202
2203 to
2210
2211
2212 to
2213
2300 to
2309
High order
12
13
14
15
05
17
Low order
00
00
00 to 07
00
07 and 08
00 to 09
No. of parameter in
the function table
1word
setting
No. of parameter in
the function table
1word
setting
No. of parameter in
the function table
1word
setting
07 and 08 07 and 08
83
02 and 03 05 and 06
A. SETTING DATA,
SYSTEM PARAMETER, MTF
APPENDIX
B61804E2/05
The meanings of the highorders bits of the specified word for referencing
the optional function table are as follows.
00: LEADER PART
01: TRAILER PART
02: PROCESS START
03: PROCESS END
04: FROM
05: LINEAR INTERPOLATION
06: CIRCULAR INTERPOLATION
07: THREAD CUTTING
08: THREAD CUTTING CYCLE
09: SPINDLE
0A: TURRET
0B: DWELL
0C: CSS CONTROL (spindle control)
0D: SUB PROGRAM (start and end of a subprogram)
0E: SPECIAL PROC. START
0F: SPECIAL PROC. END
10: BAR FEED MOTION
11: CAXIS PROCESS START
12: CAXIS PROCESS END
13: CAXIS PROCESS FROM
14: CAXIS PROCESS FIXED CYCLE
15: SPINDLE OPERATION
16: FIXED CYCLE FOR LATHE
17: OPTIONAL BLOCK OUTPUT Newly added
(3) Setting example
Example 1) G65P1000L1;
M1;
Assume that the above NC data for a miscellaneous machining call and
optional stop is output to the next block after block number 0.
Specify the following for the MTF function table:
MTF 2000= 0300, 0104, 0004, 0603, 0004, 000E, 1700, 0000, 0000, 0000
FEED %
;
0
:
MTF2300
MTF 2300= 472F, 0041, 504F, 03E8, 4C1F, 0001, 0004, 0605, 0004, 0000
G
65
P
1000 L
1
;
M1 ;
84
APPENDIX
B61804E2/05
A. SETTING DATA,
SYSTEM PARAMETER, MTF
Example 2
When the following is specified, another function table can be
referenced from the referenced function table.
MTF 2000= 0300, 0104, 0004, 0603, 0004, 000E, 1700, 0000, 0000, 0000
FEED %
;
0
:
MTF2300
MTF 2300= 0605, 0004, 000E, 1701, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000,0000
M01 ;
MTF2301
MTF 2301= 000A, 0004, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000
T0000 ;
(4) Notes
NOTE
Do not have a table reference itself. Also, do not reference
the referencing table again from the referenced table.
If a table is referenced in this way, the output of the same
function table continues until memory is full, then the
following message is output and processing stops.
WARNING! CHECK INPUT DATA
When this message is displayed, check and correct the
function table and output the NC data again.
Example 1)
Setting in which a table references itself
MTF 2300= 0605, 0004, 000E, 1701, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000
M01 ;
MTF2300
The table references itself.
Example 2)
Setting in which a referencing table is referenced again from the
referenced table
MTF 2300= 0605, 0004, 000E, 1701, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000
M01 ;
MTF2301
MTF 2301= 0028, 0004, 000E, 1702, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000
M02 ;
MTF2302
MTF 2302= 0038, 0004, 000E, 1700, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000
M03 ;
MTF2300
The referencing table is referenced
again from the referenced table.
85
A. SETTING DATA,
SYSTEM PARAMETER, MTF
APPENDIX
B61804E2/05
A.5
ERROR MESSAGES
A.5.1
Errors Common to All
Screens
Message
CAN
NOT
FUNCTION
USE
Meaning
Remedy
An error is included in any one of input data. The data indicated by the cursor includes an
error. Input correct data.
KEY IN AGAIN
KEY IN DATA
86
APPENDIX
B61804E2/05
A. SETTING DATA,
SYSTEM PARAMETER, MTF
A.5.2
Errors at Defining
Figures (Menu 2)
Message
Meaning
Remedy
END POINT OR GROOVE At the entry of equal pitch continuous groove, Check the end point or the groove direction.
DIRECTION
IS
NOT an error exists at the end point or in the
CORRECT!
groove direction and the figure can be
correctly defined.
END POINT OR NECK At the entry of neck corner, an error exists Check the end point value or neck width.
WIDTH IS NOT CORRECT!
and in the end point value specification or the
neck width and the figure can not be correctly
defined.
END POINT,
QUANTITY
CORRECT!
PITCH OR At the entry of equal pitch continuous groove, Check the end point, pitch or quantity
IS
NOT any one of the end point, pitch or quantity is
incorrect.
GROOVE WIDTH OR PITCH At the entry of equal pitch continuous groove, Increase the pitch value to larger than the
IS NOT CORRECT!
the pitch value is smaller than the groove groove width.
width.
KEY IN REPEAT NO.
Figure elements are tried to copy without Input the repetition number.
entering the repetition number.
POINT
IS Pattern figure is tried to enter before the end Set the end point of the last element.
point value of the last element is defined.
THE
LAST
FIGURE At setting multiple face milling figures, the Define the end point value of the last figure,
ELEMENT HAS NO END end point value of the last figure is not then input the next figure data.
POINT.
defined.
TOO
MANY
SYMBOL
ELEMENT 1) At the entry of part figure, the number of Decrese the number of elements.
external elements exceeds the limited
number.
2) At the entry of part figure, the number of
internal elements exceeds the limited
number.
87
A. SETTING DATA,
SYSTEM PARAMETER, MTF
APPENDIX
B61804E2/05
A.5.3
Errors at Machining
Definition (Menu 4) and
NC Data Preparation
(Menu 5)
Message
Meaning
Remedy
FINISH ALLOWANCE IS NOT Zero or a negative value is ontered as a Input a positive value.
finishing allowance in face milling.
CORRECT.
INPUT A POSITIVE DATA.
REGISTER
ERROR
A.5.4
Errors at Animation
Drawing (Menu 6)
Message
Meaning
Remedy
INTERFERENCE
ALARM During checking NC data by using the Recheck the NC data.
(HD1 & CHUCK/TAIL STOCK) animation drawing function, interference
occurs between the turret 1 and the chuck or
tail stock.
INTERFERENCE
ALARM During checking NC data by using the Recheck the NC data.
(HD2 & CHUCK/TAIL STOCK) animation drawing function in FS15TTF,
interference occurs between the turret 1 and
the chuck or tail stock.
INTERFERENCE
(HD1 & HD2)
ALARM During checking NC data by using the Recheck the NC data, or modify the NC
animation drawing function in FS15TTF, data, by using the automatic collision
interference occurs between the tools of the preventive function (option).
turrets 1 and 2.
88
APPENDIX
B61804E2/05
A. SETTING DATA,
SYSTEM PARAMETER, MTF
A.5.5
Errors at Accessing
the Submemory
Message
Meaning
Remedy
files,
then
FILE OVERFLOW
store
SUB
MEMORY
INITIALIZED
89
A. SETTING DATA,
SYSTEM PARAMETER, MTF
APPENDIX
B61804E2/05
A.5.6
Others
Message
Meaning
COLLATING ERROR
(M: MEMORY I: INPUT)
ILLEGAL FORMAT
DETECTED
Remedy
LOCKED PARAMETER
When the tool information contents are Check the tool ID No.
copied, the tool ID No. specified as a copy
source is not found.
THIS TOOL HAS ALREADY At tooling one by one on the tooling data
REGISTERED
screen, the tool ID No. already tooled is
specified.
TV ERROR INCLUDING
90
APPENDIX
B61804E2/05
The following tables list the functions and parameters not supported by
the models/series.
Model
Series
Unsupported function
III 3.2.2 Part figure input (Input method with Trapezoidal groove definition
figure)
III 3.2.6 Batch input functions for chamfering Corner R batch input
and corner R
III 3.2.7 Pattern figure input function
Machining Definition
IV 2.5
All functions
All functions
AUTOMATIC
PROCESS All functions (*4)
DETERMINATION FUNCTION
IX
All functions
*1 The automatic thread depth specification function for corner type 3 cut
by necking (necking for threads) is not supported.
*2 Menu 4 (machining definition) has a different definition screen layout.
See Appendix B.1 for details.
91
APPENDIX
B61804E2/05
Data type
0671
Integer
Description
Machining area (CAF) drawing color
0702
0, 1
Bit 5
designation (8 bits)
0703
0, 1
Bit 7
designation (8 bits)
For the automatic process determination function, use of a drill bit with the
same diameter as the bore is
0 : Disabled
1 : Enabled
0704
0, 1
Bit 3
designation (8 bits)
Bit 4
Bit 6
Bit 7
0705
0, 1
Bit 6
designation (8 bits)
0708
0, 1
Bit 4
designation (8 bits)
92
APPENDIX
B61804E2/05
(4) It is impossible to use the MTFs that cannot be specified under Data
setting, the MTFs described in VII 1.13, and the MTFs listed below,
although they are described in the manual.
Parameter numbers 2000 to 2999
Parameter No.
Description
2209
2210
2214
2215
Function code
Function
code
6
Function
Remark
G7.1 is output.
93
APPENDIX
B61804E2/05
B.1
MACHINING
DEFINITION FOR
5700 SERIES
B.1.1
Machining Definition of
Turning
94
B61804E2/05
B.1.1.1
APPENDIX
Selection of kinds of
machining
The major types of machining required for machining are displayed on the
soft keys below the screen as shown above.
Press CENTER HOLE: the soft key display changes to the menu for
center hole drilling. (See Fig. B.1.1.1 (b)).
Press TURN: the soft key display changes to the menu for turning. See
Fig. B.1.1.1 (c).
Press GROOV THREAD: the soft key display changes to the menu for
grooving and thread cutting. See Fig. B.1.1.1 (d).
Press CAXIS: the soft key display changes to the menu for Caxis
machining. See Fig. B.1.1.1 (e).
at the leftmost end under the conditions shown in Fig.
Press key
B.1.1.1 (b) to (e) above, and the soft key display shown in Fig. B.1.1.1
(a) above is selected.
Press key
at the rightmost end: the soft key display changes in the
following sequence:
(b)(c)(d)(e)(b) ....
[CENTER DRILL] . . .
[DRILLING] . . . . . . . .
[REAMER] . . . . . . . . .
[TAP] . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
[SUB CYCLE] . . . . . . .
95
APPENDIX
B61804E2/05
[ROUGH O.D.] . . . .
[SFIN O.D.] . . . . . .
[FIN O.D.] . . . . . . . .
[ROUGH I.D.] . . . . .
[SFIN I.D.] . . . . . . .
[FIN I.D.] . . . . . . . . .
[SUB CYCLE] . . . . .
96
B61804E2/05
APPENDIX
B.1.1.2
Process change and
correction
APPENDIX
B61804E2/05
B.1.1.3
Output of only single
process
B.1.1.4
Tool data
Only one process can be corrected if required after all processes are
prepared, and only NC data of its process can be output.
Press CORR. & OUT when the screen in Fig. B.1.1.2 (a) appears: the
screen as shown in Fig. B.1.1.2 (b) will appear.
Select the process to be output independently as NC data, using Cursor
* or Cursor *, and press NEXT PAGE.
If the working process is specified on the process chart screen, the screen
changes and the tool information required for working definition is
prompted.
Tool data is displayed on the lefthand side of the screen and the tool
picture is displayed on the righthand side of it. (The tool picture is
displayed if the optional animationdrawing function is available. To
display the tool picture, press the soft key CHECK.)
98
B61804E2/05
APPENDIX
TL = (NOTE 1)
TN = (NOTE 2)
TM =
ID = (NOTE 3)
NOTE
1 The turret No. prompt is displayed if there are more than 1
tool resets. The number of tool rests is to be set in No.MTF
1050.
2 Input an integer consisting of up to two digits as TN and TM.
3 The tool management number (ID) to be input must have
been registered in the tool data (see VI2.1). If a tool
management number (ID) not registered in the tool data is
input, a message No tool management number is found.
is displayed. if DEL, INPUT is keyed in, the registered
tool management number is deleted from the tooling
information.
When using a tool already registered in the tooling information, the other
data is automatically displayed if the tool selection number (TN) is input.
At new registration, the tool configuration data and setting data registered
in the tool data are displayed if the tool management number (ID) is input.
(1) Turning Tools
Tool Configuration Data Display (Display Only; Not Alterable)
(Center drill)
Tool type
Tool tip angle
Drill diameter
(Drill)
Tool type
Tool tip angle
Drill diameter
TP; drill
AN;
DD;
(Reamer)
Tool type
Tool diameter
Cutter length
Biting length
TP; reamer
DT;
LT;
LE;
(Tap)
Tool type
Tool diameter
Cutter length
Biting length
Pitch
TP; tap
DT;
LT;
LE;
PT;
99
APPENDIX
(Groove/Neck/Cut off)
Tool type
Tool tip radius
Cutter angle
Tool tip angle
Tool tip width
Virtual tool tip position
(Thread)
Tool type
Cutter angle
Tool tip angle
Virtual tool tip position
(General)
Tool type
Tool tip radius
Cutter angle
Tool tip angle
Cutter protective angle
Virtual tool tip position
(Finger)
Tool type
Virtual tool tip position
B61804E2/05
TP; grooving/necking
RN;
AC;
AN;
WN;
XN;
ZN;
TP; thread
AC;
AN;
XN;
ZN;
TP; general
RN;
AC;
AN;
AP;
XN;
ZN;
TP; finger
XN;
100
B61804E2/05
APPENDIX
(Drill)
Tool type
Tool material
Tool diameter
Cutter length
Tool tip angle
(Tap)
Tool type
Tool material
Tool diameter
Cutter length
Biting length
Pitch
(End mill)
Tool type
Tool material
Tool diameter
Cutting diameter
Cutter length
Number of tools
APPENDIX
B61804E2/05
In the diagram, the upper picture is the tool for cutter No.1 and the lower
picture is the tool for cutter No.2.
(Cautions about Tool Picture)
1. The chip only is displayed if the holder has not been defined for the
tool.
2. It is impossible to change the chip or holder scale value.
102
B61804E2/05
B.1.1.5
Machining start position
APPENDIX
When all tool data are input, the system asks you the machining start
position as follows.
MACHINING START POSITION
XAXIS . . . . . . . DXO =
ZAXIS . . . . . . . ZO =
NOTE
By the establishment of system parameter (No.0009), the
questions on the machining start position can be skipped.
B.1.1.6
Passing point
(1) This function designates the passing point of a tool when approaching
to the work from the machining start position, and the passing point
of a tool when returning to the next machining start position after
completion of the machining.
APPENDIX
B61804E2/05
104
APPENDIX
B61804E2/05
B.1.1.7
Cutting direction
105
B.1.1.8
Cutting conditions
APPENDIX
B61804E2/05
INPUT
106
B61804E2/05
APPENDIX
CUTTING CONDITIONS 2
CLEARANCE . . . . . . . . . C =
CUT POINT . . . . . . . . . . . Z =
CUTTING CONDITIONS 3
CLEARANCE . . . . . . . . . C = Clearance (mm or inch)
CLEARANCE . . . . . . . . . C1 = Secondary drilling clearance
CUT POINT . . . . . . . . . . . Z = Position of cut end point (mm or
inch)
(When bit 7 of system parameter
702 is 1)
or
DEPTH OF CUT . . . . . . . D = Depth of cut (mm or inch)
(When bit 7 of system parameter
702 is 0)
DEPTH OF CUT . . . . . . . D1 = Primary drilling depth
(mm or inch)
DEPTH OF CUT . . . . . . . D2 = Secondary drilling depth
(mm or inch)
RETURN AMOUNT . . . . U = Amount of return (mm or inch)
SPINDLE ROTATION . . . N = Spindle rotation speed (rpm)
107
APPENDIX
B61804E2/05
CAUTION
D1 and D2 in Machining method 2 and Machining method
3
As shown in figure 7 and figure 8, D1 and D2 in
machining method 2 and machining method 3 are input as
positive values.
Associated parameter
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
702
108
#1
#0
B61804E2/05
APPENDIX
(3) Reaming
CLEARANCE . . . . . . . C =
CUTTING POINT . . . . Z =
SPINDLE SPEED . . . . N =
FEED RATE . . . . . . . . . F =
Workpiece face
(4) Tapping
RPM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N = Speed of rotation (rpm)
CLEARANCE . . . . . . . C1 = Amount of clearance (mm or inches)
(Default value is system parameter
195)
CUTTING POINT . . . . Z = Cutting endpoint coordinate
(CAUTION 1)
109
APPENDIX
B61804E2/05
CAUTION
1 A value is assigned to Z in accordance with the system of
coordinates on this screen. Where the Z axis is plotted as
shown in the figure on the right the value of Z will always be
negative.
Whatever the drawing format the right hand end of the Z axis
is always positive on the Machining definition screen of
menu No.4. Specifications of the machining start points and
intermediate points are all made in accordance with this
system of coordinates. The cutting points are also therefore
specified in accordance with the same coordinate system.
110
B61804E2/05
APPENDIX
111
APPENDIX
B61804E2/05
RETURN AMOUNT . . . . U =
CLEARANCE . . . . . . . . . C =
112
B61804E2/05
APPENDIX
NOTE
There are no questions, TW, TB, or F2 in the case of
necking. There are no questions on pecking 1 machining
in grooving finish machining and necking machining.
(12) Threading conditions
CLEARANCE . . . . . . . CT =
CS =
CE =
DEPTH OF CUT . . . . . D =
DL =
CUTTING SPEED . . . . V =
CAUTION
2 Whether the inquiry of MAXIMUM RPM is made or not
depends on the status of bit 0 of system parameter No.702.
0 : The inquiry is not made.
(The maximum spindle speed depends on the value set
in parameter No.128.)
1 : The maximum spindle speed is set every process.
Setting of system parameter No.128 is neglected.
However, the system does not ask this maximum spindle
speed if the process is set in such a way as the constant
surface speed function is not used in system parameters
No.107 115.
A value of system parameter No.128 is output in these
processes. Also, the question of the maximum spindle
speed is omitted when cutting another position by using
the same tool.
(13) 1st override for outside diameter roughing
For outside diameter roughing, override can be applied to the 1st depth
of cut and feed rate.
In the machining definition of outside diameter roughing, the system
asks the override value on the cutting condition screen. Answer this
question, key in the override value. It is possible to omit the question
on the override value on the cutting condition screen by advance
setting to skip the override value and question on the override value
in the system parameter.
113
APPENDIX
B61804E2/05
(a) Parameter
(i) System parameter No.104 (Initial value = 0)
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
Bit 1 Designation of 1st override value question skipping for 1st override value
for outside diameter roughing depth of cut
0 : Skip
1 : No skip
(ii)System parameter No.711 (Initial value = 100)
Set the 1st override for outside diameter roughing depth of cut.
Not defined: 100%
n: n%
CAUTION
However, the override setting is up to 10 to 100%.
When other values than this range are set, the override
value is 100%.
(b) Explanation of operation
(i) When skipping the question on the override value:
Set bit 1 of system parameter No.104 to 0 and the override value
to No.711.
In this setting, the system does not ask the override value on the
cutting condition screen for the outside diameter roughing
definition but with the system parameter No.711 value as the
override value, the 1st override processing for outside diameter
roughing is carried out automatically.
(ii)When no skipping the question on the override value:
Set bit 1 of system parameter No.104 to 1: the system asks the
following on the cutting condition screen for the outside
diameter roughing definition.
1st override ... % =
NOTE
For New, the system parameter No.711 value is set as the
initial value.
For Modifications, the value set so far is displayed.
Answer this question, key in the override value.
When the value on the display is acceptable, key in INPUT
only.
NOTE
Even when the 1st override value for outside diameter
roughing depth of cut is changed, the system parameter
No.711 value remains unchanged.
114
B61804E2/05
B.1.1.9
Cutting area definitions
APPENDIX
The cursors (D) are displayed along the parts figure to specify the cutting
area.
A blank figure (dotted line) and machining figure (solid line) will be
drawn on the CRT screen, the system asks you the dividing directions.
(1) Machining area
Designate the cutting area of parts figure from the start point to end
point by flickering cursors on the CRT screen. One cursor shows the
start point, while the other shows the end point of the cutting area.
shift the cursor along the parts figure for selecting the start point and
end point.
CURSOR
FORWRD
or
CURSOR
BACK
key.
The cursor shifts along the parts figure, each time the above key is
pressed.
(3) Division
After designating the start point and end point, input the dividing
direction of the blank to define the cutting point.
Depress arrow key when the system asks you the following questions.
DIVIDING DIRECTION ... DS = Dividing direction at start point
DIVIDING DIRECTION ... DE = Dividing direction at end point
115
APPENDIX
B61804E2/05
116
B61804E2/05
APPENDIX
A pocket may be produced, depending upon parts figure and tool figure
as illustrated above. In such a case, designate the area to cut such a pocket
only by using a reversible tool.
117
APPENDIX
B61804E2/05
B.1.2
Cut off Machining, Bar
Feed
B.1.2.1
Cut off machining
Setting of tool data
When the system parameter No.140 is defined as Definition for cut off
machining, on the screen which defines the type of machining, by
displaying as cut off, the cut off machining can be selected.
118
B61804E2/05
APPENDIX
Definition of cutting
conditions
119
APPENDIX
B61804E2/05
Designate the cutting speed for a b and b c in Fig. B.1.2.1 (c) below
with V1, the feed rate with F1, c d cutting speed with V2 and the
feedrate with F2.
120
B61804E2/05
APPENDIX
Further, the cutting path when one previous element figure is designated
as the cutting start position with the cursor moved is illustrated below.
(Fig. B.1.2.1 (f))
121
APPENDIX
B61804E2/05
B.1.2.2
Bar feed
(2) The bar feed amount is the distance between the work edge left after
cuttingoff and the work edge defined by the blank figure. This
amount is automatically calculated by the system.
NOTE
The bar feed process cannot be seen by the animation
drawing.
122
APPENDIX
B61804E2/05
Setting of cutting
conditions
The cutting condition screen initially asks you to input the type of
machining.
Type . . . . . . . . BT =
Type 1:
Pullout method 1
Type 2:
Pullout method 2
Type 3:
Slidestop method 1
Type 4:
Slidestop method 2
Changing the type value alters the contents of the prompt accordingly.
123
APPENDIX
B61804E2/05
124
B61804E2/05
APPENDIX
125
APPENDIX
B61804E2/05
B.1.3
Machining Definition of
Caxis Machining
B.1.3.1
Specification of Caxis
machining definition
Tool data and the tool picture are displayed respectively on the left and
right of the screen. (The tool picture is displayed if the optional
animation drawing function is available. To display the tool picture,
press the soft key CHECK.)
The following prompts will be displayed.
TURRET NO. . . . . . . . . . . TL = (NOTE 1)
TOOL SELECT NO. . . . . TN =
TOOL OFFSET NO. . . . . TM =
TOOL ID NO. . . . . . . . . . ID = (NOTE 2)
126
B61804E2/05
APPENDIX
NOTE
1 The turret number prompt is displayed if there are more than
1 tool rests. The number of tool rests is to be set in
No.MTF1050.
2 The tool ID number (ID) to be input must have been
registered in tool data. If a tool ID number (ID) not registered
in tool data is input, a message This ID is not registered in
tool data. is displayed. Also if a tool ID number having a tool
type not compatible with the present process is input, a
message The tool type of this ID is not compatible with the
present process. is displayed. The registered tool ID
number is deleted from the tooling information if keyed in as
DEL INPUT.
When using a tool which has already been registered in the tooling
information, the other data is automatically displayed if the tool selection
number (TN) is input.
In new registration, the data of the tool configuration and that of setting
which have been registered in the tool data are displayed if the tool ID
number (ID) is input.
(Center Drill)
TOOL TYPE
TOOL MATERIAL
TOOL DIAMETER
CUT WIDTH
CUT LENGTH
NOSE ANGLE
(Drill)
TOOL TYPE
TOOL MATERIAL
TOOL DIAMETER
CUT LENGTH
NOSE ANGLE
(Tap)
TOOL TYPE
TOOL MATERIAL
TOOL DIAMETER
CUT LENGTH
PECK LENGTH
PITCH
(End mill)
TOOL TYPE
TOOL MATERIAL
TOOL DIAMETER
CUT WIDTH
CUT LENGTH
CUT COUNT
127
APPENDIX
B61804E2/05
B61804E2/05
APPENDIX
APPENDIX
B61804E2/05
TS
TS
Part
removed by
roughing
TS
Tool
position for
roughing
TS
130
APPENDIX
B61804E2/05
B.1.3.2
1) Center drilling
Explanatory drawing of
cutting conditions
Dotted line:
Solid line:
2) Drilling
a) Machining method 1
b) Machining method 2
131
Rapid
traverse
Cutting
feed
APPENDIX
B61804E2/05
c) Machining method 3
b) Through hole
132
B61804E2/05
APPENDIX
4) Grooving
a) Side (Zaxis direction)
c) End face
133
B.1.3.3
Blind hole and through
hole
APPENDIX
B61804E2/05
(2) Drilling
134
B61804E2/05
APPENDIX
B.2
AUTOMATIC
PROCESS
SPECIFICATION FOR
5700 SERIES
B.2.1
Outline
B.2.2
Operation
135
APPENDIX
B61804E2/05
(2) Press the AUTO and then the PROCESS SETTING screen is
displayed. The data being displayed at this point includes the
machining method group number (No.000) and the description of
machining procedure data of that group (No.100 130, No.200 230,
No.300 330).
If the machining method group number of setting data is undefined at
this time, the machining procedure data of group number set by blank
figure is displayed.
(3) Press the software key EXEC if the machining method group and
machining procedure data displayed on the screen are proper.
(4) Input the machining group number for the MG = question when
modifying the machining method group.
(5) Move the cursor by the software key CURSOR to modify the
description of machining procedure data when modifying the
description of machining procedure data.
The meaning of software key used for modifying operation is as follows:
[CURSOR ] [CURSOR ] . . Set the cursor to the position where
machining procedure is deleted or
inserted.
[PROC DELETE] . . . . . . . . . It deletes the process where the cursor is
blinking.
[INSERT] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Insert a new process before the process
where a cursor is blinking.
i) When this software key is pressed, the software key for setting the
type of process appears.
ii) The software key for setting the type of process changes cyclicly
by pressing the software key .
iii) Press the software key of process type inserted to allow a new
process to be inserted.
iv) Press the software key to allow the insertion mode to be
released.
136
B61804E2/05
APPENDIX
[ESCAPE] . . . Press this key to return to the menu screen. At this time,
the details where correction has been made remain on the
main memory but are not registered on the sub memory.
[EXEC] . . . . . Automatically create the process according to the
machining procedure data displayed.
137
APPENDIX
B61804E2/05
(6) When the processing begins, various data and tooling information,
material data set in the setting data will automatically decide
machining processes, tools, and machining area. The screen will
display how the material shape changes according to the automatic
specification. (The screen proceeds automatically.)
For the Caxis processing, the change of blank material being cut
is not displayed, but the machining area is indicated by the cursor.
(7) After preparing all machining process, the screen will display the
list of the process, and stops. Press the [NEXT PAGE] soft key to
continue it to NC data preparation. To check or to correct data,
select correction mode in menu number 4, press the [CURSOR
FORWRD] or [CURSOR BACK] soft keys to the necessary
machining process, and press the [INPUT] key or the [NEXT
PAGE] soft key.
138
B61804E2/05
APPENDIX
B.2.3
Setting
B.2.3.1
Setting data
Preset the data used in automatic process specification, via the setting
screen. To display the setting screen, first press the DATA SET soft key,
and then key in 2 INPUT.
(1) Machining order data (100 129, 200 229, 300 329)
Set data to indicate what order the machining is to be done.
The setting of the machining process is done with numbers. The
numbers and the machining processes correspond as follows:
1. CENTER DRILLING
2. DRILLING
3. ROUGH FACING
4. ROUGHING OF OUTER FIGURE
5. ROUGHING OF INNER FIGURE
6. SEMIFINISHING FACING
7. SEMIFINISHING OF OUTER FIGURE
8. SEMIFINISHING OF INNER FIGURE
9. FINISHING FACING
10. FINISHING OF OUTER FIGURE
11. FINISHING OF INNER FIGURE
12. GROOVING FACING
13. GROOVING OF OUTER FIGURE
14. GROOVING OF INNER FIGURE
15. NECKING OF OUTER FIGURE
16. NECKING OF INNER GIGURE
17. THREADING FACING
18. THREADING OF OUTER FIGURE
19. THREADING OF INNER FIGURE
Above are turning processes.
20 to 29 are not used.
30. FACE CENTER DRILLING
31. SIDE CENTER DRILLING
32. FACE DRILLING
33. SIDE DRILLING
34. FACE TAPPING
35. SIDE TAPPING
36. CAXIS FACE GROOVING
37. CAXIS SIDE GROOVING
Above are Caxis machining.
FAPT performs automatic specification of machining process according
to the order set here. Machining processes not set here cannot
automatically be prepared.
139
APPENDIX
B61804E2/05
Format
Initial value
Descriptions
100
200
300
Integer
Undefined
101
201
301
Integer
102
202
302
Integer
103
203
303
Integer
104
204
304
Integer
105
205
305
Integer
106
206
306
Integer
10
107
207
307
Integer
11
108
208
308
Integer
12
109
209
309
Integer
13
110
210
310
Integer
14
111
211
311
Integer
15
112
212
312
Integer
16
113
213
313
Integer
17
114
214
314
Integer
18
115
215
315
Integer
19
116
216
316
Integer
30
117
217
317
Integer
32
118
218
318
Integer
34
119
219
319
Integer
36
120
220
320
Integer
31
121
221
321
Integer
33
122
222
322
Integer
35
123
223
323
Integer
37
124
224
324
Integer
Undefined
125
225
325
Integer
Undefined
126
226
326
Integer
Undefined
127
227
327
Integer
Undefined
128
228
328
Integer
Undefined
129
229
329
Integer
Undefined
140
Remarks
(NOTE)
Turning
(NOTE)
Caxis
machining
APPENDIX
B61804E2/05
NOTE
Set the initial value and machining procedure
correspondence described on the previous page.
(2) Manual input flag data (Nos.130 166, 230 266, 330 366)
These data will have no meaning unless the machining process is set
in the machining procedure data.
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
MPP
#2
MCD
#1
MCC
#0
MTS
141
APPENDIX
B61804E2/05
Format
Initial Value
Remarks
130 230
00000000
CENTER DRILL
131 231
00000000
DRILLING
132 232
00000000
ROUGH FACING
133 233
00000000
134 234
00000000
135 235
00000000
SEMIFINISH OF FACING
136 236
00000000
SEMIFINISH OF OUTER
FIG
137 237
00000000
SEMIFINISH OF INNER
FIG
138 238
00000000
FINISH FACING
139 239
00000000
140 240
00000000
141 241
00000000
GROOVE FACING
142 242
00000000
143 243
00000000
144 244
00000000
145 245
00000000
146 246
00000000
THREAD FACING
147 247
00000000
148 248
00000000
149 249
to
to
158 258
349
to
358
159 259
00000000
160 260
00000000
161 261
00000000
FACE DRILLING
162 262
00000000
SIDE DRILLING
163 263
00000000
FACE TAPPING
164 264
00000000
SIDE TAPPING
165 265
00000000
166 266
00000000
142
Unused
APPENDIX
B61804E2/05
Group selection (1 3)
Initial value 1 (Setting data of the 1st group is used.)
When this value is undefined, the group is decided from
the blank shape. When the blank is a bar, grout 1 is
selected, when it is a pipe, group 2 is selected, and when
it is of special blank, group 3 is selected.
No.1
Not used
No.2
Not used
No.3
No.4
No.5
Unused.
No.10
No.11
No.12
No.20
No.21
No.22
B.2.3.2
Tool data and tooling
information
APPENDIX
B61804E2/05
144
APPENDIX
B61804E2/05
B.2.4
Cautions and Notes
NOTE
Facing is always done from the +X direction to the X
direction.
Rough machining
Finishing
CAUTION
If outer figure machining is set to the machining procedure
data without setting the facing, machining will be done
regarding the face as the outer figure.
Rough machining
Finishing
145
APPENDIX
B61804E2/05
CAUTION
Finishing of Outer Figure
If machining processes are set in the machining procedure
data in the order of FINISHING FACING and FINISHING
OF OUTER FIGURE, the outer diameter part is cut by using
the same tool after cutting the end face from the outside to
the center as shown in Fig. B.2.4 (a) when there exists no
inner diameter part.
When an inner diameter part exists, cutting is done
continuously at the end face part through outer diameter
part as shown in Fig. B.2.4 (b)
CAUTION
If the pocket machining leaves some remainder, tool is
automatically changed, and the remainder will not be cut.
The remainder must be cut later, preparing the machining
process manually by monitoring the screen.
146
B61804E2/05
APPENDIX
NOTE
1 Multiple neckings and threadings can be done, if the same
tool is used.
2 In necking, (a) and (b) of the following figure can be
machined, but (c) or (d) where back handed tools are
required, cannot be machined. In these cases, add
machining process manually, after automatic machining
process decision.
NOTE
Cannot be used for chaser turret.
CAUTION
If a center drilling process is set as a machining procedure
data, a center drilling process is always prepared
irrespective of the part shape. However, the center drilling
process is not generated, if the center drilling tool is not
loaded into tooling data, even if center drilling is included in
Machining procedure data of setting data. When the
center drilling process is not required, do not set a center
drilling process on the machining procedure data. Or delete
the center drilling process as required after preparing all the
processes.
147
APPENDIX
B61804E2/05
NOTE
When a drilling tool with the diameter equal to the inside
diameter width is used, no inside diameter machining is
performed even when inside diameter machining operation
has been set in the machining procedure setting.
In Fig. B.2.4 (d) example, no inside diameter machining
process itself is generated.
In Fig. B.2.4 (e) example, inside diameter machining is
generated, but it is only in the region where the starting point
is A and the end point is B.
NOTE
When the starting point of inside diameter cutting is on the
outside diameter of meterial as shown in Fig. B.2.4 (f) below,
the operation is as follows.
(a)When Drill I.D is set in the machining procedure data,
drilling process is prepared, but no inside diameter
machining is prepared.
(b)If drilling is not set in the machining procedure data,
inside diameter machining is executed.
148
Revision Record
CONVERSATIONAL AUTOMATIC PROGRAMMING FUNCTION FOR LATHE
(Series 15MODEL B, Series 16 CAP II) OPERATORS MANUAL (B61804E2)
04
03
02
Aug., 94
Dec., 93
Sep., 93
Total revision
Addition of 16TC CAP II, 18TC CAP II, 16iTA CAP II,
and 18iTA CAP II
05
Aprr., 98
A
98
01
Dec., 90
Date
Contents
Edition
Date